JP2019107558A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can increase motivation to play a game.SOLUTION: A game machine capable of generating a special game state advantageous to a player when a game result is a special result includes: an operation unit (e.g. a handle 11) operated by the player; performance means (e.g. a display device 41) capable of executing a performance related to a game; and performance control means (e.g. a performance control device 300) for controlling the performance. The performance control means has a function to change a performance to be operated by the performance means before starting the game, in response to the operation of the operation unit while a customer waiting performance is executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 115

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a display device capable of displaying a variable display game based on a plurality of identification information and a start winning hole are provided on a game board, and a player operates a handle as an operation unit. Is known to be played on the variable display device by playing the game ball onto the game board and the game ball winning on the starting winning opening.
Further, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, the emission mode of the game balls is monitored, and the progress mode (specifically, the reach occurrence rate) of the variable display game is controlled based on the result.

JP 2004-8492 A

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can be motivated to play a game.

  The invention according to claim 1 has the following features.

That is, the invention according to claim 1 is
In a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on establishment of a predetermined start condition and generating a special gaming state advantageous to a player when the game results in a special result,
An operation unit operated by the player;
Rendering means capable of performing rendering related to the game;
And effect control means for controlling the effect.
The effect control means is
It is characterized by having a function of changing the effect to be performed by the effect means before the game is started, in response to the operation of the operation unit being performed while the customer waiting effect is being performed.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the motivation to play a game.

It is a front side perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a reverse view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing a control system (mainly a game control device) of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart which shows timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows input processing. It is a flow chart which shows switch reading processing. It is a flowchart which shows an output process. It is a flowchart which shows payment command transmission processing. 5 is a flowchart showing a random number update process 1; 5 is a flowchart showing random number update processing 2; It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize mouth switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fraud & prize monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows winning number counter update processing. It is a flowchart which shows gaming machine state check processing. It is a flowchart which shows a payment busy signal check process. It is a flow chart which shows special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows a starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure starting opening switch common process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure reservation information determination processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth switch monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows a special figure usual processing. It is a flow chart which shows special figure usual processing shift setting processing 1. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 1 change start processing and special figure 2 change start processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit flag 1 setting processing and big hit flag 2 setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows small hit judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows special drawing information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows change start information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing shift setting processing (special figure 1, special figure 2) during special figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows a process in special figure fluctuation. It is a flow chart which shows processing shift setting processing during a special figure display. It is a flow chart which shows processing under special figure display. It is a flow chart which shows processing under special figure display. It is a flow chart which shows high probability change frequency number update processing. It is a flowchart which shows production mode information check processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing transition setting processing 1 during fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart which shows small shift fanfare middle processing transition setting processing 1. It is a flow chart which shows processing during fanfare / interval. It is a flow chart which shows processing shift setting processing during special winning opening opening. It is a flow chart which shows processing during big winning a prize opening. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth remaining ball processing shift setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth remaining ball processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing transition setting processing 2 during fanfare / interval. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing shift setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end setting processing 1 and 2. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a special processing ordinary processing shift setting process 2; It is a flowchart which shows small hitting fanfare middle processing and small hitting middle processing shift setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit middle process. It is a flowchart which shows small hit operation shift setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows small hit residual ball processing shift setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows small hitting remaining ball processing and small hitting end processing shift setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows small hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure usual processing shift setting processing 3. It is a flow chart which shows production command setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows design change control processing. It is a flowchart which shows distribution processing and 2-byte distribution processing. It is a flow chart which shows common drawing game processing. It is a flowchart which shows gate switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows a Fuden prize winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a common drawing normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the common drawing normal processing transfer setting processing 1. It is a flowchart which shows a process shift setting process during common drawing fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows a processing of a common drawing and processing transition setting processing during a common drawing display. It is a flowchart which shows a process in common drawing display. It is a flowchart which shows a process transfer setting process during a common drawing. It is a flowchart which shows a process in common drawing. It is a flowchart which shows a power transmission operation shift setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a generalization residual ball process and a per drawing common termination process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the end processing per common drawing, and the common processing normal processing transfer setting processing 2. It is a flowchart which shows segment LED edit processing. It is a flowchart which shows a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows board radio wave fraud monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows main prize ball | bowl signal edit processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening signal editing processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a presentation control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows sound control processing. It is a flow chart which shows hall / player setting mode processing. It is a flowchart which shows a player volume adjustment process. It is a flowchart which shows a receiving command check process. It is a flowchart which shows a receiving command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a one-shot system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows a one-shot system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows emission touch information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows emission information control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a firing touch information initial value setting process. It is a flow chart which shows sphere rental information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows symbol system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows change type command processing. It is a flow chart which shows change production setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows change production setting processing. It is a figure explaining the range of volume control. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a hole setting screen. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a player setting screen. It is a figure which shows a mode when a volume switch is switched. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a screen display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a screen display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a screen display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a screen display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a screen display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a screen display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a screen display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a screen display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a screen display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a screen display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a screen display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the output audio classified by state at the time of handle touch. It is a figure explaining the fluctuation | variation frequency calculation method and a game presentation state. It is a figure which shows transition of a game presentation state (game state). It is a figure which shows a volume switch and LED for setting confirmation. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the screen display at the time of adjustment of volume etc. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a general power fluctuation time and a general power release time. It is a timing chart explaining the situation of the usual common drawing game. It is a timing chart explaining the situation of the common drawing game at the time of ST end. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening opening and closing pattern at the time of a small hit. It is a figure which shows a common charge operation timing chart (a common charge open pattern).

Hereinafter, a form example at the time of applying to a pachinko machine as Example 1 of the present invention is explained with reference to drawings.
A. Front Configuration of Pachinko Machine First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment.
The pachinko machine 1 is fixed to the island on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and by being pivotally supported by the hinge 3 on the machine frame 2, the pachinko machine 1 is mounted on the machine frame 2 And a front frame 4 which can be freely opened and closed. A game board 20 (shown in FIGS. 2 and 3) is attached to the front frame 4. The game board 20 is housed in a housing portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 4.

Further, a glass frame 5 is attached to the front frame 4 so as to cover the front upper side so as to be openable and closable. In addition, a game area 22 described later of the game board 20 can be viewed from the front through a glass plate (a transparent plastic board may be omitted, and a reference numeral is omitted) held by the glass frame 5. The glass frame 5 is pivotally supported by the front frame 4 at the hinge portion 3 so as to be openable and closable.
Here, the front frame 4 is referred to as a game frame (or main frame), and the glass frame 5 is sometimes referred to as a front frame, but in the present embodiment, the front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 are described. doing.
Below the glass frame 5, an operation panel 6 is provided.
Usually, a CR unit (also referred to as a card-type ball rental control unit or a card unit) as a gaming medium lending device may be juxtaposed to the pachinko machine 1, but it is not shown here. The CR unit is connected to a payout control device 200 described later via a card unit connection board (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 20 is a plate-like base (so-called veneer) having a game nail implanted on the front surface thereof, and the substantially circular area on the front surface is surrounded by the guide rails 21. 22 is formed. The game area 22 is an area for performing out or safe determination (determination as to whether or not a prize has been made) while dropping the game ball dropped from above from above, and when the game ball enters the winning opening and becomes effectively safe. Is configured such that a predetermined number of gaming balls are discharged to the upper plate 7 provided at the lower part of the glass frame 5 (i.e., discharged as a winning ball).
In addition, a key insertion portion 8 of a locking device (not shown) of the front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 is formed at an edge of the opening and closing side (right side in FIG. 1) of the front frame 4.

Further, the upper plate 7 provided at the lower part of the glass frame 5 temporarily holds the game ball before being discharged as a winning ball or a rental ball. At the upper edge of the upper tray 7, a push button type effect button 9 operated by the player is provided. The effect button 9 incorporates an effect button switch (effect button SW46) described later. Further, on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 9, a touch panel 9a for receiving a touch operation input from the player is provided.
Further, the operation panel 6 is provided with a lower plate 10 capable of transferring the game ball of the upper plate 7 by the operation of the player, and a discharge operation handle 11 (operation unit) for performing a discharge operation of the game ball. . Here, the launch operation handle 11 is provided with a touch switch 11a (also referred to as a touch sensor) for detecting whether or not the player's hand or the like touches (contacts) the launch operation handle 11. If the touch switch 11a detects that there is a touch on the firing operation handle 11, it can be determined that the player is playing a game (i.e., shooting a game ball). The touch switch 11a corresponds to contact detection means.
Moreover, what is shown by code | symbol 12a, 12b in FIG. 1 is a speaker which outputs an effect sound etc. FIG. Among them, reference numeral 12 a is an upper speaker provided on the upper left and right sides of the glass frame 5. Further, reference numeral 12 b is a lower speaker provided at the right end portion (right side of the lower plate 10) of the operation panel 6.

In the present embodiment, the touch panel 9a is provided integrally with the effect button 9, but the touch panel 9a may be separate from the effect button 9, and for example, a sub display device is provided near the effect button 9, The touch panel 9a may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.
Also, to the right of the effect button 9, a ball lending button 16 operated when the player receives a ball loan from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a discharge button operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine 17. Balance display unit (not shown) that displays the balance of the prepaid card
Etc. are provided. In the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) of this embodiment, the game ball is supplied with a launch device (not shown) from the upper tray 7 by the player turning the operation portion (the launch operation handle 11). To the game area 22 on the front of the game board 20. In addition, the player operates the effect button 9 or the touch panel 9a to cause the player to intervene in the variable display game (the decoration special view variable display game) on the display unit 41a (see FIG. 2) of the display device 41. Can be performed.
Further, in FIG. 1, reference numeral 13 denotes a decoration lamp using LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the front left and right of the glass frame 5 as a light emission source, and reference numeral 14 denotes a decoration lamp 13 on the right side. The logo display portion 14 (part for displaying the brand of the pachinko machine) formed on the side of the In addition, moving lights may be provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1. The moving lights include LEDs as a light source and a motor as a drive source. Here, if the decoration mechanism is divided according to the concept of the board and frame of the pachinko machine 1, the decoration lamp 13 and the moving light constitute a frame decoration device 43 (a decoration device on the frame side) shown in FIG. Also constitute a frame effect device (rendering device on the frame side) which is not shown.

B. Front Structure of the Game Board In FIG. 2, reference numeral 21 denotes a guide rail of the game board 20, and as described above, the game area 22 is formed by the substantially circular area on the front of the game board being surrounded by the guide rails 21. ing.
In the game area 22, as shown in FIG. 2, the out ball inlet 23, the center case 24, the first start winning opening 25, the normal fluctuation winning device 26 (second start winning as a regular electric role (Puden)) A variable winning device 27, general winning openings 28-31, a common drawing start gate 32, a large number of game nails (not shown), etc. are provided. Further, outside the gaming area 22 of the gaming board 20, a collective display device 35 is provided. A game ball which has jumped to the upper part of the game area 22 flows down while hitting it, and a plurality of game nails are planted in the game area excluding the attachment portion such as the center case.

The center case 24 is a member (game effect structure) surrounding the front periphery of the display unit 41a (shown in FIG. 2) of the display device 41 (shown in FIG. 5) attached to the back side of the game board 20. Although not shown, the center case 24 includes lamps using an LED for effect or decoration as a light emission source, or a motorized character (for example, enhancing effect effects in cooperation with effect indication on the display device 41 An article having a movable part operated by a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid is provided.
Note that lamps for effecting or decoration are also provided to portions other than the center case 24 of the gaming board 20 (may be outside the gaming area 22). The lamps provided for the presentation or decoration provided on the game board 20 (including the center case 24) correspond to the presentation mechanism on the board side, and constitute the board decoration device 42 (shown in FIG. 5). In addition, the electrically operated part provided in the center case 24 corresponds to a presentation mechanism on the board side, and constitutes a board presentation device 44 (shown in FIG. 5). In addition, the electrically operated combination which constitutes board production device 44 may be provided in places other than center case 24 of game board 20.

The display device 41 (rendering means, display means) includes, for example, a liquid crystal display device, and is generally referred to as a variable display device. In addition, as a name of the display device 41, as a name of a member having the same function, for example, a special symbol display device, a special view display device, a symbol variation device, a variable symbol display device, an identification information variation device, an identification information variation display device There are various types, but those with the same function are in the same category.
The display device 41 has a display unit 41a (screen) capable of displaying identification information (referred to as a special view) such as numbers and characters, and can display a plurality of special views. For example, a special figure is displayed in vertical three columns on the left side, center and right side, and a special figure consisting of numbers, characters, etc. is displayed in a stopped state (stopped display) in each column, or a fluctuation state (eg, vertically) It is possible to display (i.e., change display) in a scrolling state).
Further, on the display unit, an image for presentation or information notification such as a background image and a character image can be displayed separately from the above-mentioned special view.

Note that an image corresponding to a so-called common figure may be displayed on the display device 41. However, when a common drawing is displayed on the display device 41, it is a decoration common drawing. When it is set as the structure which displays a common figure on the display apparatus 41, the display apparatus 41 is corresponded to a normal symbol variable display apparatus.
Here, the special drawing is identification information (special symbol) variably displayed in the variable display game related to the big hit, and the common drawing is variably displayed in the variable display game related to the common drawing (not the big hit) Identification information (normal symbol).
The general drawing is not actually displayed on the display device 41, but is displayed on the collective display device 35. The common drawing displayed on the collective display unit 35 is called this common drawing as described later.

Further, the start winning opening 25 26a is a winning opening (winning area) which functions as a starting winning opening (sometimes called a starting opening or starting area) of the special drawing as described later, and is shown in FIG. 2 in this example. It is arranged side by side vertically. Strictly speaking, there is a start area (area where the game ball is detected as a start winning) inside the start winning opening, and it is detected as a start winning when the game ball enters the start winning opening. The upper first start winning opening 25 is always open. The lower second start winning opening 26a is in a state in which winning is possible when the opening and closing member 26b described later is opened (an open state where the possibility of winning of the game ball is high), and when the opening and closing member 26b is closed A possible state (a closed state where the probability of winning of the game ball is lower than the open state, zero probability of winning, or zero probability of winning in this embodiment) is obtained. The start winning openings 25 and 26 a are disposed below the central portion of the center case 24.
The normal fluctuation winning device 26 is a device (a so-called mini-attacker) having a second start winning opening 26a that is opened and closed by an opening and closing member 26b (opening and closing door), and is also referred to as an ordinary electric role (common electric). In the following, “open normal swing winning device 26”, “open common pressure”, “open second start winning opening 26a”, and “open open / close member 26b” all open the open / close member 26b. It means to put in a state. The normal fluctuation winning device 26 may be of a type in which the second start winning opening 26a is opened and closed by an opening and closing member that opens in a reverse C shape.
The variable winning device 27 is a device (so-called attacker) having a large winning opening 27a which is opened and closed by an opening and closing member 27b (opening and closing door). The large winning opening 27a is released on the condition that it becomes a big hit, which will be described later, and the game ball can be won. The opening and closing member 27b is driven by the special winning opening solenoid 133 (FIG. 4). Here, although the variation winning device (special variation winning device) including the special winning opening is illustrated as an example of only one in FIG. 2, there may be an embodiment in which there are a plurality of the variation winning devices in the game area 22. Further, the variable winning device may be of a type in which the special winning opening is opened and closed by an opening and closing member that opens in a reverse C shape.

A general drawing is also displayed separately from the special drawing on the collective display device 35 (details will be described later), and the common drawing game will be described as follows.
When the game ball passes the common drawing start gate 32, the collective display device 35 executes a common drawing fluctuation display game (hereinafter referred to as a common drawing fluctuation display game) by the fluctuation display of the common drawing, and the stopped common drawing is predetermined. If it is an aspect (specific display aspect), the privilege called per common drawing is provided.
When the display 41 is configured to display a common drawing, variation display of the common drawing (decorative drawing) is performed on the screen of the display 41. However, it is also possible to arrange a unique display of display separately from the display device 41.
When the hit is a hit, a game in which the opening / closing member 26b of the normal change winning device 26 is opened is temporarily held for a predetermined opening time, and the game ball is more likely to be start-up winning. The number of times the special display of the variable display game is increased and the possibility of becoming a big hit increases.
In addition, when the game ball is further awarded to the common drawing start gate 32 during the variable display game of the common drawing, the display of the common drawing start memory is executed by the display of the collective display device 35 described later. The game is stored up to one piece, and after the end of the floating display game of the common drawing, the floating display game of the common drawing is repeated based on the storage. In addition, it is easy to hit a common figure if the probability of the common drawing is high.
In addition, the reservation display of the common drawing start memory displayed by the display of the collective display unit 35 is the common drawing start memory. Apart from the batch display device 35, a unique spread map start memory indicator for displaying the decoration spread map memory may be arranged in the game area 22.

Here, the time reduction will be described as follows.
Time saving is an abbreviation of "time shortening", and after the big hit ends, the fluctuation time of the special figure or the spread map is shortened than usual, and the time efficiency is improved and the probability per spread figure is raised The number of times of execution of the variable display game of the specified special figure by supporting the winning a prize in the starting opening by opening the second starting winning opening 26a (including making the open time of the public longer than usual). It is a function to change the special figure efficiently without reducing the balls (number of balls). That is, the term “time-saving” means narrowing the fluctuation time of the special drawing or general drawing more than usual, but it is special to be performed in the so-called general power support state (power support state) to increase the winning possibility to the public. It may mean the whole control. The special control performed in the common use support state is a control (for example, the common view change time) for changing the change pattern of the common view (normal change time, common stop time, etc.) in a favorable manner as described above. Control, etc.), control to increase the probability per common drawing, control to change the open pattern (open time, open count, etc.) of the public advantageously to the player (eg, control to lengthen open time, or control to increase open count) Or any one or more of them.

Next, the collective display unit 35 displays so-called generic drawings and special drawings, and also displays pending storage of special drawings and generic drawings (in some cases, referred to as special drawings reserve display and popular diagrams reserve display), games The display of the state is performed, for example, a plurality of displays using an LED as a light source (for example, a display consisting of one small lamp, or a display of, for example, 7 segments capable of displaying numbers etc. as this special drawing) Components). For example, among the LED segments in the collective display device 35, those displaying Special Drawing 1 are arranged as Special Drawing 1 displays, those displaying Special Drawing 2 are arranged as Special Drawing 2 displays.
Note that the display of start memory storage (in some cases, simply referred to as start memory display) is a display for notifying of the number of start memory memories etc. that are suspended in a state where the variable display game has not been performed. Is displayed by lighting of a lamp or the like for each start memory. That is, if there are three starting memories, this is done by lighting three lamps or displaying three figures.
It is to be noted that while the display shown by the display unit of the collective display unit 35 is the special view or the general view (the formal special view or the general view), the display unit of the variable display unit 41 described above The display of a special drawing or a common drawing (in the case where the configuration in which the common display is displayed by the variable display device 41 is adopted) is a dummy display for effect for the player. For this reason, the player refers to the dummy display when speaking of a special drawing or a drawing as seen from the player. In addition, below, when emphasizing that it is this dummy display, it describes, for example as "the decoration special figure" and "the decoration common figure".
As described above, this batch display device 35 is not intended for the player, but is used for inspection of the game board 20 or the like. For example, the display of the start memory of the special view for the player (special view suspension display) is performed by, for example, the display unit of the variable display device 41 or a plurality of lamps (light emitting units) provided on the game board 20.

C. Configuration of Pachinko Machine Back Side Next, FIG. 3 is a view showing the back side of the game board 20 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment.
The main components of the back mechanism in the pachinko machine 1 include a storage tank (not shown), a guide path (not shown), a dispensing unit (not shown), a card unit connection board (not shown), an external information terminal board 55 (see FIG. 4), a payout control device 200 (shown in FIG. 4), a game control device 100, an effect control device 300, and a power supply device 500 (shown in FIG. 4). Among these, the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 are provided on the back surface of the game board 20 as shown in FIG.
In FIG. 3, the box of the effect control device 300 is not directly visible originally, and a box for storing the substrate of the effect control device 300 is disposed at the back of the cover member (not shown). The cover member has a function of preventing the game ball from entering the back of the gaming machine, and has a structure that can be opened and closed like a door, for example. However, as shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 122, a volume switch (volume SW) 388 and a setting confirmation LED 339, which will be described later, of the effect control device 300 are exposed on the back side of the game board 20. A staff member or a store clerk at the game arcade can operate the volume SW 338 while watching the setting confirmation LED 339.

The storage tank stores the balls before being dispensed in advance, and the shortage of the number of balls in this storage tank is detected by a replenishment sensor (not shown). The balls are replenished. The balls in the storage tank are guided by the induction passage and discharged to the above-mentioned upper tray 7 by the dispensing unit. The payout unit is capable of discharging the game balls of the number of balls according to the rotation amount of the built-in payout motor, and the gaming balls to be paid out toward the upper tray 7 by this payout unit have a payout ball detection switch (not shown) Detected by
The external information terminal board 55 has a function as a relay terminal board (external terminal board) when sending various information of the pachinko machine 1 to the management apparatus of the hole.

The payout control device 200 performs control (including control of the payout unit) necessary for the payout of the gaming ball (both the payout for the winning ball and the payout for the rental ball), and a circuit for realizing this control function in a predetermined case A substrate is housed and configured. The payout control device 200 discharges a predetermined number of gaming balls as the winning balls to the upper tray 7 based on the payout control command which is connected to the game control device 100 and transmitted from the game control device 100 as shown in FIG. Control the award ball payout. Further, the payout control device 200 controls the rental ball payout to discharge the predetermined number of gaming balls as the rental balls to the upper tray 7 based on the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal from the card unit.
The game control apparatus 100 controls solenoids and the like disposed on the game board 20, sends control information (commands) to other control devices, and generally manages and controls the progress of the game (see FIG. A substrate on which a circuit including a microcomputer for performing these controls is formed is housed in a predetermined case, which will be described in detail later.

  The effect control device 300 controls the display device 41, the decoration lamp, the effect device, the speakers 12a and 12b described above based on the command transmitted from the game control device 100, and this control function is provided in a predetermined case. A circuit board to be realized is housed and configured. A sound volume switch (sound volume SW) 388 and a setting confirmation LED 339 are provided on the back surface of the effect control device 300, as shown in FIGS. The volume SW 338 is a switch (switch) for changing (switching) the default value of the effective range (the range in which the player can also adjust the volume) and the effective range regarding the volume of the sound effects and BGM output from the speakers 12a and 12b. The operation unit is, for example, one that is pinched with a finger and operated to rotate. When the setting value changed by the volume SW 338 matches the default setting value registered in the backup RAM (for example, FeRAM 327 described later), the setting confirmation LED 339 is turned on by the control of the effect control device 300, The match is notified to the operator to facilitate the change of the sound volume by the sound volume SW 338.

The card unit connection board is a board for wiring connection between the pachinko machine 1 side and the CR unit (card unit) side where a ball is lent out. If the above-mentioned wiring connection is not made on the card unit connection board, the pachinko machine 1 is controlled so that the game ball can not be released.
Generally, in the case of model exchange of pachinko machines, etc., replace the entire pachinko machine except CR unit, or leave the frame side of the pachinko machine (including the payout control device), and the game board side (game board and game control) In some cases, only major control devices such as devices may be replaced.

D. Configuration of Control System Next, a control system of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 7. In the drawings and the following description, "SW" means a switch. Further, in the drawings, when the name of the member is long, it becomes difficult to be illustrated, so it may be appropriately shortened (not shown).
The pachinko machine 1 includes a game control device 100, a payout control device 200, an effect control device 300, a launch control device (not shown), and a power supply device 500 as main components of a control system.

(Game control related)
First, the configuration of the game control apparatus 100 of the pachinko machine 1 and the devices connected to the game control apparatus 100 will be described with reference to FIG.
The game control device 100 is a main control device (main substrate) that controls the game in an integrated manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 101 and an inspection device connection terminal (not shown). There is. The game control device 100 corresponds to a control device or control means. The detailed configuration of the game control device 100 will be described later.
The inspection device connection terminal is configured to include, for example, a photo coupler 179 (shown in FIG. 4), and is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various game information obtained from the gaming microcomputer 101 to the inspection device 185 is connected. .

In the game control apparatus 100, a first start opening switch 120 (starting opening 1 switch in FIG. 4), a second starting opening switch 121 (starting opening 2 switch in FIG. 4), a gate switch 122, a winning opening switch 123, big winnings Detection signals from the mouth switch 124, the magnetic sensor 126, the board radio wave sensor 127, the glass frame open detection switch 211, and the front frame open detection switch 212 (the main frame open detection switch in FIG. 4) are input.
Here, the first starting opening switch 120 is a sensor for detecting winning balls one by one for detecting the game balls winning in the first starting winning opening 25, and the second starting opening switch 121 is the second starting winning opening It is a sensor for winning ball detection which detects the game ball which won 26a one by one.
The special winning opening switch 124 is a similar sensor (a so-called count switch) for detecting a game ball that has won in the special winning opening 27a of the variable winning device 27. When there are a plurality of special winning openings, the number of the special winning opening switches 124 is approximately one or two each, as a whole as a whole.
Further, the winning opening switches 123 are similar sensors provided for the general winning openings 28 to 31, and when there are n general winning openings, n in total are provided one by one each. It should be noted that one sensor may be provided for a plurality of general winning openings instead of providing one sensor for each of the general winning openings. The gate switch 122 is a sensor for detecting the gaming balls passing through the common view starting gate 32 one by one.
The above sensors 120, 121, 122, 123, 124 for detecting these gaming balls are proximity switches in this example, and are circuits for outputting detection signals of negative logic such as high level 11V and low level 7V. It is configured.

The magnetic sensor 126 and the board radio wave sensor 127 are sensors provided on the back surface of the game board 20 and the like for detecting fraud by magnetism or radio waves. For example, the magnetic sensor 126 is disposed at each of the general winning openings 28, 30, 31 and the large winning opening 27a of the variable winning device 27 on the game board 20 (that is, arranged at four locations). A magnet is used around the large winning opening 27a of the variable winning device 27 to collect game balls and detect irregularities such as facilitating the winning on each winning opening. The magnetic sensor 126 may not be disposed at four locations as described above, but may be disposed at more locations.
When there are k installation points, k magnetic sensors 126 are provided, one for each, as a whole. Similarly, when there are m installation locations of the board radio wave sensors 127, one m each of them is provided as a whole as a whole.
Furthermore, the glass frame open detection switch 211 is a sensor that detects that the glass frame 5 on the front of the pachinko machine is open. A front frame (body frame) opening detection switch 212 is a sensor that detects that the front frame 4 to which the glass frame 5 is attached is open.
Although the game control apparatus 100 is provided with a proximity I / F 163 for processing signals from the sensors 120, 121, 122, 123, 124, 127, the details will be described later.

Here, in the game control apparatus 100 and electronic components such as later-described solenoids 132 and 133 driven by the game control apparatus 100, a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 500 is Supplied and enabled.
The power supply device 500 is a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC voltage of 32 V from an AC power supply of 24 V and a DC-DC converter that generates DC voltages of 12 V and 5 V lower than DC voltage of 32 V DC. And a backup power supply unit 502 for supplying a power supply voltage to the RAM (RAM 101C to be described later) in the gaming microcomputer 101 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit. A control signal generation unit 503 is provided which generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal to be notified.

Although a RAM clear switch (RAM initialization switch) 504 for initializing the RAM and the like in the gaming microcomputer 101 is provided in the game control apparatus 100 in this example, this RAM clear switch (RAM initial stage) Switch 504) may be provided in the power supply device 500.
Further, in the first embodiment, the power supply device 500 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 502 and the control signal generation unit 503 are integrated on separate substrates or integrated with the game control device 100, ie , And may be provided on the main substrate. Since the game board 20 and the game control apparatus 100 are subject to replacement at the time of model change, thus providing the backup power supply unit 502 and the control signal generation unit 503 on a substrate different from the power supply device 500 or the main substrate. As a result, it is possible to reduce the cost by eliminating the target of replacement at the time of model change.

  The backup power supply unit 502 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the gaming microcomputer 101 (particularly the built-in RAM 101C) of the gaming control apparatus 100, and data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or even after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 503 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 501, and detects the occurrence of a power failure when it falls below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal (for example, turns on). At the same time, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time. Also, at the time of power on or recovery from a power failure, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

The initialization switch signal is output from the RAM clear switch 504, and the initialization switch signal is a signal generated when the RAM clear switch 504 is turned on, and the user in the gaming microcomputer 101 Information stored in a RAM area such as the work RAM 101C and the like and a similar RAM area in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized.
In the case of this example, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeated in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 101 and the payout microcomputer (microcomputer of the payout control device 200). It is read. The reset signal is a type of forced read signal and causes the entire control system to be reset.

Next, the game control device 100 is connected to the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, the common electric solenoid 132, the special winning opening solenoid 133, and the collective display device 35.
Further, the game control device 100 can be connected to a non-illustrated test shot test device (connected at the time of a test in a test organization) through the relay substrate 170. In the test shooting test apparatus, the accreditation organization performs a test shooting test of a gaming machine.
Further, external information of the game control apparatus 100 is output from the game control apparatus 100 to the management apparatus as an external apparatus through the external information terminal board 55.
The external information terminal board 55 is connected to the game control apparatus 100 by a cable, and relays external information when transmitting it to a management apparatus (not shown, for example, an apparatus called a hall computer) as an external apparatus.
The management device collects information (for example, external information etc.) from a large number of pachinko machines installed in the game arcade, and carries out processing such as calculation processing of information necessary for sales and tabulation display.

Here, as the external information, for example, a signal for notifying the signal input to the game control apparatus 100 to the outside, a big hit signal for notifying a big hit generated in the course of the game progress, a starting opening serving as a condition for rotating the symbol Starting opening signal to notify winning, symbol rotation number start, or symbol fixed number signal to notify symbol rotation by using symbol rotation stop as a trigger, that the gaming state is an advantageous state for the player (so-called positive change state , A bonus status signal indicating a time saving status, etc., which is a signal to be notified to the outside, and these are generically called a gaming machine status signal.
Note that the bonus status signal is a signal that is output during the "big hit status + player's preferred status" period since it occurs after the big hit status ends.
In addition, data (for example, a payout command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the payout control device 200 by serial communication. On the other hand, a payout abnormality status signal, a shoot ball out switch signal, an overflow switch signal, a frame radio wave fraud signal, a payout busy signal, and a touch switch signal are output from the payout control device 200 to the game control device 100. The contents of each signal will be described later.

Next, a solenoid connected to the game control apparatus 100 will be described.
The common voltage solenoid 132 is a solenoid for opening and closing the opening and closing member 26b of the normal fluctuation winning device 26, the large winning opening solenoid 133 is a solenoid for opening and closing the opening and closing member 27b of the fluctuation winning device 27, and the collective display device 35 is a so-called common opening The display of a figure or the display of a special view, and further, the display of a start memory of a special view or a common view or a display of a game state is performed.
In addition, data (for example, effect command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication.
For example, in the game control apparatus 100, when the first start opening switch 120 and the second start opening switch 121 respectively detect winnings on the starting openings 25 and 26a and the detection signal is input, the special figure starting winning number is four. In addition, the pre-reading command regarding retention information is generated by extracting the random number based on the retention of the start winning combination and transmitting it to the effect control device 300 at a predetermined timing. In addition, when the memory of the start winning is held, a special figure hold number command related to the hold number is generated and similarly transmitted to the effect control device 300.

(Regarding effect control device)
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 and the devices connected to the effect control device 300 will be described.
The effect control device 300 has a main control microcomputer 311, a VDP 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying an image on the display device 41, and a sound source LSI 313 that controls the output of various melodies and sound effects. The detailed configuration will be described later with reference to FIG. The effect control device 300 corresponds to a control device and control means.
The effect control device 300 analyzes a control command (composed of MODE and ACTION data to be described later) from the gaming microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100, determines the effect content, and controls the content of the output image of the display device 41. Or instructs the sound source LSI 313 to play back the sound and drives the speakers 12a and 12b to output sound effects and the like, and executes the processing such as the drive control of the frame decoration device 43 described above. Further, when receiving an instruction of error notification from the game control device 100, the effect control device 300 outputs a signal to an error notification LED (not shown) to turn it on.
Here, in the command transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 101 of the gaming control device 100 to the effect control device 300, in addition to the single command (for example, the stop command), the single effect does not start, and the effect is exhibited in combination For example, it is "variation pattern command + symbol designation command" at the start of the special figure fluctuation.

In addition to the above, there is a probability information command to explain the main commands. This is prepared corresponding to the special view game mode flag (see steps S25, S30, S694, S779, A248, etc. described later), and is a flag reflecting the probability state at that time.
In addition, even if the effect control device 300 receives, for example, the probability information command transmitted from the game control device 100, the screen of the display device 41 does not immediately change with only that command, and the internal for displaying the screen Parameters are simply changed. Thereafter, when a command (such as a variable system or a customer waiting demo command) that changes the screen is received, it is reflected as a probability state at that time.
In addition, since it is decided that the big hit is low probability, there is also a case where the internal parameter is forcibly rewritten to low probability when the big hit system command is received without receiving the probability information command.
As information which can be understood by the probability information command, there are, for example, the following.
・ “There is a low probability and time saving (so-called 100 rotation time saving”)
・ "There is a high probability, time is short (so-called in the process of change)"
Here, the "probability information" in the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) includes not only "whether or not it is a probability change" but also information as to "whether it is time-saving or not". The state of the gaming machine can be broadly divided into four types: low probability, no time reduction, low probability, time reduction, high probability, short time, and high probability, no time reduction. In the present embodiment, three types of the above (for example, those excluding “low probability and no time saving”) are used, and the probability information command further includes information of the rendering mode (described later). The probability information command is transmitted from the game control device 100 at the timing when each state changes.
The command communication may be a serial communication method or a parallel communication method. In the present embodiment, a serial communication method is adopted as command communication.

(Payout control device related)
Next, the configuration of the payout control device 200 and the devices connected to the payout control device 200 will be described.
Although not shown, the payout control device 200 is a payout microcomputer (referred to as a payout microcomputer) for controlling payout of gaming balls (prize ball payout or rental ball payout), an error number indicator, an error release switch, It has an inspection device connection terminal. The payout control device 200 corresponds to a control device.
Here, the inspection device connection terminal is configured to include, for example, a photo coupler, and is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various information related to the payout obtained from the payout microcomputer to the inspection device is connected. The error number indicator lights up a specific number according to the content of the error when there is an error in the processing of the dispensing control. The error release switch is a signal for releasing an error when it is operated, for example, when there is an error in the process of dispensing control and the process is stopped.

Although not shown in the drawings, devices connected to the input side of the payout control device 200 include an overflow switch, a frame radio wave sensor, a payout ball detection switch, and a chute ball disconnection switch.
Here, the overflow switch is a switch that detects that the gaming balls on the lower plate 10 are excessive, and the frame radio wave sensor is provided on the front frame 4 or the glass frame 5, for example, a sensor that detects abnormal radio waves such as fraud, and payout The ball detection switch is a switch for detecting one game ball (a prize ball or a rental ball) paid out toward the upper plate 7 by the above-described payout unit, and the shoot ball out switch is a shoot ball for supplying the game balls to the storage tank described above. It is a switch which detects that there is no gaming ball.
Note that the radio wave sensor is a sensor that detects frauds such as acquiring game balls equal to or more than a specified number so as not to cause the sensor to react with radio waves when the game balls to be paid out pass the payout ball detection switch. The radio wave sensor may detect other unauthorized radio waves.

Although not shown in the figure, devices connected to the output side of the payout control device 200 are a payout motor of the payout unit, a card unit connection board, a launch control device, and an external information terminal board 55 (shown in FIG. 4). ).
The payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a signal (payout control command) from the game control device 100, and performs control to pay out the winning balls. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor based on a BRQ signal (loan request signal) or the like from the card unit (CR unit) connected to the card unit connection board, and causes the payout ball to be dispensed. Take control.

In addition, an operation panel board (not shown) is connected to the card unit connection board, and this operation panel board is a ball lending LED provided on the pachinko machine 1, a balance display, a ball lending switch, a return switch ( All are not shown) etc. are connected. The operation panel board receives signals from a card unit (CR unit) such as a ball lendable LED and a balance indicator, and sends operation signals from a ball lend switch and a return switch to the card unit (CR unit) to pay out a rental ball The necessary control is performed. Here, the ball lending switch is a switch operated by the operation of the above-mentioned ball lending button 16. Further, the return switch is a switch operated by the operation of the above-mentioned discharge button 17.
Although not shown, backup power is also supplied to the RAM area of the payout control device 200 from the power supply device 500 at the time of a power failure.

The payout control device 200 outputs a prize ball signal (ball number information paid out as a prize ball) created based on the payout command received from the game control device 100 to the management device as an external device through the external information terminal board 55. Do.
The external information terminal board 55 is also connected by a cable to the payout control device 200, and relays when transmitting the prize ball signal to the management device as the external device.

  The launch control device (not shown) receives the supply of necessary power from the payout control device 200 and receives a launch permission signal and a power failure detection signal. The launch control device controls the launch motor of the launch device that launches the game ball according to the operation of the launch operation handle 11, and the launch control device receives signals from the touch switch 11a provided on the launch operation handle 11 and the launch stop switch. It has been input. The firing stop switch temporarily stops the firing of the game ball and is operated by the player. The touch switch 11a is for detecting whether or not the player's hand or the like touches the firing operation handle 11, and corresponds to contact detection means. In this embodiment, the detection information of the touch switch 11a (contact detection means) is transmitted as a touch switch signal (shown in FIG. 4) from the payout control device 200 to the game control device 100, and further from the game control device 100 It is configured to be transmitted to the device 300 as command data (refer to the gaming machine state check process described later). As a result, the effect control device 300 can constantly monitor the presence or absence of contact with the player's launch operation handle 11 (operation unit).

Next, the detailed configuration of the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIG.
The game control apparatus 100 is a main control apparatus that controls the game in an integrated manner, corresponds to a main board (that is, a circuit formed on the main board), and specifically includes a circuit shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, the game control apparatus 100 includes a CPU unit 150 having a game microcomputer (ie, a game microcomputer) 101, an input unit 151 having an input port, an output unit 152 having an output port, etc. It comprises a data bus 153 connecting the CPU unit 150, the input unit 151 and the output unit 152, and the like.

The CPU unit 150 includes a gaming microcomputer 101 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates an operation clock or timer interrupt of the CPU, and an oscillation that generates a clock serving as a reference for the random number generation circuit. And the circuit 113. The gaming microcomputer 101 receives a signal (start winning detection signal) from the proximity I / F 163 described later, but the CPU unit 150 is further provided with an inverting circuit including an inverter that logically inverts this signal. It is also good.
The gaming microcomputer 101 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 101A, a read only ROM (read only memory) 101B, and a random access memory (RAM) 101C which can be read and written as needed. The ROM 101B stores invariable information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a non-volatile manner, and the RAM 101C stores a working area of the CPU 101A and storage areas of various signals and random values during game control. It is used as An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 101B or the RAM 101C.

The CPU 101A executes the game control program in the ROM 101B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and the general-purpose solenoid 132, the special winning opening solenoid 133 and the collective display device 35. Control signal of the pachinko machine 1 is generated.
Also, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 101 is a big hit random number for big hit determination of a special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining a symbol of a big hit, a hit random number for hitting determination of a common drawing variation display game, etc. And a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 101A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and the update timing of the random number generation circuit. And a clock generator for generating a clock.

  Here, the electronic components such as the game control apparatus 100 and the common control solenoid 132 and the big winning opening solenoid 133 driven by the game control apparatus 100 have predetermined levels such as DC 32 V, DC 12 V, DC 5 V generated by the power supply device 500. DC voltage is supplied and enabled.

Next, the input unit 151 of the game control device 100 is provided with a first input port 160, a second input port 161, and a third input port 162 as input ports. The input unit 151 includes a first starting opening switch 120, a second starting opening switch 121, a gate switch 122, a winning opening switch 123, a special winning opening switch 124, a magnetic sensor 126, a panel radio wave sensor 127, a glass frame opening detection switch A detection signal from the front frame (main frame) opening detection switch 212 is input.
The input unit 151 is provided with an interface chip (proximity I / F) 163 that converts the detection signals input from the switches 120 to 124 and 127 into positive logic signals of 0V-5V. In the proximity I / F 163, when the input range is 7V-11V, the lead wires of the proximity switches (the above switches 120 to 124, 127) are incorrectly shorted, the switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead It is possible to detect an abnormal state where a line is disconnected and becomes floating, and when such an abnormal state is detected, an abnormality detection signal is output. The proximity I / F 163 is also supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply 500 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for the operation of a normal IC in order to enable the above signal level conversion function. ing.

Here, a part of the output (excluding the abnormality detection signal) of the proximity I / F 163 (the output from each of the switches 120 to 124) is supplied to the third input port 162, and the microcomputer for gaming via the data bus 153 While being read to 101, it is supplied from the game control apparatus 100 as a main board via a relay board 170 to a shooting test apparatus (not shown).
Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 163, a detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 127 is supplied to the second input port 161 and read into the gaming microcomputer 101 via the data bus 153.

Among the outputs of the proximity I / F 163, the detection signals of the first start port switch 120 and the second start port switch 121 are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 101 other than the third input port 162 without an inverting circuit. ing. It is necessary to provide an inverting circuit here because the signal input terminal of the gaming microcomputer 101 assumes that a signal from a micro switch or the like is input, and negative logic, that is, low level (0 V) is an effective level. Is designed to detect as. In this example, since the signal input terminal of the gaming microcomputer 101 can detect the positive logic as the effective level, the inverting circuit becomes unnecessary.
Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 163, the above-mentioned abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of each of the switches 120 to 124 and the sensor 127 is detected in the proximity I / F 163 is supplied to the second input port 161, It is read by the gaming microcomputer 101 via the bus 153.

Next, to the second input port 161, the signal from the glass frame open detection switch 211 and the front frame (body frame) open detection switch 212 and the signal from the magnetic sensor 126 are input, and the signal from the panel radio wave sensor 127 Is input via the proximity I / F 163, and the abnormality detection signal is input from the proximity I / F 163.
In addition, although the magnetic sensor 126 is shown like one piece in FIG. 4 if the magnetic sensor 126 is demonstrated, the input to the game control apparatus 100 is only one, but this is actually plural. The magnetic sensors (four in this example) are mounted and wired OR connected on the relay substrate (present between the sensor and the main substrate; not shown).
Here, the data held by the second input port 161 asserts a corresponding enable signal (not shown) by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 161 by the gaming microcomputer 101 (valid level) Can be read out (as well as other ports).

  On the other hand, the signal from the payout control device 200 and the signal from the RAM initialization switch 504 (initialization switch signal) are input to the first input port 160. These signals are supplied from the first input port 160 to the gaming microcomputer 101 via the data bus 153. Signals from the payout control device 200 include a frame radio wave illegal signal, a payout busy signal, a payout abnormal status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of gaming balls before payout, and an overflow switch signal indicating overflow. There is the touch switch signal mentioned above. Here, the overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that the gaming balls have been stored in the lower tray 10 for a predetermined amount or more (that the game balls are full). The frame radio wave unauthorized signal is a signal output based on detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor (not shown) provided on the front frame 4 or the like. As described above, the touch switch signal is a signal output by the touch switch 11a described above when the player's hand or the like contacts the firing operation handle 11.

  The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept a command. The payout busy signal is basically a signal that is turned on when the payout operation of the gaming ball (the winning ball or the rental ball) is performed, unless an error related to the payout operation of the gaming ball occurs. For this reason, no error occurs (that is, the payout abnormality status signal, the shoot ball out switch signal, the overflow switch signal, etc. are not turned on), and the game control apparatus 100 controls the payout ball payout command. If the payout busy signal is set up (if it is on) while the game ball is not commanded to be sent to 200 and it is determined that the game control device 100 has executed the payout operation of the rental ball. Can.

  Further, the input unit 151 is provided with a Schmitt trigger circuit (Schmitt buffer) 164 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 500 and a reset signal to the gaming microcomputer 101 etc. 164 has a function of removing noise from these input signals. Among the signals from the power supply device 500, the power failure monitoring signal is temporarily input to the first input port 160 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 101 via the data bus 153. That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 101 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise is removed by the Schmitt trigger circuit 164 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 101, and each port of the output unit 152 (ports 175, 176, 177 described later, 180). Further, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 170 without passing through the output unit 152, the test injection test signal held at the port (not shown) of the relay board 170 for output to the test injection test apparatus is turned off. Is configured as.
In addition, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be able to be output to the test shot testing apparatus via the relay substrate 170. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the input ports 160 to 162 of the input unit 151. It is necessary to reset the data set in each port of the output unit 152 by the gaming microcomputer 101 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input, but it is necessary to reset the data of the input unit 151 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 101 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 101 is reset.

Next, the output unit 152 of the game control device 100 includes a first port 175, a second port 176, a third port 177, and a fourth port 180 as output ports connected to the data bus 153. The game control device 100 transmits data to the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300 through serial communication via the Schmitt buffer (Schmitt trigger buffer) 173.
The Schmitt buffer 173 is a data signal from the game control apparatus 100 in order to prevent input of a signal to the game control apparatus 100 from the side of the payout control apparatus 200 or the effect control apparatus 300, that is, to secure one-way communication. Is a unidirectional buffer that only allows outputting to the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300.

The first port 175 is an output port for outputting each opening and closing data of a large winning opening solenoid 133 for opening and closing the opening and closing member 27b of the fluctuation winning device 27 and a common electric solenoid 132 for opening and closing the opening and closing member 26b of the normal fluctuation winning device 26. It is.
The second port 176 is an output port for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the batch display device 35.
The third port 177 is an output port for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of the batch display device 35 is connected.
The fourth port 180 is an output port for outputting external information related to the pachinko machine 1 such as the big hit information to the external information terminal board 55 as an external information signal. The information output from the external information terminal board 55 is supplied to, for example, an information collecting terminal or a management device installed in a game arcade. A photo relay 55a is mounted on the external information terminal board 55, and external information is transmitted to a management device (not shown) as an external device through the photo relay 55a. It should be noted that since there is a polarity in the photocoupler, it is necessary to be careful about the connection, but using the photorelay 55a as described above has the advantage that the polarity becomes unnecessary and it is convenient.

  The output unit 152 outputs data indicating special design information of the variable display game to a test shot test device of a recognized organization (not shown) connected to the data bus 153 and a signal indicating the probability of a big hit through the relay board 170. The buffer 174 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 174 is a component not mounted on the game control apparatus 100 (main board) of the pachinko machine 1 as a real machine (mass-produced article for sale) installed in a game arcade. The detection signals of the switches 120 to 124 which do not require processing, such as the start port SW, output from the proximity I / F 163 are passed through the buffer 174 by the pattern branch on the proximity I / F 163 output side shown in FIG. Instead, it is supplied to the test injection test apparatus via the relay substrate 170.

  On the other hand, detection signals that can not be supplied to the test shooting test device as they are, such as the magnetic sensor 126 and the board radio wave sensor 127, are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 101 and processed into other signals or information. It is supplied from the data bus 153 to the trial shot test apparatus via the buffer 174 and the relay substrate 170 as an error signal indicating that it can not be done. Note that the relay board 170 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 174 and supplies it to the test shot test device, and a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of a switch that does not pass through the buffer. ing. A chip enable signal CE (not shown) output from the gaming microcomputer 101 is also supplied to the port on the relay substrate 170 so that the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test shooting test apparatus. It has become.

  Further, the output unit 152 is provided with a plurality of drive circuits (a first driver 178 a to a fourth driver 178 d). The first driver 178a receives each open / close data signal of the special winning opening solenoid 133 and the common voltage solenoid 132 output from the first port 175, and generates and outputs each solenoid drive signal. The second driver 178 b outputs an on / off driving signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 35 output from the second port 176. The third driver 178 c outputs an on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current lead-in side of the batch display device 35 output from the third port 177. The fourth driver 178 d outputs an external information signal supplied from the fourth port 180 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 55.

The first driver 178a is supplied with DC 32 V as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 500 in order to be able to drive the special winning opening solenoid 133 operating at 32 V and the common voltage solenoid 132.
Further, DC 12 V is supplied to the second driver 178 b that drives the segment line. Further, since the third driver 178c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data, the power supply voltage may be either 12 V or 5 V. In the collective display unit 35, a current flows into the anode terminal of a predetermined LED through the segment line by the second driver 178b that outputs 12 V, and the cathode terminal of the predetermined LED by the third driver 178c that outputs the ground potential. When the current is drawn through the segment line from the power supply voltage, the power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected by the dynamic drive method, and the predetermined LED is lit. Also, the fourth driver 178 d is supplied with 12 V DC to give a level of 12 V to the external information signal.

  Further, the output unit 152 is provided with a photocoupler 179 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 185. The photocoupler 179 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 101 can exchange data with the inspection device 185 by serial communication. Since such transmission and reception of data are performed using a serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 101 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, no port such as the input ports 160 to 162 is provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 and the devices connected to the effect control device 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 formed of an amusement chip (IC) like the gaming microcomputer 101, and image processing for displaying an image on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the CPU 311. (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing, a sound source LSI 313 for controlling the output of sound to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 12a and 12b, and a signal conversion circuit 315 .
Here, in addition to the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311, a video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) for exclusively performing video control under the control of the CPU 311 is disposed, including two CPUs, and VDP is a command from the 2nd CPU Although the image processing for displaying the image on the display device 41 may be performed according to the image data, in the present embodiment, only the CPU 311 with high performance is provided, which is advantageous in terms of arrangement space and cost. ing.

The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 has a PROM (programmable read only memory) 321 storing programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 326 for providing a work area, and memory contents even when power is not supplied at the time of a power failure. Retainable FeRAM 327, real time clock (RTC) 325, and WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 328 are connected, and VDP 312 is connected.
The RTC 325 is a clock element for clocking time and can be adjusted to the actual time by setting, and the clock signal is sent to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 uses a signal from the RTC 325, for example, It is possible to control effects such as event announcements and special effects of game arcades regarding time.

On the other hand, a VRAM 329 is connected to the VDP 312 in addition to the image ROM 322 storing character images and video data, and an audio ROM 323 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 313. In the image ROM 322, a plurality of moving pictures (movies) are stored as video data.
Here, character data is stored in the image ROM 322, but motion data representing information on the movement of the character and scenario data defining the connection of the motion data are stored in the PROM 321.
An image ROM 322 corresponds to character data storage means, and a PROM (control ROM) 321 corresponds to motion table storage means and scenario table storage means.

The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes a rendering command (data signal output from the buffer 173) which is a control command from the gaming microcomputer 101 of the gaming control apparatus 100, determines the content of the rendering, and outputs the display device 41. The contents of the image are instructed, the reproduction sound instruction to the sound source LSI 313, and the processes such as the drive control of the panel decoration device 42, the frame decoration device 43 and the panel effect device 44 described above are executed.
Here, in the present embodiment, the display device 41, the panel decoration device 42, the frame decoration device 43, the panel effect device 44, the speakers 12a and 12b, and the like constitute presentation means.

For example, when the variable display game is executed, a command (for example, a change pattern command to be described later) including data of a combination of stop symbols (result mode) and data of a reach system (or change time) from the game control device 100 The main control microcomputer 311 receives this and selects a variation mode that satisfies the stop mode and the variation time, and the display device 41 is selected via the VDP 312. The special figure variation display game is controlled such that a predetermined special figure is variably displayed and finally a combination of specific symbols (resulting aspect) is derived and displayed.
In addition, although an aspect such as a variation display of a special figure that is actually implemented under the control of the effect control device 300 may be uniquely determined by a command from the game control device 100, the condition of the condition given by the command In the range, the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 finally selects an aspect by random number extraction or the like (a configuration in which the effect control device 300 selects an aspect, given a certain degree of discretion) There is.

Here, as a RAM for providing a work area of the main control microcomputer 311, there is also a RAM 311a inside the chip.
Further, the main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 313 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 313 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 12a and the lower speaker 12b described above, and the sound generated by the sound source LSI 313 is transmitted to the upper speaker via the amplifier circuit 337. It is outputted from 12a and the lower speaker 12b.
The command and data may be transmitted and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 313 by a handshake method. In that case, the challenge (call) signal CTS and the response (response) signal RTS are exchanged.

Further, although not particularly limited, transmission and reception of data are performed between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. Generally, by transmitting and receiving data in a parallel system, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial.
The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area, and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. In addition to the image ROM 322 and the VRAM 329 described above, a signal conversion circuit 315 is also connected to the VDP 312. Here, the VRAM 329 is an ultra-high-speed VRAM (Video RAM) used to expand or process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 322. Further, the signal conversion circuit 315 is a circuit that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. The VRAM 329 and the signal conversion circuit 315 may be provided in the VDP 312.

Video data, horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 315, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 315. Is displayed.
From VDP 312 to main control microcomputer 311, vertical synchronization signal VSYNC to synchronize the image of display device 41 and lighting of lamps provided on glass frame 5 and game board 20, synchronization signal giving transmission / reception timing of data STS is input. The VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT or the like for notifying is also input.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface circuit (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command (a data signal output from the buffer 173) transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 101 of the gaming control device 100. ing. Through the command I / F 331, the main control microcomputer 311 receives a control command (rendering command) from the gaming microcomputer 101, for example, a customer waiting demo command, a variation pattern command, and the like.

The command transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 101 of the gaming control apparatus 100 is stored in the RAM 311 a or the RAM 326 as necessary.
Further, since the gaming microcomputer 101 of the gaming control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a function of level conversion of signals. It is done.

  Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls the LEDs of the above-mentioned panel decoration device 42, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls the above-mentioned frame decoration device 43, and A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided which drives and controls the motor and solenoid of the effect device 44. The control circuits 332 to 334 are connected to the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 via the address / data bus 340. Note that a light emission source other than the LED may be used as a light emission source of the panel decoration device 42 or the frame decoration device 43. In addition, a frame rendering device provided with a driving source such as a motor (for example, a moving light or a motor for operating a device for rendering) is provided on the glass frame 5, and a frame rendering movable body control circuit is provided to drive and control the frame rendering device. May be

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with a SW input circuit 336.
The SW input circuit 336 is in the on / off state of the effect button SW 46 incorporated in the effect button 9 provided in the glass frame 5, the operation state of the touch panel 9a provided in the glass frame 5, and the inside of the board effect device 44. It is a circuit for detecting the on / off state of the effect combination SW (effect motor SW) 47 for detecting the initial position of the motor and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.
The above-described volume SW 338 is also connected to the SW input circuit 336. The SW input circuit 336 detects the above-mentioned state of the volume switch 338 and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.
In the case of this example, the setting confirmation LED 339 described in FIG. 3 is controlled by the main control microcomputer 311 via the above-described panel decoration LED control circuit 332 as one of the elements constituting the panel decoration device 42. The structure is

  The normal power supply unit 501 of the power supply device 500 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a direct current voltage of a desired level to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC12V for driving the display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel and DC5V serving as the power supply voltage of the command I / F 331, the DC voltage of 15V for driving the LED and the speakers 12a and 12b is generated. Is configured as. Furthermore, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC − for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 501.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 503 of the power supply device 500 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in a reset state. The reset signal is output from the main control microcomputer 311, and is used as a VDPRESET signal for the VDP 312, an SNDRESET signal for the sound source LSI 313 and the amplifier circuit 337, and an IORESET signal for each control circuit 332 to 334. Each of the 300 devices is supplied to put these devices in a reset state.
Note that backup power may be supplied from the backup power supply unit 502 of the power supply device 500 to the RAM (at least one of the RAM 311 a and the RAM 326) of the effect control device 300 at the time of a power failure.
Further, a cooling fan 48 for cooling each part of the gaming machine 1 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling fan 48 is configured to be driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.
Further, in this embodiment, the general control port of the main control microcomputer 311 is used to generate and supply a reset signal to the VDP 312. Thus, the cooperation between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 can be improved.

  In the case of this example, the circuit board constituting the effect control device 300 corresponds to a sub control board (also referred to as a sub board). Then, as described above, the presentation control device 300 (sub control board) that controls the display device 41 controls speakers, lamps, movable parts for decoration, etc., and the main board that constitutes the gaming control apparatus 100 Controls the movable portion indirectly by sending a control command to the sub control board. For this reason, the hardware configuration such as the wiring pattern of the main board is basically the same regardless of the model, and by installing the game program for each model in the gaming machine microcomputer 101, the main board is technically modelized. And even if different brands can share.

E. Outline of Game Next, the outline of the game performed by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment and the flow of the game will be described.
First, at the beginning of the game (or before the start of the game), a customer waiting state (during demo) is in effect, and a command instructing display of a customer waiting screen is a buffer of the game control apparatus 100 (buffer in FIG. 4) (Corresponding to 173) is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and a customer waiting screen (moving image or still image) is displayed on the display unit 41a of the display device.

  Then, when the game ball driven into the game area 22 through the guide rail 21 wins the special prize start winning opening 25 or 26a (that is, when there is a special figure start prize), the special figure variation display A command to instruct the game control device 100 is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and a display (a so-called change display) in which a special figure (one consisting of numbers, characters, symbols, patterns, etc.) ) Is performed, and a special view variable display game (hereinafter referred to as a special view change display game) is performed.

And if the stop result mode (combination of the special figure derived by the variable display) of this special figure fluctuation display game is a special result aspect (for example, Zoromes such as "3, 3, 3"), it is called a big hit A bonus is given to the player. In terms of control, for example, a value such as a big hit random number is extracted and stored under the condition that there is a start winning, and the extracted and stored random number value and a preset determination value are compared and determined at the time of determination. Based on the comparison determination result, it is determined in advance whether or not to make a big hit, and the above-mentioned special figure fluctuation display game is started according to this determination.
Further, in the normal mode, if the stop result mode of the variable display game is a specific mode (for example, Zoro eyes of "7, 7, 7") among the special result modes, the jackpot becomes the big hit and after the big hit game The gaming state shifts from the normal mode to the definite change mode (after a special award period described later). In this definite variation mode, control is performed to increase the probability that the special figure will be a big hit (hereinafter referred to as the big shot probability of the special figure). Also, in some cases, so-called time reduction (for example, to shorten the fluctuation display time of a special drawing or the like to make the frequency of the fluctuation display game more likely to hit) may be performed.

  When the jackpot becomes the big hit and shifts to the big hit state, the big winning opening 27a of the variable winning device 27 passes through the fanfare period (period in which output of a sound effect for producing a big hit, etc. is executed). For example, within the range not exceeding 30 seconds, for example, an opening operation (jackpot round) which is temporarily opened only for a period of up to 10 winnings is performed. Then, this release operation is repeated for a prescribed number of rounds. In addition, in this big hit state, a command for instructing the display of a big hit screen for producing a big hit state or notifying the player of a big hit round number etc. is transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to the production control apparatus 300, and the display unit In 41a, such a big hit display is performed.

In addition, the period (the fanfare period, the period of the big hit round where the big winning opening is opened, the interval period between the big hit round and the next big hit round, the ending period) during this big hit state is the special prize period It corresponds to
Also, as the number of rounds of the big hit, for example, 15 round big hit is usually the big hit of the main, but it may be configured to generate 16R big hit as the premier, or may be another configuration (for example 6R or 4R). Also, there may be a two-round big hit or the like as so-called suddenness (a sudden positive change in which the probability of big hit changes via a big hit with few balls out).
Furthermore, when there is a second variable winning device, if the stop result mode of the variable display game by the display device 41 becomes a special mode (for example, special eyes such as "3, special symbol, 3") An opening operation (big hit round) in which the privilege to be called is generated and the opening / closing member of the second variable winning device is temporarily opened, for example, only for a period up to 5 wins within a range not exceeding the specified time (for example, 30 seconds) Is done. Then, this release operation is repeated for a prescribed number of rounds.

On the other hand, when the game ball is further awarded to the start winning hole 25 or 26a during the variable display game or the big hit of the special view, the display of the start memory of the special view is performed on the display portion 41a etc. After the variable display game or the big hit state is ended, the variable display game of the above-mentioned special view is repeated based on the start memory, or returns to the customer waiting state (during customer waiting demonstration effect).
That is, if the variable display game ends with a big hit, it shifts to a big hit state, and if the variable display game ends with release and start memory is stored, the variable display game is executed again, and the variable display game ends with release without start memory For example, the game returns to the customer waiting state, and if the big hit is finished and the starting memory is stored, the variable display game is executed again, and if the big hit is ended and the starting memory is not stored, it returns to the customer waiting state.

In the present embodiment, for example, two types of display of special drawing start storage (special drawing start storage) are performed (special drawing 1 suspension display and special drawing 2 suspension display), and two types of special drawing variation display games are performed. A variable display game (a first variable display game and a second variable display game) is executed. That is, when the special figure start winning (first start winning) occurs when the gaming ball enters the first starting winning opening 25, a first variation display game is performed by the variation display of the special figure 1 on the display device 41. Then, when the game ball wins the first start winning opening 25 during any special view variation display game or the like, one first start storage (start storage corresponding to the special view 1 suspension display) is stored, On the other hand, after the end of the special figure variation display game, the first variation display game is performed by the variation display of the special figure 1 on the display device 41.
In addition, if there is a special figure start winning (second starting prize) by the game ball entering the second starting winning opening 26a (the starting port of the commercial electric power), the second by the variable display of the special figure 2 on the display device 41 A variable display game is played. Then, when the gaming ball wins the second start winning opening 26a during any special view variation display game or the like, one second start storage (start storage corresponding to the special view 2 suspension display) is stored, On the other hand, the second variation display game is performed by the variation display of the special view 2 on the display device 41 after the end of the special view variation display game or the like.
When both the first start memory and the second start memory are present, one of the first variable display game and the second variable display game is executed first according to a preset rule. For example, a mode in which the second variable display game corresponding to the second start winning opening 26a is performed with priority (that is, a mode in which the second start memory is preferentially digested), or two types of variable display games are in order of winning There may be an aspect to be performed.

On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the common drawing start gate 32 during the game, a fluctuation display game of common drawing by the variable display of the common drawing (hereinafter referred to as a common drawing fluctuation display game) is performed on the display unit 41a etc. . Then, if the common drawing variation display game result (stopped common drawing) is a predetermined mode (specific display manner), a benefit called per common drawing is granted.
When the hit is a hit, a game is held in which the opening / closing member 26b for opening and closing the second start winning opening 26a is opened and temporarily held for a predetermined opening time. As a result, it becomes easy for the game ball to get a start winning, and accordingly, the number of times the variable display game of the special figure is performed increases and the possibility of becoming a big hit increases.
Further, when the game ball is further awarded to the common drawing start gate 32 during the variable display game of the common drawing, the batch display device 35 executes the hold display of the common drawing start memory, and for example, up to four are stored. After the end of the variable display game of the common drawing, the variable display game of the common drawing is repeated based on the memory.

F. Operation of Control System Next, control contents of the game control apparatus 100 will be described with reference to FIGS.
The control processing executed by the gaming microcomputer 101 of the gaming control apparatus 100 mainly includes the main processing shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 and the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 10 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec). Become.
First of all, it is as follows if the concept of the main composition used for explanation of the following flow charts is clarified.
(A) Display Device of Special Drawing As described above, the special display device 35 displays the special drawing and the general drawing. In the case of calling a special drawing in the flowchart of the following game control apparatus 100, in principle, it refers to the "present special drawing" displayed on the batch display device 35. In addition, when referring to a dummy display for effect for a player displayed on the display device 41, it is referred to as "decorative special drawing". However, when describing the gaming machine, the "special decoration drawing" may be included if necessary.

(B) Display Device of Common Figure In the case of the common game in the flowchart of the following game control apparatus 100, in principle, it refers to "the regular drawing" displayed on the collective display device 35. Also, in the case of adopting a configuration in which a common view is displayed by the display device 41 and referring to a dummy display for effect for a player displayed by the display device 41, it is referred to as, for example, a "display common view".
However, in the present embodiment, such a display of a common drawing is not displayed on the display device 41. In addition, you may provide the indicator which displays a common drawing (here decoration common drawing) display. In the description of the gaming machine, the apparatus may be described including a device for displaying a "demonstration drawing" if necessary.
(C) Common Power A device equivalent to a common power is a normal fluctuation winning device 26 as a common electric character (general power).
In addition, although the special control (control to shorten the fluctuation time of the common drawing etc.) which is easy to be awarded to the commonplace as described above is performed to support the start-up combination, this is referred to as the commonplace support (or There is a thing called simply power support).

(D) Special map storage In the flowchart of the following game control apparatus 100, the special display reserve (sometimes simply referred to as "hold"), the special view store, or the special view start store, the batch display device 35 in principle. Points to "this special view memory" displayed in In addition, when referring to a dummy display for effect for a player displayed on the display device 41, it is referred to as "decoration of special drawing" or "storage of special drawing".
(E) General drawing memory In the case of referring to general drawing reserve, common drawing memory, or starting drawing memory of a common drawing in the flowchart of the following game control apparatus 100, the "general common drawing memory" displayed on the collective display device 35 in principle Point to the In addition, when referring to the dummy display for effect for the player displayed on the display device 41, it is referred to as "decorative display of drawing" or "memory of decorative drawing".
However, in the present embodiment, the display 41 does not display the start storage display of such a common drawing. In addition, you may provide the indicator which displays starting memory (here decoration common drawing memory) display of common drawing. In the description of the gaming machine, the apparatus may be described including a device for displaying "memory of decoration drawing" if necessary.
(F) Fluctuation winning device The fluctuation winning device 27 is a device having a large winning opening 27a that is opened and closed by the opening and closing member 27b (a so-called attacker). The fluctuation winning device 27 may be called a special fluctuation winning device to distinguish it from the normal fluctuation winning device.

[Main processing of game control device]
First, the main processing of the game control apparatus 100 (game microcomputer 101) will be described with reference to FIGS.
This main processing is started based on that the gaming microcomputer 101 is forcibly reset. That is, when the power switch (not shown) of the power supply device 500 is turned on, the control signal generation unit 503 of the power supply device 500 resets the game control device 100 at a predetermined timing (during a predetermined reset period at power on). When the reset terminal of the gaming microcomputer 101 is turned on and then the reset signal is released, the gaming microcomputer 101 is activated. When the power is restored from the power failure, the reset signal is similarly turned on and then released, and the gaming microcomputer 101 is activated. In addition, when the operator tries to initialize the user work RAM and the like (for example, the RAM 101C) of the game control apparatus 100, the power supply is performed while turning on the RAM clear switch 504 (initialization switch) of the game control apparatus 100. It is necessary to turn on the switch.

  When the gaming microcomputer 101 is activated, first, processing for inhibiting an interrupt is performed (step S1), and then, a stack pointer is set to set a stack pointer which is the start address of an area for saving values of registers etc when an interrupt occurs. The process (step S2) is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of this embodiment, the range of the address of the RAM is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the upper order, and the head 00h is set in step S4. Next, a signal for stopping the emission is output to set the emission permission signal to the prohibited state (step S5). The release permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop the release, and the release of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 160) is read (step S6), and processing for setting a power on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) which performs various controls in accordance with the instruction from the game control device 100 forming the main control means by setting a predetermined initial value. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) to wait for normal activation is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 temporarily rises first, and sends a command to the slave control apparatus before the slave control apparatus (for example, the payout control apparatus 200 or the presentation control apparatus 300) starts up. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control apparatus 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control apparatus (the payout control apparatus 200, the effect control apparatus 300, etc.) It constitutes a standby means for setting a standby time.

  Further, the power-on delay timer counts time by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register other than the validity determination target) which is not a target of the validity determination (check sum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area is calculated, it is not necessary to exclude and calculate a part of the RAM area, and it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

  The initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 504 is input to the first input port 160, and the initialization is performed by reading the state of the first input port 160 before the start of the standby time. The operation of the switch (RAM initialization switch 504) can be reliably detected. That is, when the state of the initialization switch is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch is operated after waiting for the standby time, or the initialization switch is operated continuously from the power on to the elapse of the standby time. There is a need to. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it becomes possible to detect by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on without performing such troublesome operations, and the initialization operation performed at the time of the power on It can prevent the situation that can not be accepted.

  After the process of setting the power supply delay timer (step S7), the process of counting the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of the power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) are performed. First, the number of times (for example, twice) of reading and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 500 through the port and data bus is set (step S8), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. (Step S9). Note that the power failure monitoring in step S9 is also performed when the power supply delay timer is set in step S7 and the timer is in progress of counting.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; YES), it is determined whether the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal for the number of checks has not continued (step S10; NO), the process returns to the determination (step S9) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Further, if the on state of the blackout monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S10; YES), that is, if it is determined that a blackout has occurred, the power of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) is shut off. Wait for As described above, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period, thereby appropriately coping with a failure at the time of power on. can do.

  That is, since the game control device 100 is a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure in a predetermined standby time, the power failure occurred in a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 forming the main control device is delayed. It is possible to cope with problems when the power is turned on. Note that access to the RAM (for example, the RAM 101C) is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power off are kept, so backup at the time of power failure occurs here There is no need to perform the processing of Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the waiting time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; NO), that is, if no power failure occurs, the power on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and the timer value is then 0. It is determined whether there is any (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; NO), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; YES), that is, if the waiting time is over, the access permission of read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13). The off data is output to all the output ports (a signal corresponding to "0" of the binary signal: that is, a state in which there is no output) (step S14).
Here, in the present embodiment, RWM refers to the RAM 101C, but the present invention is not limited to the RAM, and may be used as the RWM including a readable / writable storage element such as an EEPROM.
Note that since each output port is set to be off (reset) by the reset signal, it is not necessary to output the off signal to each output port in software, but step S14 is provided here just in case. .

Subsequently, a serial port (a port provided in advance in the gaming microcomputer 101, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15). That is, since it is necessary to perform serial communication with the effect control device 300 or the like, the serial port is set to be used.
Next, it is determined whether the initialization switch (RAM initialization switch 504) has been turned on from the state of the first input port 160 read in advance (step S16). This is to determine whether or not the initialization switch is on according to the state of the initialization switch signal. If the initialization switch is on, the process proceeds to step S26, and if it is not on, the process proceeds to step S17. .
When the initialization switch is turned on and the gaming microcomputer 101 is activated, the process proceeds to step S26, and the power failure inspection region 1 and the power failure inspection region 2 of the RWM are normal in step S17 and step S18 described later. If it is determined that the check sum is not normal, or if it is determined that the checksum is not normal in step S20 described later. Therefore, in step S26, processing such as initializing data in the RWM of the gaming microcomputer 101 is performed in steps S26 to S30.

If the initialization switch is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S17, and it is checked whether or not the value of the blackout inspection area 1 of the RWM is normal interruption inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah), and the check result in step S17. Is not normal, the process jumps to step S26. On the other hand, if the check result in step S17 is normal, it is checked in step S18 whether or not the value of the blackout inspection area 2 of the RWM is normal blackout inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h). If it is determined in step S18 that the check result is not normal, the process jumps to step S26. If the check result is normal, the process proceeds to step S19.
As described above, when all the values of the power failure inspection areas 1 and 2 of the RWM are normal, it is determined that the power failure is restored, and the process proceeds to step S19. On the other hand, if the values of the power failure inspection areas 1 and 2 of the RWM are abnormal (if they are not stored normally), the process jumps to step S26, assuming that the power is turned on normally.
The power failure inspection area check data 1 and 2 are set in steps S41 and S42 described later. In these steps S17 and S18, it is determined whether or not a power failure recovery is in progress based on a plurality of check data 1 and 2 as described above. Therefore, it is highly reliable to determine whether or not a power failure recovery is in progress.

Next, in step S19, the checksum of the RWM data is calculated, and in step S20, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum at the time of power shutoff to determine whether the value is normal (coincident). If this checksum is not normal (i.e., if the RWM data is corrupted), the process proceeds to step S26. If the checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step S21 of FIG. Perform processing in case of recovery.
In step S21, the initial value upon power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized. The areas to be initialized here are the power failure inspection areas 1 and 2, the checksum area, and the area related to the error fraud monitoring. For example, the following areas are included in the area related to the error fraud monitoring.
-Door in the external information area-Frame open signal, Security signal-Game machine error status signal in the test signal area-Status scan counter (play slot status monitoring scan counter)
-Front frame (glass frame) opening monitoring area-Play frame (front frame) opening monitoring area-Shoot ball out monitoring area-Overflow monitoring area-Disbursement abnormality monitoring area-Switches 1, 2 abnormality monitoring area-Major prize opening illegal prize monitoring Area · Fuchu illegal prize monitoring area · magnetic fraud monitoring area · radio fraud monitoring area · large winning opening fraud monitoring information · Fuchu fraud monitoring information

  In step S21, the busy signal status area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can receive a command, is also cleared, and the state of the payout busy signal is determined. It is in an undetermined state indicating that there is no. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area storing the state of the touch switch signal indicating the presence or absence of the touch on the firing operation handle 11 is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is not determined.

  After passing through step S21, thereafter, the area storing the gaming state in the RWM is checked to determine whether the gaming state is a high probability state (step S22). Here, when it is not a high probability (step S22; NO), step S23 and S24 are skipped and it transfers to step S25. Also, if the probability is high (step S22; YES), the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), and the high probability notification LED (not shown) provided in the batch display device 35 is turned on (not shown). (Lit) data is saved in the segment area (step S24). As a result, the process corresponding to the current high probability state is performed, and for example, the high probability notification LED provided on the batch display device 35 is turned on to display a notification of the high probability state.

  Next, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared to rationally execute the special drawing game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (step S25), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S25, a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a special figure 2 pending number command, a probability information command, a screen designated command (a command for a customer waiting demo screen when waiting for a customer, other than that If so, a plurality of commands such as a recovery screen command are sent. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, the presentation frequency information command and the high probability frequency information command are also transmitted.

On the other hand, when jumping from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permission (step S26), and all areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is an area having a value other than the value (0) written in step S27 as an initial value, and in the present embodiment, an area related to setting of a customer waiting demo and an effect mode. is there. Specific examples of these areas are, for example, as follows.
<Area to be initialized>
-Customer waiting demo flag area (used in step S 472 etc. described later)
-Effect mode transition information area (an area in which effect mode transition information is saved in step S529 described later)
· Security signal control timer (used in step C68 etc. described later)
· Next mode transition information area (see step S778 etc. described later)
· Special drawing game mode flag area (see step S759 described later)
· Special drawing game mode flag save area (see step S701 etc. described later)

Next, a command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of this embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a special figure 2 pending number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (displaying a customer waiting demo screen and displaying a predetermined time ( For example, for 30 seconds, a plurality of commands such as a command for performing notification of the RAM initialization with light and sound are transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, the presentation frequency information command and the high probability frequency information command are also transmitted.
In addition, when the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted, the effect control device 300 performs initialization such as setting the operation position of the motor of the effect device to the initial position, and starts the effect of notifying that RWM clear has been performed. Do.

Now, when the process proceeds from step S25 or step S30 to step S31, in step S31, a CTC (Counter / Timer) generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 101 (clock generator). Circuit) Performs processing to activate a circuit.
The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 101. The clock generator has a divider circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the crystal oscillator 113, and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 101A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating the random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process of step S31, the random number generation circuit is activated and set (step S32). Specifically, setting of a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit to a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit is performed by the CPU 101A.
Further, setting of bit transposition pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also performed. That is, in the process of step S32, the hard random number bit transposition pattern is set, and the bit transposition of the big hit random number is also performed.
Here, the bit transposition pattern is a method of replacing the bit arrangement of the extracted random number (arrangement before bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition) It is a defined pattern. By replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Also, it may be set arbitrarily by the user.

  Next, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on are extracted and saved in predetermined regions of RWM as initial values (start values) of corresponding various initial value random numbers ( Step S33). In the case of this embodiment, as various initial value random numbers, initial value random numbers (that is, big hit symbol initial value random numbers, small hit symbol initial values) of random numbers (big hit symbol random numbers, small hit symbols random numbers) which determine hit symbols of special drawing. Random number), initial value random number (ie, initial value random number) of random number to determine the hit of the common figure (ie, initial value random number), initial value random number of the random number to determine the hit pattern of the common figure (ie, random number) There is a symbol initial value random number). In addition, the random number regarding a common drawing may abbreviate | omit the word "general drawing", for example so that "a random number per common drawing" may only be called "a random number."

  The random number generation circuit in the CPU 101A used in this embodiment is configured to change the initial value of the soft random number register every time the power is turned on. Therefore, in step S33, this value is used as the initial value of various initial value random numbers. By setting (start value), the regularity of the random number updated by the software can be broken, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to obtain an incorrect random number.

Next, in step S34, an interrupt is permitted, and in the next step S35, an initial value random number update process is performed. The initial value random number update process is intended to update the values of various initial value random numbers and break the regularity of random numbers so that it is difficult to purposely aim for a big hit etc. by measuring the timing of firing the game ball. is there.
In addition to the main processing, there is also a method of performing initial value random number update processing in the timer interrupt processing in addition to the main processing, and the initial value random number update processing in step S35 described above In order to prevent the value random number update process from being executed, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update and cancel the interrupt as in this embodiment. There is no problem in releasing the interrupt before the initial value random number update process if the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed, but only in the main process, and the main process is simplified accordingly. It has the advantage of being

Also, although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, a big hit random number, a big hit symbol random number, a small hit symbol random number, a hit random number, a hit symbol random number is a random number generated in a random number generation circuit in the CPU 101A. Is configured to generate. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" updated based on a clock equal to or faster than the CPU operation clock, and the big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, hit symbol random number is a program processing It is a "low-speed counter" updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC 2 different from CTC (CTC 0) in timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as timer interrupt processing as a unit. In addition, in the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, in the hit symbol random number, the so-called "initial value change method to change the start value using each initial value random number (updated by software) every time the random number makes a round Is adopted. Each of the random numbers may be a counter type update by +1 or -1, or may be a random type update in which all the values within the range appear apart without overlapping until one round. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number is a random number updated by hardware and software.
In addition, when there are two types of special figures, the random numbers relating to the special figures may be common to the special figures 1 and 2 or may be provided separately, but in the present embodiment they are described as being common. ing.

Next, proceeding to step S36, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 500 is read via the port and data bus, the number of checks (for example, twice) of the power failure monitoring signal is set, and power failure monitoring signal is set in the next step S37. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S38 for the final determination of the power failure, and if it is not on, the process returns to step S35. Steps S35 to S37 are repeated during normal operation.
That is, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; NO), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the check (loop processing) of the power failure monitoring signal are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (step S34) before the initial value random number update process (step S35), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is performed. By waiting for the initial value random number updating process, it is possible to avoid the pressure on the interrupt process.

Then, in step S38, it is determined whether or not the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks, and it is finally determined that the power failure occurs if the determination result is affirmative, and the procedure proceeds to step S39. If the result is negative, the process returns to step S37 because it can not be determined that a power failure has occurred.
When the power failure monitoring signal is turned on, the power failure monitoring signal may be used as an NMI interrupt signal to interrupt the processing being executed and forcibly execute the power failure processing after step S39. However, in the configuration of this example, since the on state of the power failure monitoring signal is checked a plurality of times in step S38, the power failure monitoring signal is temporarily and instantaneously turned on due to noise or the like although power failure does not actually occur. In this case, there is an advantage that it is not misjudged as the occurrence of a power failure.

Then, in step S39, the interrupt is inhibited, and all outputs are turned off in the next step S40 (off data is output to all output ports), and then power failure information setting processing is executed in steps S41 and S42. Do. In the power failure information setting process, the aforementioned power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection region 1 in step S41, and the power failure inspection region check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection region 2 in step S42.
After passing through step S42, in step S43, a process is performed to calculate a checksum at the time of power shutoff of the RWM, and then the checksum calculated in step S44 is saved in a predetermined checksum area.
Next, after prohibiting access to the RWM in step S45, the process waits (waits for the power of the gaming machine to be cut off).
As described above, by saving check data in the power failure recovery inspection area and calculating a checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is determined whether the information stored in the RWM is correctly backed up before the power shutdown. It can be determined when the power is turned on again.
The above-described power failure process in steps S39 to S45 is performed before the power supply voltage drops below the operating voltage of the gaming microcomputer 101 due to the power failure.

[Checksum calculation processing]
Next, the checksum calculation process (steps S19 and S43) in the main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, at step S51, the start address of RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address, and at step S52, the number of repetitions is set. The number of repetitions is set corresponding to the number of bytes of RWM being used. Next, in step S53, "0" is set as the calculated value, and in step S54, the content of the calculated value + the calculated address is calculated as a new calculated value. In this way, the contents of each address are added as a calculated value. Next, in step S55, the calculated address is updated by "+1", and in step S56, the repeat number is updated by "-1" to check whether the calculation is completed or not. In step S57, it is determined whether the calculation is completed. If the determination result of step S57 is NO, the process returns to step S54 and the routine is repeated. If the number of repetitions = the number of bytes of RWM, it is determined that the calculation is completed, the process exits from step S57 to YES, and the routine is ended.
In this way, calculation of the checksum at the time of power shutoff of the RWM is performed.

Initial Value Random Number Update Process
Next, the initial value random number updating process (step S35) in the main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, a process of incrementing (updating (+1)) the jackpot symbol initial value random number (step S61), a process of incrementing (updating (+1)) the small hitting symbol initial value random number (step S62), A process of incrementing (updating (+1)) the initial value random number (step S63) and a process of incrementing (updating (+1)) the initial symbol random number are sequentially performed (step S64).
Here, the "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number which becomes the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure, as described above, and is updated in the range of 0-99. In addition, “the initial hit random number” is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the common drawing change game, and is updated in the range of 0 to 250. Thus, the randomness of the random number is improved by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time allows in the main processing.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process of the game control apparatus 100 (game microcomputer 101) will be described with reference to FIG.
In this timer interrupt process, a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 101A by the processes of steps S31 and S34 in the main process described above, and an interrupt (timer interrupt) is generated. It starts with When this timer interrupt is generated in the gaming microcomputer 101, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and this timer interrupt process is started.

When this timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step S70). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S71). In step S71, the same process as step S4 in the main process is performed, but the register bank is different.
Next, in step S72, an input process is performed. In this input process, reading of detection signals (states of respective input ports) of the above-described respective sensors (starting opening switches 120 and 121, gate switch 122, winning opening switch 123, special winning opening switch 124, etc.) is executed. Specifically, the output value of each sensor is determined every timer interrupt cycle, and when the output value of the same level continues more than the prescribed number of times (for example, twice), the level of this output value is detected by each sensor Read as a definite value of the signal. When it is read that one of the sensors is on, a flag (input flag) indicating that is turned on.

Next, in step S73, an output process of setting and outputting the output data set in each step described later in the corresponding output port is executed. This is processing for performing drive control and the like of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 133, common power solenoid 132) based on output data set in various processing.
In addition, when the signal of the firing stop is output in step S5 in the main process, the signal of the firing permission is output by performing the output process (see step S138a described later), and the firing permission signal can be set in the permission state It is assumed. The launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing is performed. The launch permission signal is a first signal indicating the launch permission status as seen from the game control device, and a second signal (also the launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission status as viewed from the payout control device. It is generated in the payout control device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the gaming ball is configured to be in a state where it can be launched.

Next, in step S74, a payout command transmission process is performed. This is a process of outputting a command set in the transmission buffer of the gaming microcomputer 101 in various processes to the payout control device 200.
Next, random number updating processes 1 and 2 are executed in steps S75 and S76, respectively. Although the details will be described later, in the random number update process 1, setting of initial values of random numbers (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, common hit pattern random number, common hit pattern random number), and random number update processing 2 Then, the software updates the variation pattern random number. Among them, according to the random number updating process 1, the updating of the initial value of each random number by the above-mentioned "initial value changing method" is realized. Further, according to the random number updating process 2, the variation pattern random number changes every time the timer interrupt processing routine is repeated, and the extracted value of the variation pattern random number maintains the at-randomness.

  In this example, there are three types of variation pattern random numbers: variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3. Among them, fluctuation pattern random number 1 is a random number for selecting the reach system of the latter half fluctuation (the fluctuation after the start of reach), and fluctuation pattern random number 2 is a distribution of detailed effects from the reach system (for example, plus 1 frame) The special pattern is a random number for performing special pattern stop or minus special frame at one frame), and fluctuation pattern random number 3 is a random number for selecting the form of the first half fluctuation (the fluctuation before the start of reach) is there. Moreover, although the said fluctuation | variation pattern random number may determine all the fluctuation | variation aspects directly, in this example, the production | presentation control apparatus 300 determines a specific aspect. For example, only the fluctuation time and the reach system (rough type of reach) are determined by the fluctuation pattern random number 1, and the effect control device 300 determines a specific fluctuation mode based on the determined fluctuation time and the reach system.

  Next, in step S77, a winning opening switch monitoring process and a state monitoring process are executed. The winning opening switch monitoring process monitors input flags (starting opening switches 120 and 121, winning opening switch 123, special winning opening switch 124) set as described above, for example, an input of the special winning opening switch 124 When the flag is set, processing such as preparation for requesting the payout control device 200 to issue 15 award balls is performed. In the state monitoring process, the undetected errors of the above-mentioned sensors, the excess discharge error of the winning balls, the open state of the glass frame 5, and the unfair prize other than during the opening of the big winning opening 27a and the common battery 26 Is a process to monitor the

Next, in step S78, a special drawing game process is performed. In this special view game process, overall control of the entire special view variable display game is performed. That is, when the variation start condition (the start condition of the variation display game) is established, the process of determining the big hit random number, the process of setting the combination of the stop symbols of the special figure (result mode), and the process of setting the variation mode of the special figure Is performed (details will be described later).
Here, when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, when there is a starting opening winning in the customer waiting state and the fluctuation display game is started, the fluctuation display game is ended by losing and the start memory is stored and the fluctuation display game is executed again There are three types when the jackpot is over, there is a starting memory, and the variable display game is executed again.
Further, in the special view game process, a process of setting various output data related to the variable view game of the special view is also performed. That is, in accordance with the gaming state of the variable display game of the special view, for example, the content (command data) of the command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300 or the like is set.

Next, in step S79, processing for the variable display game of the common drawing is performed. That is, processing of setting the content of the command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300 or the like is performed in accordance with the state of the variable display game of the common drawing.
Next, in step S80, a segment LED editing process is performed. This is the display of the special view of the batch display device 35, the special view symbol determined in the special view game process of step S78, the symbol of the common view figure determined in the common view game process of step S79, and other information. Display (LED, 7-segment display).
Next, in step S81, a magnet fraud monitoring process is performed. This is to check the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 126 to determine whether there is an abnormality, for example, if the input flag of the magnetic sensor 126 is set, it is determined that a magnetic error has occurred, and a predetermined process ( Execute preparation of command of informing of fraud etc.).

Next, in step S82, a board radio wave fraud monitoring process is executed. This is to check the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 127 to determine whether there is an abnormality. For example, if the input flag of the board radio wave sensor 127 is set, it is assumed that fraud using the radio wave has occurred. And execute predetermined processing (such as preparation of a fraud notification command).
Next, in step S83, an external information editing process is performed. This is to edit data to be output from the game control apparatus 100 to the outside.
After the step S83, the timer interrupt process is ended.
Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying the register bank 0) Automatically at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU to be used, there are gaming machines that need to be instructed to execute a process of restoring an interrupt disabled state and a process of restoring a register bank specification.

[Input processing]
Next, the input process (step S72) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the input process, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch taken into the input port 1, ie, the first input port 160, is read (step S91). Then, if there is an unused bit of the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S92).
Here, the switches monitored by the input port 1 (first input port 160) are as follows.
・ Frame electric wave illegal signal (bit 0)
・ Discharge busy signal (bit 1)
・ Delivery error status signal (bit 2)
· Shoot ball out switch signal (bit 3)
· Overflow switch signal (bit 4)
・ Touch switch signal (bit 5)
· RAM initialization switch (bit 6)
· Power failure monitoring signal (bit 7)
The bits 6 and 7 are not used in this input process, and are cleared in step S92.

Subsequently, the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S93).
Next, in step S94, the address of the input port 2, ie, the second input port 161, is prepared, and in step S95, the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared.
Here, "prepare" in the present embodiment means setting a value in a register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or another memory.
Next, unused bit data is prepared in step S96, and bit data to be inverted is prepared in step S97. For example, since the board radio wave sensor 127 needs to invert the detection signal, it prepares bit data of such a sensor / switch or the like.
Unused bit data and inverted bit data are prepared for each input port. These data have the same name in the flowchart but are different data for each input port. However, there is also a possibility that the data is the same value as a result.

Next, in step S98, a switch reading process is performed.
Here, the switches monitored by the input port 2 (second input port 161) are as follows.
・ Board radio wave sensor (bit 0) (inverted bit):
Switch abnormality detection signal (bit 1): "an abnormality detection signal" in FIG. 4
Magnetic sensor (bit 2):
· Glass frame open detection switch (bit 3)
・ Front frame (body frame) open detection switch (bit 4)
Unused (bits 5 to 7)

Next, in step S99, the address of the input port 3, ie, the third input port 162, is prepared, and in step S100, the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared. In step S101, unused bit data is prepared. Thereafter, bit data to be inverted is prepared in step S102, and a switch reading process is performed in step S103, and the input process is completed.
Here, the switches monitored by the input port 3 (third input port 162) are as follows.
Start opening 2 switch (bit 0): second start opening switch 121
・ Start opening 1 switch (bit 1): first start opening switch 120
· Left winning opening switch (bit 2): winning opening switch 123-1
· Right winning opening switch (bit 3): winning opening switch 123-2
Gate switch (bit 4): gate switch 122
・ Big winning opening switch (bit 5): Big winning opening switch 124
Unused (bits 6 to 7)
In addition, as shown in FIG. 4, the signal of each switch of the bits 0 to 5 is subjected to a test shot test via the relay substrate 170 by the pattern branch on the input side (the output side of the proximity I / F 163) of the third input port 162. It is configured to be output as a test signal to the device. That is, the signal of the start opening 2 switch (bit 0) is "starting opening 2 winning signal" and "the normal electric combination 1 winning signal 1", and the signal of the starting opening 1 switch (bit 1) is "start opening 1 winning signal" The signal of the left winning opening switch (bit 2) is "normal winning opening 1 winning signal", and the signal of the right winning opening switch (bit 3) is "normal winning opening 2 winning signal", the gate switch (bit 4). The signal of) is output to the shooting test device as "gate passing signal 1 related to normal symbol 1", and the signal of the big winning opening switch (bit 5) as "special electric character 1 winning signal 1". It has become.

[Switch reading process]
Next, switch reading processing (steps S98 and S103) in the above-described input processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the switch reading process, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S111). This corresponds to the first reading. Next, if there is an unused bit of the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S112), and the bit requiring inversion is inverted (step S113), and then the target switch control area in RWM is The port input state 1 is saved (stored) (step S114). Thereafter, it waits for the delay time (0.1 ms; s represents second) to the second reading to elapse (step S115).

  When the delay time (0.1 ms) has elapsed, the second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port is performed (step S116). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S117), and the bit necessary for inversion is inverted (step S118), and then the port input state of the target switch control area It is saved (stored) in 2 (step S119). Thereafter, the bit changed in the first and second reading, that is, the signal is detected, and a definite bit pattern is created (step S120). Specifically, of the states of the input port to be read, a definite bit pattern is created in which the bit having the same state as the first and second times is “1” and the other bit is “0”. Then, the logical product of the determined bit pattern and the port input state 2 is taken, and it is set as the current determined bit (step S121).

  Next, an indeterminate bit pattern is created in which the state is 0 for the same state and 1 for the other bit in the first and second reading (step S122), and the logical product of the indeterminate bit pattern and the determined state at the previous interrupt Is set as the previously held bit (step S123). As a result, it is possible to obtain the state of a signal from which noise due to chattering of a switch or the like has been removed. Then, the currently determined bit and the previously held bit are combined and saved in the RWM as the current decided state (step S124), exclusive OR is performed between the previous and current decided states, and saved in the RWM as the rising edge ( Step S125), ends the switch reading process.

When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch read changes the signal by reading the switch once for each interrupt processing and comparing with the result of the previous read. Although there is a method of determining whether or not the switch has been read, if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost until the next interrupt processing, there is a possibility that the correct determination can not be made. In addition, since the input pulse of the switch must be held for a time more than twice the timer interrupt cycle by simple calculation, in order to slow down the design of the electric circuit for extending the pulse and the speed of the game ball passing through the switch It is necessary to design the ball flow path of the
On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference, the processable amount within the interrupt due to extending the timer interrupt cycle It is possible to balance the increase with the ease of structural design and the like, and to avoid the problems as described above.

[Output processing]
Next, an output process (step S73) in the above timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the output process, first, all the output data of the port 176 (see FIG. 4) for outputting the data of the segment of the collective display unit (LED) 35 are turned off (step S131). Subsequently, the data to be output is synthesized and output to the first port 175 having a function of outputting data of the special winning opening solenoid 133 and the common voltage solenoid 132 (step S132).
Subsequently, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display unit (LED) 35 is updated ((+1) update in the range of 0 to 3) (step S133), and the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter The output data of the digit line is acquired (step S134). Next, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step S134a). The external information to be synthesized here is the "door / frame open signal" (that is, the open signal of the glass frame 5 (door) / front frame 4 (frame)), the "security signal" (during various fraud occurrences, RAM There is a signal that is output for a predetermined time when power is turned on by clearing.
In the present application, "acquiring data" in the control processing means that data is taken out from the ROM (the ROM 101B in the game control apparatus 100 of this example).

Thereafter, the data combined at step S134a is output to the digit output port (third port 177) and the external information output port (fourth port 180) (step S135). The third port 177 is an output port for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of the batch display device 35 is connected.
Next, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment data area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S136), and the loaded segment output data is output to the port for segment output (second port 176) Step S137). The second port 176 is an output port for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the batch display device 35.
In the present application, "loading data" in the control processing as in step S136 means extracting data from the RAM (RAM 101C in the game control apparatus 100 of this example).
Moreover, although the predetermined LED in the collective display device 35 is to be dynamically turned on by the processing up to the step S137, for the display executed by this turning on, for example, a special symbol display, a normal symbol display, a special symbol hold There are a display, a general drawing hold display, a round display, a game state display (time reduction display, high probability display) and the like.

Subsequently, the data to be output to the external information terminal substrate 55 is combined (step S138), and the combined data and the output data of emission permission are further combined (step S138a), and the data combined in step S138a It is output to the port (fourth port 180) for the emission permission signal output (step S138b). The fourth port 180 outputs information related to the pachinko machine 1 such as the big hit information as an external information signal to the external information terminal board 55, and a launch control signal from the game control unit 100 via the payout control unit 200. It is an output port for outputting to.
In addition, as the external information to be synthesized here in step S138, "big hit signal 1", "big hit signal 2", "big hit signal 3", "big hit signal 4", "symbol determination number signal", "starting opening" There are "signal" and "main prize ball signal".

Subsequently, the output data 1 to 3 of the test signal to be output to the test shooting test apparatus are loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 1 provided on the relay substrate 170 (step S139). Thereafter, the output data 4 to 6 of the test signal to be output to the test shooting test apparatus are loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 2 provided on the relay substrate 170 (step S140).
Next, the output data 7 to 8 of the test signal to be output to the test shooting test apparatus are loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 3 provided on the relay substrate 170 (step S141). Also, the output data 9 to 10 of the test signal to be output to the test shooting test apparatus are loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 4 provided on the relay substrate 170 (step S142). Further, the output data 11 of the test signal to be output to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 5 provided on the relay substrate 170 (step S143). End the output process of.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the payout command transmission process (step S74) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. The outline will be described. In FIG. 14, the left column (steps S151 to S161) is processing of updating (increasing) the number of times of output of the main prize ball signal, and the right column (steps S162 to S172) is processing of transmitting a payout command. .
In this payout command transmission process, first, a winning number counter area 2 in which a plurality of storage areas as winning number counters are provided by winning balls (for example, 3 winning balls, 10 winning balls, 14 winning balls). It is determined whether or not there is a count number other than “0” in the counters of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked among the respective counters in (step S151).
The structure (also shown in FIG. 14) of the winning number counter area 2 is, for example, as follows.
· 3 prize ball counter · 10 prize ball counter · 14 prize ball counter Each winning number counter can be stored up to 255 winnings, in the check of the winning number counter area 2, the counter mentioned above from the top We check in order (from three prize ball counters).

  Returning to the flow, if there is no count number (step S151: NO), the address of the counter in the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S152), and the count numbers of all counters in the winning number counter area 2 It is determined whether the check of has been completed (step S153). If it is determined that all the checks have been completed (step S153; YES), the process proceeds to step S162. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S153; NO), the process returns to step S151 and the above process is repeated.

If it is determined in step S151 that there is a count number (step S151; YES), the count number of the target winning number counter is subtracted (-1) (step S154). The number of payouts (for example, 3, 10, or 14) corresponding to the address is acquired (step S155).
After passing through step S155, the value of the remaining number area of winning balls and the number of payouts obtained in step S155 are added (step S156). As the value of the remaining prize ball area before this processing, a fraction less than a predetermined number (in this case, 10) serving as the reference of the output of the main prize ball signal is stored. The value of the newly generated number of payout balls is added to the value of the remaining ball number area. Then, the added value is saved in the remaining number area of the winning balls (step S157).

  Thereafter, 10 which is a predetermined number serving as a reference of the output of the main prize ball signal is subtracted from the value of the remaining number area of prize balls (step S158), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S159). When the subtraction result is not 0 or more (step S159; NO), the update of the main prize ball remaining number is finished, and the process proceeds to step S162. When the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S159; YES), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (step S160), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step S160) S161), return to step S158.

In this main prize ball remaining number updating process (mainly steps S156 to S161), an external device is activated each time the number of prize balls generated due to the winning on the winning opening (predetermined number of payouts) reaches a predetermined number (here 10). Set the main prize ball signal to be output to That is, every time the number of remaining winning balls reaches 10, the above-mentioned step S160 is executed, and the number of outputs of the main winning ball signal is incremented by one. In addition to the main prize ball signal, an external device (game arcade management device, etc.) receives a prize ball every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). A signal is output, and by collating these two signals, it is possible to monitor an incorrect payout. That is, the main prize ball remaining number updating process transmits the prize ball signal to the external device from the game control device 100 based on the payout schedule, so that the actual payout of the payout (the number of award balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200) Processing to be consistent with the
In addition, one pulse is outputted from the gaming control device 100 serving as the main substrate for the winning ball signal every ten pieces of delivery schedule, and one pulse is outputted from the payout control device 200 serving as the delivering substrate every ten pieces of delivery. ing.

Next, there is no count number in all the counters in the winning number counter area 2 and it is determined that all the counters have been checked (step S153; YES) or the subtraction result is not 0 or more (step S159; NO) If the payout command transmission timer is not 0, the timer is updated by 1 (step S162), and it is then determined whether the timer has become 0 (timed up) (step S163). If it is determined that the timer (the payout command transmission timer) has timed up (step S163; YES), the payout command transmission process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the timer has not timed out (step S163; NO), it is determined whether the payout busy signal is busy (step S164). Then, if it is determined that the payout busy signal is busy (step S164; YES), the payout command transmission processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the payout busy signal is not busy (step S164; NO), the process proceeds to step S165 to check a winning number counter area 1 described later.
In the determination of step S164, instead of looking at the state of the port of the first input port 160, the payout busy signal flag set in the input processing of FIG. Determination is made.

Then, in step S165, each winning number counter area 1 is provided with a plurality of storage areas as winning number counters by number of winning balls (for example, three winning balls, 10 winning balls, 14 winning balls). Among the counters, it is determined whether or not there is a count number other than “0” in the counter of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked (step S165).
The structure (also shown in FIG. 14) of the winning number counter area 1 is, for example, as follows.
· 3 prize ball counter · 10 prize ball counter · 14 prize ball counter Each winning number counter can be stored up to 65535 winnings, in the check of the winning number counter area 1, the counter mentioned above from the top We check in order (from three prize ball counters). The difference between the above-mentioned winning number counter area 2 and this winning number counter area 1 is the storage capacity of each counter.

  Returning to the flow, if there is no count number (step S165: NO), the address of the counter in winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S166), and the counted numbers of all counters in winning number counter area 1 It is determined whether the check of has been completed (step S167). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (Step S167; YES), this payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S167; NO), the process returns to step S165 and the above process is repeated.

  If it is determined in step S165 that the count number is present (step S165; YES), the count number of the target winning number counter is subtracted (-1) (step S168). The payout amount command corresponding to the address is acquired (step S169), and the acquired payout amount command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S170). Then, after passing through step S170, the initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the payout command transmission timer area used in steps S162 and S163 (step S171), and data of the request flag (payment request flag) is stored in the payout request flag area. The information indicating that the flag has been set is saved (step S172), and this command transmission process is ended. Here, in step S172, in the game control apparatus 100, it can be determined by another process that the player itself (game control apparatus 100) has made a payout request to the payout control device 200 (commanded the payout operation of the winning balls). In order to do this, the data of the payout request flag is set (the flag is in a set state).

  By the above-described processes of steps S162 to S171, a payout amount command (a kind of payout command) instructing the payout of the gaming ball (prize ball) corresponding to the winning is transmitted to the payout control device 200, and the payout control device 200 Pay out the game ball (prize ball) based on the number command. As described above, the number-of-payouts command is not sent for each timer interrupt, but is sent after a predetermined time (for example, 200 ms). In addition, it is also a necessary condition for the number-of-payouts command to be transmitted that the payout control board side can pay out the prize balls (that is, that the payout busy signal is not busy).

The payout busy signal is turned on (busy) on condition that one or more of the following conditions are met.
・ During out operation ・ During ball lending operation ・ During shooting ball out error ・ In overflow error ・ In frame radio wave illegal occurrence ・ During out-out ball detection switch malfunction (during switch malfunction monitoring ball disbursed)
・ Due to insufficient payout error ・ Due to excessive payout error ・ Count the number of prize balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control board (number of unpaid prize balls = number of winning game balls)
Such as (when it is not 0)

[Random number update process 1]
Next, random number update processing 1 (step S75) in the above-described timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG.
The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, the hit symbol random number, which is the target of the initial value random number update processing of FIG. .
In the random number updating process 1, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S185).

  If the jackpot symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S185; NO), it is determined whether the small hitting symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S191). If the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S185; YES), the jackpot symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S186), and the next initial value of the jackpot symbol random number loaded corresponds The start value of the random number counter (random number area) to be set is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value (step S187). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the small hitting symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S191).

  If the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S191; NO), it is determined whether or not the random number for the general drawing is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S194). Also, if the small hitting symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S191; YES), the small hitting symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S192), and the next initial loading of the loaded small hitting symbol random number The value is set in the register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S193). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the random number is waiting for setting the next initial value (start value) (step S194).

  When the hit random number in the common drawing is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S194; NO), it is determined whether the hit symbol random number in the common drawing is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S197). If the random number per block is waiting for the initial value setting (step S194; YES), the initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S195), and the next initial stage of the random number per block is loaded A value is set in a register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S196). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the winning symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S 197).

  If the hit pattern random number in the drawing is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S 197; NO), the random number updating process 1 is ended. Also, if the hit pattern random number of the common drawing is waiting for the initial value setting (step S 197; YES), the next time initial value is loaded with the hit initial value random number (step S 198), and the loaded initial value of the hit symbol random number next time The value is set in a register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S199), and the random number updating process 1 is ended.

[Random number update process 2]
Next, random number update processing 2 (step S76) in the above-described timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG.
The random number updating process 2 is a process of updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.
In the present embodiment, although there are three types of variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 as described above, 1 byte random number (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2 byte random number (variation pattern) as variation pattern random numbers There is a random number 1), and both of the random number update processing 2 in FIG. 16 are to be updated, and the update target is switched and processed each time an interrupt occurs. Furthermore, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, updating of the 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 (random number for reach variation mode determination) by the random number updating process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is performed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. Are configured to

In the random number update process 2, first, the random number update scan counter for specifying in order which random number of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be the target of the current update process is updated (step S201). Here, it updates in the range of 0 to 3.
The types of random numbers to be updated are as follows.
・ When 0: Variation pattern random number 1 (upper)
・ When 1: Variation pattern random number 1 (lower)
・ When 2: Variation pattern random number 2
・ When 3: Variation pattern random number 3
Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S202). Then, the upper limit judgment value of the random number is acquired from the table referenced based on the calculated address (step S203). At this time, in the table to be referred to, there is stored an upper limit value for each kind of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made one round.
Here, the effect random number update table has data (4 blocks) for the types of random numbers to be updated, and the details are as follows.
-Upper limit judgment value-Mask value of M1 counter-Type information of random number area to be updated (details are below)
1 byte random number 2 byte random number (upper)
2-byte random number (lower)
・ Address of update area

Subsequently, the value of the M1 counter in the gaming microcomputer 101 is loaded (step S204), a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired from the corresponding effect random number update table, and the value of the M1 counter is masked. (Step S205).
Since the microcomputer assumed as the gaming microcomputer 101 in the present embodiment does not have a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as an R register), an M1 counter is used instead. Here, the R register is used for refreshing the DRAM provided in the Z80 microcomputer, etc., and is a register whose value is constantly updated, and a random value is acquired each time it is read. The M1 counter is a counter whose value is updated each time a program instruction is fetched, and like the R register, is a counter whose value changes each time it is read. When the gaming microcomputer 101 has an R register, the R register may be used instead of the M1 counter. In any case, the randomness can be given randomness by using the value of the M1 counter or the R register.

Further, the mask value is changed to the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter (or R register, and the same applies in the following) when changing the number of bits different depending on the random number to be updated, for example, the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 When the upper one byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower four bits of the M1 counter are set. This is because the upper limit value is different depending on the type of random number.
When the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated as the mask value, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter is updated. When the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower order of the M1 counter is updated. Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited thereto.

Next, it is checked whether the random number area to be updated is higher than the 2-byte random number (step S206). If it is higher than the 2-byte random number (step S206; YES), the process proceeds to step S207, and the value left by masking the value of the M1 counter by the mask value (hereinafter referred to as the masked value) is "1". Is the addition value (high order), and "0" is the addition value (low order), and the process proceeds to step S208.
The reason why “1” is added to the masked value is to avoid the case where the masked value may become “0” and adding “0” later does not change from the value before addition.
On the other hand, if the random number area to be updated is a 2-byte random number lower order or a 1-byte random number (step S206; NO), the process branches to step S209 to set "0" as an addition value (upper order) and mask value "1". The result of addition is regarded as the addition value (lower order), and the process proceeds to step S208.

In the next step S208, it is checked whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is a 2-byte random number. Here, if it is not a 2-byte random number, the process jumps to step S210 (step S208; NO). On the other hand, if the random number area is a 2-byte random number, the process proceeds to step S211 (step S208; YES). In step S210, "0" is set as a random number value (upper), and the mask value added with "1" is updated as a random number area value (lower) to be updated, and the process proceeds to step S212.
When the random number area is a 2-byte random number, in step S211, the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set as a random number value, and the process proceeds to step S212.

Next, in step S212, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in steps S207 and S209 to the random number value is calculated to obtain a new random number value, and whether this random number value exceeds the upper limit judgment value acquired in step S203 It determines (step S213).
If the newly calculated random number value exceeds the upper limit judgment value, the upper limit judgment value is subtracted from the calculated random number value to obtain the current random number value (step S214), and the process proceeds to step S215. On the other hand, if the newly calculated random number value does not exceed the upper limit judgment value, the calculated random number value is set as the current random value, and the process jumps from step S214 and proceeds to step S215.
In step S215, the lower order of the random value is saved in the corresponding random number area. Here, the data is saved in either the 1-byte random number area or the low-order area of 2-byte random numbers. Subsequently, it is checked whether the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step S216). If it is a 2-byte random number (step S216; YES), the high order of the random number value is the high side of the random number area (2-byte random number (high order)) (Step S217). Here, it saves in the upper area of 2-byte random numbers. After passing through step S217, the random number updating process 2 ends.
On the other hand, if the updated random number is not a 2-byte random number (step S216; NO), step S217 is jumped, the process is not performed, and the random number update process 2 is ended.

As described above, the CPU 101A updates the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2. In addition, as the fluctuation patterns, as described later, fluctuation patterns (reach fluctuation modes) in various reach states such as “no reach” fluctuation patterns, “normal reach”, many “special (SP) reach” and the like are defined. ing.
Therefore, the CPU 101A sets the reach fluctuation mode in the reach state among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of gaming balls into the start winning opening 25 and the start area (the second start winning opening 26a) of the normal fluctuation winning device 26. The random number updating means is provided to update the random number for determining the reach variation mode (variation pattern random number) to be determined.

[Prize port switch / status monitoring process]
Next, the winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S77) in the above timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The winning opening switch / status monitoring processing is processing for monitoring whether or not there is a signal input (change in signal) from switches provided in various winning openings, and monitoring an error.

In the winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, the winning opening monitoring table 1 (for example, detection from one large winning opening switch 124 corresponding to one large winning opening switch 124 in the special winning opening (fluctuating winning device 27) The port number to which the signal is input and data indicating the bit position of the signal in the port are stored (step S221). In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, there is one large winning opening, but in the present embodiment, two large winning opening switches 124 are provided, and any game ball that has flowed into the large winning opening of the variable winning device 27 is In this case, the winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the large winning opening switches 124 is prepared.
Next, while monitoring whether there is an incorrect prize at the special winning opening despite the fact that the special winning opening is not open, a fraud & prize monitoring process (step S222) for detecting a normal winning is executed.

After that, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other big winning opening switch 124 in the big winning opening (the variable winning device 27) is prepared (step S223), and it is monitored whether there is an incorrect winning, and a normal winning is achieved. The fraud & prize monitoring process (step S224) to detect is performed.
As described above, there are two large winning opening switches 124, and two large winning openings switches 124 disposed in the large winning opening 27a.
Next, a winning opening monitoring table for a winning opening switch in the general electric power station is prepared (step S227). As a winning opening switch in the universal electric power station, there is a second starting opening switch 121 for detecting a winning on the second starting winning opening 26a of the normal fluctuation winning device 26 as the ordinary electric power.
Then, while monitoring whether there is an illegal prize, an irregular & prize monitoring process (step S228) for detecting a normal prize is executed.

  Thereafter, a winning opening monitoring table (for example, a list showing switches not requiring unauthorized monitoring) of the winning opening switches for which unauthorized monitoring is unnecessary is prepared (step S229). As a winning opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring, for example, there is a first starting opening switch 120 and a winning opening switch 123 provided for the general winning openings 28-31. For the winning opening switch that does not require illegal monitoring, since the illegal monitoring is not performed but the winning detection processing is performed, the winning opening monitoring table is prepared for the processing in step S229, and the winning number is updated in the next step. The number counter update process (step S230) is executed. The detailed procedure of the winning number counter update process will be described later.

After the winning number counter update process (step S230), a state scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal of the plurality of switches and signals whose errors should be monitored is to be the target of the current monitoring. The update is performed ("+1" update in the range of 0 to 3) to prepare (step S231). Subsequently, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 is prepared (step S232).
As types of errors to be monitored in the gaming machine state monitoring table 1, the following are set corresponding to the value of the state scan counter, and these are, for example, a shoot ball out switch from the payout control device 200, an overflow switch , Corresponding to the payout abnormality status signal of the payout control device 200 or the like.
(A) When 0: Switch error 1 error (connector disconnection, switch failure, etc.)
(B) 1: When the shoot ball out error (c) 2: When the overflow error (d) 3: Dispensing error

Next, an error check of the type defined in the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 is performed (step S233), and thereafter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 is prepared (step S235).
The types of errors monitored by the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 are as follows.
(E) When 0: Glass frame open (front frame open)
(F) 1: Front frame open (body frame open)
(G) When 2: Frame radio wave is illegal (H) 3: Touch switch

Next, an error check of the type defined in the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 is performed (step S236), and it is determined whether the state scan counter has become "0" (step S237). If it is determined that the state scan counter is "0", the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S235).
The types of errors monitored by the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 include the following.
(R) 0: Switch error 2 error (connector disconnection, switch failure, etc.)
That is, as the types of errors to be monitored by the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, only those whose state scan counter value corresponds to "0" are set.

Next, an error check of the type defined in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is performed (step S239), and a payout busy signal check process (step S240) is further executed. Return to loading process.
On the other hand, if the state scan counter = "0" in step S237, there is no error to be monitored in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, so the timer interrupt process is not performed through steps S238 and 239. Return
The gaming machine state check process of table 3 in step S239 and the payout busy signal check process of step S240 are executed only when the state scan counter is "0", that is, once in four timer interrupts. Therefore, when the timer interrupt cycle is 4 ms, monitoring by these check processes is monitoring of a 16 ms cycle.

[Incorrect & prize monitoring process]
Next, the fraud & prize monitoring process (steps S222, S224, and S228) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / status monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
The prize monitoring process is a process performed on each of the two big prize port switches 124 of the big prize port (the variable prize device 27) and the second starting port switch 121 in the universal electric power system. The prize winning opening (fluctuating winning device 27) and the Fuden (normal fluctuating winning device 26) are forcibly detected by opening the opening / closing member and inserting a game ball to pay out the prize ball. Monitor other fraudulently.
Here, in describing the fraud & prize monitoring process in the prize hole switch / status monitoring process, the information defined in the fraud monitoring table among the prepared prize hole monitoring tables is as follows.
・ Data to judge whether there is input
・ Lower address of fraud monitoring information ・ Lower address of fraudulent prize number area ・ Incorrect prize winning error notification command ・ illegal prize number upper limit value (illegal occurrence judgment number)
· Address of the winning opening switch table · Notification timer update information (permission / update)

  In the fraud & prize monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is checked (step S241), and it is determined whether or not the fraud monitoring period is underway (step S242). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than the special game state in which the variable winning device 27 is opened when the winning hole switch targeted for error monitoring is the big winning hole switch 124. Further, when the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is the second starting opening switch 121, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal fluctuation winning device 26 is being executed based on the hit of the drawing.

  Then, if it is a fraud monitoring period (step S 242; YES), it is determined whether there is an input on the target winning opening switch (step S 243). If there is no input on the target winning opening switch (step S243; NO), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S252). Also, if there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S243; YES), the target number of incorrect winnings is updated by +1 (step S244), and the number of incorrect winnings after the addition is the number of fraud occurrence judgment targets to be monitored (for example, , 5) or more (step S245).

For example, the game ball is caught in the door member of the big winning opening when the big winning opening in the open state is converted to the closed state, and the gaming ball is the count switch (the big winning opening). This is so as not to judge that the signal is illegitimate when the player wins after the effective period of the switch 124) or when the signal has a noise, and it is because it is not judged as an error if it is not illegitimate. The number of determinations may be different for each switch.
Then, if it is determined that the number is not more than the determined number (step S245; NO), the process jumps to step S250, and a winning monitoring table (winning opening monitoring table) of the target winning opening switch is prepared. If the number of judged winnings is exceeded (step S245; YES), the number of incorrect winnings is fixed to the number of false judgings (step S246), and an initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the target false winning notification timer area (step S247). Next, a target fraudulent command is prepared (step S248), a fraudulent prize occurrence flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step S249), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the targeted fraud flag area (step S260). ).

  On the other hand, when it is not the fraud monitoring period (step S242; NO), the prize monitoring table of the target prize opening switch is prepared (step S250), and a prize number counter updating process (step S251) for setting a prize ball is performed. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S252), and it is determined whether the notification timer update permission is present (step S253). When the updating of the notification timer is not permitted (step S253; NO), the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. If updating of the notification timer is permitted (step S253; YES), the target notification timer is updated to -1 if it is not 0 (step S254). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

Updating of the notification timer is not permitted when the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is one big winning opening switch 124, and is allowed when the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is the other big winning opening switch 124. Ru. As a result, the notification timer is updated twice as frequently as the fraudulent notification about the variable winning device 27, and it is prevented that time is up in half of the specified time (for example, 60000 ms).
That is, since error monitoring is performed by the two big winning hole switches 124 for the big winning hole (variation winning device 27), when the timer is updated by both switches, double timer updating will be performed, resulting in In this case, the timer is updated only at the timing of performing the monitoring process of the other special winning opening switch 124 that performs the monitoring process later, because the unauthorized timer is timed up in half of the specified time. .
Note that when the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is the second starting opening switch 121 in the common power system, updating of the notification timer is always permitted.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S255), and when the value is not 0 (step S255; NO), that is, when the time is not up, the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. If the value is 0 (step S255; YES), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, prepare the target fraud release command (step S256) and set the fraud recovery flag as the fraud flag. Prepare (step S 257). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S258).

  If it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S258; YES), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the present fraud & prize monitoring process, the target number of wrong prizes is cleared ( Step S259), compare the prepared fraud flag with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S260). Also, if it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S258; NO), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & prize monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. The value of the incorrect flag area is compared (step S260).

Then, if the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step S260; YES), the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. If the prepared fraud flag does not match the value of the target fraud flag area (step S260; NO), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (step S261), and rendering command setting processing is performed. (Step S262), the fraud & prize monitoring process ends.
Through the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 with the occurrence of an error, and an incorrect prize error cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 along with the release of the error, and the start and end of the error notification are set. It will be done.

[Winning number counter update processing]
Next, the winning number counter updating process (step S230) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / status monitoring process and the winning number counter updating process (step S251) in the fraud & prize monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the input number counter updating process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning opening monitoring table acquired in the above-described winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S271).
Here, the information defined in the winning table of the winning opening monitoring table prepared by the winning opening switch / status monitoring process and the like is as follows.
・ Repetition count ・ Data to judge whether there is input (monitoring switch bit)
・ Lower address of winning number counter area 1 ・ Lower address of winning number counter area 2 (When there are a plurality of winning opening switches for one table, it is defined for each switch except for the number of repetitions)

  Next, it is checked whether there is an input (more precisely, a change in the input) of a detection signal from the winning opening switch to be monitored (step S272). Here, if it is determined that there is no input (S272; NO), the process jumps to step S281, and if it is determined that there is an input (S272; YES), the value of target prize counter area 1 is loaded in the next step S273. .

In the next step S274, the loaded winning number counter is updated (+1), and in the subsequent step S275, it is checked whether it overflows. When it is determined that the counter overflow has not occurred (step S275; NO), the process proceeds to step S276, the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1, and then the process proceeds to step S277.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S275 that the counter overflow has occurred (S275; YES), step S276 is skipped and the process jumps to step S277. Since the maximum number of memories (for example, 255 for 1-byte size and 65535 for 2-byte size) is determined by the size of the provided number-of-winnings counter area, the value will return to "0" if it is exceeded and pay You will lose a lot of information on the number of winning balls. In order to avoid this, in step S 274, the contents of the area are not updated immediately, and it is determined that (+1) outside the area is checked whether it becomes “0” before performing the update.

In step S277, in steps S277 to S280, the same processing as in steps S273 to S276 is executed for the winning number counter area 2. That is, first, the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded in step S277, the loaded winning number counter is updated (+1) in the next step S278, and it is checked whether it overflows in the following step S279. If it is determined that the counter overflow has not occurred (step S279; NO), the process proceeds to step S280 to save the updated value in the winning number counter area 2 and then proceeds to step S281.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S279 that a counter overflow has occurred (S279; YES), the process skips step S280 and jumps to step S281.
In step S281, the table address of the winning opening monitoring table is updated to the address of the next record, and then in step S282, it is determined whether the monitoring process of all switches has been completed. Ends the input number counter updating process, and if not (step S282; NO), the process returns to step S272 to repeat the above process.

By the above processing, a winning ball according to the winning is set.
Specifically, according to the first half process (steps S273 to S276), the value of the winning number counter (that is, the value of the winning number counter area 1) for the winning ball (delivery command transmission) is updated. The counter size is 2 bytes and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535.
Further, according to the processing in the second half (steps S277 to S280), the value of the winning number counter for the main winning ball signal (that is, the value of the winning number counter area 2) is updated. The counter size is 1 byte and takes a value in the range of 0-255. The value of the winning number counter area 2 is used, for example, in step S155 described above for the main prize ball signal.

[Pachislot machine state check process]
Next, the gaming machine state check process (step S233, step S236, step S239) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the gaming machine status check process, first, a game corresponding to a status scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal of the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored for error is to be the target of the current surveillance The machine state monitoring table is acquired (step S301).
The information defined on the gaming machine status monitoring table prepared by the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is as follows.
(A) Lower address of top address of status monitoring area (B) Lower address of port input status area of switch control area where target signal information is stored Mask data to extract only bits of target signal (C) ) Judgment data on signal (e) Status off command (In case of error system, meaning of command of error notification end)
(F) Status on command (In the case of an error system, the meaning of the command to start error notification)
(G) Status off monitoring timer comparison value (h) Status on monitoring timer comparison value

Next, the state of the target switch acquired this time is checked, and it is determined whether a signal to be monitored (including the state of the switch) is on (step S302). Here, "signal is on" is an error (abnormal, incorrect) state with respect to an error system, and a state of the user touching the touch switch signal (the player's Means in contact). In addition, “signal is off” is a state in which there is no error (normal) with respect to an error system, and a state in which no touch is made with respect to the touch switch signal (the player's hand Means not in contact).
When the switch is not on (step S302: NO), a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (step S303), and a target state off command is acquired and prepared (step S304). Thereafter, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S305), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S309).

On the other hand, if the signal is on (step S302: YES), a state on flag is prepared as a state flag (step S306). For example, as one of the errors defined in the gaming machine state monitoring table, in the case of out of shoot ball, it is detected by the shoot out ball switch that there is no game ball in the chute for supplying the game ball to the storage tank. When it becomes, step S302 becomes YES. If YES, the state on flag is prepared in step S306.
Next, the target state on command is prepared (step S307). Thereafter, the target state on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S308), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S309).

  If the value of the target signal control area matches the state of the current signal (step S309; YES), that is, if the state of the signal has not changed, it is determined to determine whether a timer for error treatment is necessary. The status monitoring timer of the target is updated by +1 (step S312), and it is determined whether the value of the target status monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value (a reference value which determines that the treatment for the error etc. is necessary). Step S313). If the value of the target signal control area and the state of the current signal do not match (step S309; NO), that is, if the state of the signal changes, it is determined that no error treatment is necessary and the target signal The current signal state is saved in the control area (step S310), and the target state monitoring timer is cleared (step S311), and the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S312). It is determined whether the value of V has reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S313).

If the value of the target state monitoring timer has not reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S313; NO), the gaming machine state check processing ends. If the value of the target state monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S313: YES), the state monitoring timer is updated by -1 and the comparison value is held at the value of -1 (step S314). The status flag is compared with the value of the target status flag area (step S315).
Here, when it is determined in step S313 that the target state monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value, it is considered that the state of the signal (in the case of an error system, the state of error occurrence or cancellation) is determined. Become. However, for example, in the case of an error system, there may be a situation where the occurrence of an error is determined when an error has already occurred, or the release of an error is determined when an error is not occurring. After the process, in step S315, by comparing the prepared status flag with the value of the target status flag area, it is checked whether the status of the signal determined this time is the same as the status of the current error flag.

Then, if the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (step S315; YES), the status of the signal (error status in the case of an error system) does not change. It is determined that there is no need for treatment (response to signal state change), and the gaming machine state check process is ended. If the prepared status flag and the value of the target status flag area do not match (if the status flag is not the same) (step S315; NO), the signal status has changed (changed to a new error status) Since the touch switch signal changes from off to on or from on to off), the prepared state flag is saved in the state flag area of interest (step S316), and the process proceeds to step S317. That is, the value of the target state flag area is changed to the state of the signal state determined this time, and the process proceeds to step S317. In step S317, command setting processing is performed, and a command corresponding to the state of the signal determined this time is set. That is, processing is performed to transmit either the state off command or the state on command prepared above. As a result, the action corresponding to the current signal state is performed. For example, if the shoot ball is out, an error display notifying that is notified or the notification is canceled. After step S317, the gaming machine state check process is ended.
In this way, when a signal such as an error is turned on, the corresponding status on flag is set to prepare a status on command, and when a signal such as an error is turned off, the corresponding status off flag is set and the status off command is set. Be In particular, in this gaming machine state check process, not only is the signal on (error occurrence or hand contact with the firing operation handle 11) being monitored, but the signal off (error release or firing operation) The processing is shared by monitoring the movement and the state of releasing the hand from the handle 11 as well.
Such a game machine state check process is the same for other errors such as glass frame open and front frame open.

[Discharge busy signal check process]
Next, a payout busy signal check process (step S240) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In this process, first, the state of the above-described payout busy signal from the payout control device 200 is checked by the corresponding flag, and it is determined whether the payout busy signal is on (step S285).
Then, if the payout busy signal is not on (step S 285: NO), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S 285), and a prescribed off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step S 2) S286) The value of the busy signal state area is compared with the state of the current signal (step S287).

  On the other hand, if the payout busy signal is on (step S302: YES), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S285a). Next, a specified on determination monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step S286a), and the value of the busy signal state area is compared with the current state of the busy signal (step S287). In step S287, it is checked whether the same state continues for a plurality of interrupts.

If the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the busy signal at this time (step S287; YES), that is, if the state of the busy signal has not changed, the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S290). It is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer has reached the set monitoring timer comparison value (the off determination monitoring timer comparison value or the on determination monitoring timer comparison value) (step S291).
If the value of the busy signal state area does not match the state of the current busy signal (step S287; NO), that is, if the state of the signal changes, the state of the current busy signal is saved in the busy signal control area. (Step S288) Then, the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (step S289), and the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S290), and the value of the busy signal monitoring timer reaches the set monitoring timer comparison value. It is determined whether it has been done (step S291).

If the value of the busy signal monitoring timer has not reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S291; NO), the payout busy signal check process is ended. In addition, when the value of the busy signal monitoring timer reaches the monitoring timer comparison value (step S291: YES), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1 and the comparison value is held at the value of -1 (step S292). The status flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S293), and it is determined whether the prepared status flag indicates a busy status (step S294).
Here, when it is determined in step S291 that the busy signal monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value, the state of the busy signal is determined.

Then, if the prepared state flag does not indicate the busy state (step S 294; NO), the payout busy signal check process is ended. If the prepared state flag indicates a busy state (step S 294; YES), the busy signal is changed from off to on, so the change is the player's ball lending operation (ball lending button In order to determine whether or not the operation is performed by pressing 16), the process proceeds to step 295.
At step S295, the data of the payout request flag (saved in the payout command transmission process described above) is loaded and cleared (step S295), and the loaded payout request flag data has the request flag (ie, the flag is It is determined whether it is in the standing state) (step S296).

Then, if the data of the payout request flag is a request flag (step S 296; YES), the payout control device 200 is executing the prize ball payout operation requested by itself (game control device 100) and the busy state Since it is determined that the above process is performed, steps S298 and S299 described later are not executed, and the payout busy signal check process ends.
On the other hand, when the data of the payout request flag does not have the request flag (step S 296; NO), there is a possibility that the ball lending operation of the player has been performed, so an error that the busy signal is turned on next occurs Is checked (step S297).

Then, if an error in which the busy signal is on is occurring (step S 297; YES), it is determined that the busy state is occurring because the error is occurring, so steps S 298 and S 299 described later are not executed. , This payout busy signal check process ends.
On the other hand, if an error that the busy signal is on is not occurring (step S 297; NO), it is determined that the ball lending operation of the player is performed (the busy signal is turned on by the ball lending operation of the player). Since it is possible, prepare a ball lend button press command (a command indicating that the ball lend button 16 is depressed and the ball lend operation is performed) (step S 298), and a rendering command to transmit this command to the effect control device 200 The setting process is executed (step S299), and the payout busy signal check process is ended thereafter.

When the payout busy signal is on (busy), it is as already described in the description of the payout command transmission processing, and except during an error or abnormality occurrence, the payout operation of the winning balls, or the ball lending operation It is one of medium (during payout operation of a rental ball). For this reason, it is necessary to check the state of the dispensing request flag and whether an error that the busy signal is on is occurring (shooting ball out error, overflow error, dispensing abnormal status signal is on, etc.) You can determine if you are busy by lending.
Therefore, according to the payout busy signal check process, the status of the payout busy signal received from the payout control device 200 is checked, data of a predetermined flag is set according to the status, and the payout busy signal It is determined whether or not the player's ball lending operation (ball lending operation by pressing the ball lending button 16) has been performed based on the state, and the ball lending is performed each time the player's ball lending operation is performed. A button pressing command is to be transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, the special view game process (step S78) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special view game processing, the monitoring of the input of the first start opening switch 120 and the second start opening switch 121, the control of the entire processing related to the special view fluctuation display game, and the setting of the display of the special view are performed.
In the special view game process, first, in step S321, a start hole switch monitoring process is performed to monitor winning of the first start hole switch 120 and the second start hole switch 121.
In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when there is a winning of the game ball in the first starting winning opening 25 and the second starting winning opening 26a, various random numbers (big hit random numbers etc.) are extracted, and the special view variation display game based on the winnings In the stage before the start of the game, the game result pre-judgment is performed to determine in advance the game result based on the winning. The details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (step S321) will be described later.
Next, in step S322, a special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed. This is to perform processing of monitoring the detection of the game ball by the special winning opening switch 124 provided in the variable winning device 27.

Next, at step S323, if the special figure game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated. In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is 0 (step S324). When the value of the special figure game processing timer is 0 (step S324; YES), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, it is referred to in order to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. A game sequence branch table (a specific example is shown in the upper right of FIG. 22) is set in the register (step S325), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step S326). . Then, a subroutine call is made according to the game processing number (step S328).
The special figure game processing timer is such that a timer value is set to a predetermined value in each process (steps S329 to S339: processing number = 0 to processing number = 10) after branching by the processing number described later. It is set to be the timing to execute step S329 and subsequent steps when the special view game processing timer is up. Thus, when it is time to execute step S325 or later when step S323 is executed, the determination result of step S324 becomes affirmative, and step S325 or later (including steps S340 to S343) is executed. . When it is not time to execute steps S325 to S339 when step S323 is executed, the determination result of step S324 is negative, and only steps S340 to S343 are executed.

  In the subroutine call by the process number in step S328, the process number 0 to step S329 (special figure normal process), the process number 1 to step S330 (special figure changing process), and the process number 2 step S331 (special figure displayed) Process) to Step S332 (Fanfare / Intermediate process) with process No. 3, to Step S333 (Process with big winning opening open) with Process No. 4, to step S334 (Far prize mouth remaining ball process) with Process No. 5 The process number 6 to step S 335 (big hit end process), the process number 7 to step S 336 (small hit fanfare medium process), the process number 8 to step S 337 (small hit middle process), the process number 9 step S 338 ( The processing proceeds to small hit residual ball processing) and proceeds to step S339 (small hit end processing) with the processing number 10. The customer waiting state (during demo) is the process number 0.

The specific contents of each process executed by the subroutine call in the process number are as follows.
In step S329 (special figure normal processing), when the number of special figure reservations (number of special figure start memories reserved with special figure variation display game unexecuted) is zero and the special figure variation display game is not being executed, A process for displaying the waiting state on the display device 41 is performed. Further, in the special view normal processing, processing for starting the next special view variation display game (special view variation start processing) is performed. In this special view fluctuation start process, the start memory of special view 1 and special view 2 is monitored, and if there is any special view start storage, the corresponding change display (first or second change display) is started. Setting (setting of a variation pattern command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300, etc.) is executed, and the process number is set to 1, and the process returns. When the number of special drawing reservations is zero and the next special drawing variation display game is not executed, the process returns as it is (the processing number remains 0).

Next, in step S330 (special process during fluctuation processing), processing for fluctuating and displaying the special view is performed until the fluctuation time set in the special view fluctuation start process has elapsed. Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, a process of transmitting a command (pattern stop command) for stopping the symbol of the special figure to the effect control device 300 is executed, and the process number is returned as 2.
Further, in step S331 (processing during special image display), processing for displaying the variation display result of the special image for a predetermined time (1 second to 2 seconds) is performed. In addition, if the game result of the special view fluctuation display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit, the setting of the fanfare time according to the big winning opening opening pattern of each big hit, processing during fanfare / interval And other necessary information to do the If it is a big hit, the processing number is 3, and if it is a small hit, the processing number is 7, and if it is out, the processing number is returned as 0.

Next, in step S332 (fanfare / interval process), a fanfare process for outputting a fanfare sound or the like from the speaker 12a or the like immediately after the big hit is performed, and an interval period is displayed in the big hit interval period. Interval processing is executed, and the processing number is set to 4 at the timing when opening the special winning opening of the variable winning device 27 is started. Also, here, the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening and the updating of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the special winning opening opening process, and the like are performed.
Next, step S 333 (processing during big winning opening opening) is processing while the big winning opening 27 a of the fluctuation winning device 27 and the second fluctuation winning device 33 are open. In addition, here, while the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the interval command, the processing which sets the ending command when it is the final round, the setting of the information necessary to do the big winning a prize opening ball processing etc is done . When the special winning opening is ended, the processing number is set to 5.

Next, in step S334 (big winning opening residual ball processing), processing to set the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, or to perform big hit termination processing if the big hit round is the final round Set necessary information etc. Specifically, for example, processing is performed to wait for a certain period of time in order to reliably count the game balls that have entered the large winning opening 27a of the variable winning device 27 during the end of the large winning opening opening, and after this predetermined time has elapsed When the big hit round remains, the processing number is set to 3, and when no big hit round remains, the processing number is returned as 6.
Next, in step S335 (big hit end processing), setting of information necessary for performing special processing is performed, etc., the processing number is returned to 0, and the process returns.

Next, in step S336 (small hit fanfare medium processing), setting of the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the small hit middle processing are performed.
Next, in step S337 (small hit / medium hit processing), setting of an ending command, setting of information necessary for performing a small hit remaining ball processing, and the like are performed.

Next, in step S 338 (small hit residual ball processing), processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls that have won in the big winning opening during small hit middle processing, and to perform small hit end processing Set necessary information etc.
Next, in step S339 (small hit termination processing), setting of information necessary for performing special processing is performed, etc., the processing number is returned to 0, and the process returns.

Next, when any of the above processes corresponding to the process number is completed, the process proceeds to step S340, and a table (special drawing for controlling display on special display 1 of special drawing 1 (display of special drawing 1) (1 Variation control table) is prepared, and in the next step S341, control processing (symbol variation control processing) for the variation display of the present special figure 1 is performed.
Next, the process proceeds to step S342, and a table (special figure 2 fluctuation control table) for controlling the display (display of the special figure 2) on the batch display device 35 of special figure 2 is prepared. The control processing (symbol variation control processing) for the variation display of this special figure 2 is performed, and then the process returns.
On the other hand, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" in step S324 (step S324; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step S340 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

  Note that the small hit is a result mode without the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device. The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special view variation display game (big hit symbol stop display). When the condition device is activated, for example, a big hit occurs and it is special as a special motorized role. It means that a specific flag for operating the fluctuation winning device continuously is set (the character continuous operating device is operated). If the condition device does not operate, it means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small hit lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag turned on / off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch turned on / off electrically. In addition, "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is required for continuous operation of a motorized accessory, and the same applies in this specification as well. It may be used as a term that has a meaning.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the starting opening switch monitoring process (step S321) in the above-mentioned special view game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, a winning monitoring table (starting opening 1 winning monitoring table) of the first starting opening (starting winning opening 25) is prepared (step S351), and hard random number acquisition processing (step S352) is performed. It is determined whether or not there is a winning to the first starting opening (step S353).
If it is determined in step S353 that there is no winning on the first starting opening (step S353; N), the process proceeds to step S359, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S353 that there is a winning on the first starting opening (step S353; Y), the special figure time short and medium (during general power support; it does not matter whether it is low probability or high probability) It is determined whether or not (step S354).

When it is determined in step S354 that the special drawing time is not short (step S354; N), the process proceeds to step S357, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S354 that special drawing time is short (step S354; Y), a right-handed command notification command is prepared (step S355), and effect command setting processing (step S356) is performed. . That is, if it is a time saving state, regardless of the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game, a right-handed command notification command is prepared (step S355), and effect command setting processing (step S356) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player does not win the prize unless the player is left hitting the first starting opening (the starting winning opening 25), and does not win the normal fluctuation winning device 26 unless it is hit right. Therefore, in the time saving state, the game state in which the right hitting is more advantageous than the left hitting is advantageous, but there is a win in the first starting opening during the time saving state (that is, the left hitting in the time saving state) In addition, the presentation control device 300 is configured to send a right-handling instruction notification command to the effect control device 300 and perform notification (warning) instructing to perform a right-handling operation. Next, after preparing a table for setting information on suspension by the first start port (start winning port 25) (step S357), the special view start port switch common process (step S358) is performed.

Next, a winning monitoring table (starting opening 2 winning monitoring table) of the second starting opening 26a (normal variation winning device 26) is prepared (step S359), hard random number acquisition processing (step S360) is performed, and the second starting is performed. It is determined whether there is a prize for the mouth (step S361). If it is determined in step S361 that there is no winning on the second starting opening (step S361; N), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S 361 that there is a winning on the second starting opening (step S 361; Y), the normal motorized combination (normal variation winning device 37) is in operation, ie, normal variation If it is determined whether or not the winning device 26 is activated and the gaming ball is in an open state in which winning of the gaming ball is possible (step S362), and it is determined that the ordinary electric role is in operation (Y in step S362), The process proceeds to step S364, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S362 that the ordinary motor-operated combination is not in operation (step S362; N), it is determined whether a common electric charge fraud is occurring (step S363).

  In the determination as to whether or not the common electrical program is in progress, it is determined that the injustice is occurring if the number of incorrect prizes to the normal variation winning device 26 is equal to or more than the number of fraud occurrence determinations (for example, 5). In the case of the present example, the game ball can not be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, when the gaming ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or injustice occurs, and when there is a gaming ball winning in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent winnings. Then, when the number of incorrect winnings thus counted is equal to or more than a predetermined number (upper limit value), it is determined that the fraud is in progress.

  If it is determined in step S 363 that a general electric power fraud is not occurring (step S 363; N), after preparing a table for setting information of suspension by the second starting port 26 a (normal fluctuation winning device 26) (step S 364) The special view starting opening switch common processing (step S365) is performed, and the starting opening switch monitoring processing is ended. If it is determined in step S363 that a general power transmission fraud is occurring (step S363; Y), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated further.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps S352 and S360) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described. As shown in FIG. 24, in the hard random number acquisition process, first, there is no winning information on the starting opening to be monitored among the first starting opening (starting winning opening 25) and the second starting opening 26a (normal variation winning device 26). Are set (step S371), and it is determined whether there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 120 and the start port 2 switch 121 (step S372). Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step S372; N), the hard random number acquisition process is ended. On the other hand, when there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step S372; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step S373), and it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step S374). .

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step S 374; N), that is, if no random number is extracted, the hard random number acquisition processing is ended. If the target random number latch register has latch data (step S374; Y), the extracted big hit random number is loaded and prepared in the monitoring target hard random number latch register (step S375). Then, among the first starting opening (starting winning opening 25) and the second starting opening 26a (normal fluctuation winning device 26), the winning presence information of the starting opening to be monitored is set (step S376), hard random number acquisition processing Finish.
In addition, the extraction value of the big hit random number prepared in step S 375 is used in the special processing starting port switch common processing executed after returning.

[Special figure starting port switch common processing]
Next, the special view starting port switch common processing (steps S358 and S365) in the above-mentioned starting port switch monitoring processing will be described with reference to FIG.
The special view starting port switch common processing is processing that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 120 or the starting port 2 switch 121.

  In the special view starting opening switch common processing, first, information on the number of winnings on the starting opening switch to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 120 and the starting opening 2 switch 121 is sent to the management device outside the gaming machine 1 The start opening signal output number which is the output number is loaded (step S 381), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S 382), and it is determined whether the output number overflows (step S 383). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step S383; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM start opening signal output number area (step S384), and the process proceeds to step S385. On the other hand, when the number of times of output overflows (step S383; Y), the process proceeds to step S385. In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start opening signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the value after updating becomes “0” by +1 updating, and it is determined that the number of times of output overflows. Therefore, in this case, if it is looped by updating and becomes “0”, step S 384 is skipped to save.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of to-be-updated special views (starting storage) corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 120 and the starting opening 2 switch 121 is less than the upper limit (step S385). If the number of to-be-updated special figure reservations is not less than the upper limit (step S 385; N), prepare a starting opening over prize winning command corresponding to the target starting opening switch (step S 399), effect command setting processing (step S 398) To complete the special view starting port switch common processing. In addition, when the number of to-be-updated special figure reservations is less than the upper limit (step S 385; Y), the number of to-be-updated special drawings (number of special figures 1 or number of special figures 2 pending) is updated by +1 Step S386) Save the target starting opening winning flag (step S387). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of start ports to be monitored and the number of special drawing reservations is calculated (step S388), and the big hit random number prepared in step S375 is saved in the big hit random number storage area of RWM ( Step S389). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starting opening switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step S390), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step S391). The extracted value of the jackpot symbol random number prepared in this step S390 is used in the special image reservation information determination process.

Next, it is determined whether it is a prize for the first starting opening (starting winning opening 25) (step S392).
When it is determined in step S392 that it is not a winning to the first starting opening (step S392; N), the process proceeds to step S395.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S392 that the first starting opening has been won (step S392; Y), small hit symbol random numbers are extracted and prepared (step S393), RWM small hit symbols It saves in the random number storage area (step S394). The extracted value of the small hitting symbol random number prepared in this step S393 is used in the special image reservation information determination process.

Next, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step S 395), and the special view holding information determination process (step S 396) is performed.
Then, prepare the decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored and the special drawing reservation number (step S397), perform the rendering command setting process (step S398), and execute the special view starting opening switch common process. finish.

  Here, the game control apparatus 100 (RAM 101C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game balls to the start winning opening 25 and the start winning area (the second start winning opening 26a) of the normal change winning device 26 and extracts the predetermined random number. A start-up winning storage means is provided which stores a predetermined number as an upper limit as a start-up memory which becomes an execution right of the variable display game. In addition, the start winning memory storage means (game control apparatus 100) stores various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball on the first start winning hole (start winning hole 25), with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Are stored, and various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball on the second start winning opening 26a (normal variation winning device 26) are stored as a second start storage with a predetermined number as the upper limit.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, FIG. 26 will be used to explain the special view reserve information determination process (step S 396) in the special view starting opening switch common process described above.
The special view reservation information determination process is a prefetch process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start storage prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game based on the corresponding start storage.

As shown in FIG. 26, first, the starting opening winning flag saved in the special view starting opening switch common process NO step S387 is checked to determine whether it is a winning to the first starting opening (starting opening 25). (Step S401).
If it is determined in step S401 that it is not a winning to the first starting opening (step S401; N), the process proceeds to step S404.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S401 that a winning to the first starting opening is determined (step S401; Y), it is determined whether the special figure time is short (step S402).

When it is determined in step S402 that the special figure time is short (Y in step S402), the special figure hold information determination process is ended.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S402 that the special drawing time is not short (step S402; N), it is determined whether the jackpot is medium or small hit (step S403).
If it is determined in step S403 that the jackpot is in the middle or the small hit (step S403; Y), the special-graph hold information determination process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S403 that the big hit is not in the middle or the small hit (step S403; N), it is determined whether the big hit is based on whether the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value. A big hit determination process (step S404) is performed. Then, if the determination result is a big hit (step S405; Y), set a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting opening switch (step S406), and correspond to the big hit symbol random number prepared in step S390. The stop symbol information is acquired (step S407), and the process proceeds to step S414.

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step S405; N), it is determined whether it is a winning to the first starting opening (starting winning opening 25) (step S408).
If it is determined in step S408 that it is not a winning on the first starting opening (step S408; N), stop symbol information of the disconnection is set (step S413), and the process proceeds to step S414.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S408 that the first starting opening has been won (step S408; Y), whether the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not is the small hit or not A small hit determination process (step S409) to determine whether or not is performed. Then, if the determination result is not a small hit (step S410; N), the stop symbol information of the removal is set (step S413), and the process proceeds to step S414.
On the other hand, if the judgment result is a small hit (step S410; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step S411), and stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step S393 It acquires (step S412), and it transfers to the process of step S414.

  Then, a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the target starting opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step S414), and effect command setting processing is performed (step S415). Next, special figure information setting processing (step S416) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is performed, and variation pattern setting process for setting a variation aspect of the special figure variation display game is performed (step S417).

  After that, a look-ahead fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the first half fluctuation number indicating the first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation number indicating the second half fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern of the special view fluctuation display game is prepared (step S418). (Step S419), the special map hold information determination process is ended. The special figure information setting process in step S416 and the variation pattern setting process in step S417 are the same as the process executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure routine process.

  With the above processing, the prefetch pattern command including the result of the special pattern fluctuation display game based on the start memory of the prefetch target and the prefetch fluctuation pattern command including the information of the fluctuation pattern in the special pattern fluctuation display game based on the start memory are prepared And sent to the effect control device 300. Thereby, the effect control of the result related information (whether or not a big hit or the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is performed before the start timing of the special view fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The player can be notified of the result related information prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game by changing the decoration special view start memory display that can be notified to the device 300, in particular, displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to notify.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start winning memory storage means (game control device 100) before execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether a special result is obtained (Determine whether or not etc.) Make pre-judging means. It should be noted that the time when the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the starting winning combination where the starting memory is generated but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played Good.

[Big winning opening switch monitoring processing]
Next, the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step S322) in the special view game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the opening of the special winning opening (the change winning device 27) is being processed (step S421). If the special winning opening is not being processed (step S421; NO), it is determined whether the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed (step S422).
If the special winning opening residual ball processing is not in progress (step S422; NO), it is determined whether or not the small hit is in progress (step S423).
If the small hitting medium is not being processed (step S423; NO), it is determined whether the small hitting remaining ball processing is being performed (step S424). If the small hit residual ball processing is not in progress (step S424; NO), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended.

If the special winning opening is being processed (step S421; YES), if the special winning opening residual ball processing is being performed (step S422; YES), if the small hitting middle processing is being performed (step S423; YES) If the small ball remaining ball processing is being performed (step S424; YES), the process proceeds to step S425.
Here, each determination in steps S421 to S424 is checked by the value of the special figure game processing number. Since the processing number does not shift next until the special view game processing timer reaches 0, the progress of the game can be checked.

Next, 0 is set in the winning counter for counting the number of winning prizes for the special winning opening added in the current special winning opening switch monitoring process (step S425). The winning counter is a counter provided for counting the balls entered in the opening of one round of the special winning opening and adding it to the special winning opening count number in the process of step S437 described later.
Next, it is determined whether there is an input on the special winning opening switch 1 (one big winning opening switch 124) (step S426).

When there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (step S426; YES), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step S427), effect command setting processing (step S428) is performed, and the winning counter is updated by +1 ( The process proceeds to step S430). If there is no input on the special winning opening switch 1 (step S425; NO), the process proceeds to step S430.
In step 430, it is determined whether there is an input on the special winning opening switch 2 (the other special winning opening switch 124) (step S430). When there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (step S430; YES), prepare a special winning opening count command (step S431), perform effect command setting processing (step S432), and update the winning counter by +1 (step In step S433, the process proceeds to step S434. If there is no input on the special winning opening switch 2 (step S430; NO), the process proceeds to step S434.

  In step 434, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step S434). If the value of the winning counter is not 0 (step S434; NO), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening residual ball processing is in progress (step S435). If the special winning opening residual ball processing is not in progress (step S435; NO), it is determined whether the small hit residual ball processing is in progress (step S436). If the small hit residual ball processing is not in progress (step S436; NO), the value of the winning counter is added to the large winning opening count number (step S437). In this case, a command indicating that a prize has been won is sent to the payout control device 200 at the time of winning of the ball to the special winning opening and counted by the prize counter (steps S429 and S433). In the step S437, the special winning opening count number is added. Here, for the special winning opening switch 1 or the special winning opening switch 2, the value of the winning counter is added to the special winning opening count number.

On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter is 0 (step S434; YES), if the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step S435; YES), and if the small hitting remaining ball processing is in progress (step S436; YES). ), End the special winning opening switch monitoring processing.
Next, after passing through step S437, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening count number is equal to or more than the upper limit (corresponding to the number of gaming balls that can be won in one round: for example 9) (step S438).

When the special winning opening count is not equal to or more than the upper limit (step S438; NO), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. If the special winning opening count is equal to or higher than the upper limit (step S438; YES), the special winning opening count is limited to the upper limit (step S439), and the special view game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step S440) It is determined whether the small hit is being processed (step S441).
When the small hitting medium is not being processed (step S441; NO), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. If the small hit is being processed (step S441; YES), the value of the small hit open operation end is saved in the large winning opening control pointer area (step S442), and the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. As a result, the special winning opening is closed and one round is completed.

[Special figure usual processing]
Next, the details of the special view routine processing (step S329) in the special view game processing described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special view routine processing, first, it is checked whether the number of special view 2 reservations (second start memory number) is 0 (step S461).
If it is determined that the special figure 2 pending number is 0 (step S461; YES), it is determined whether the special figure 1 pending number (first start storage number) is 0 (step S466). Then, if it is determined that the special drawing 1 reservation number is 0 (step S466; YES), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo is started (step S471), and the customer waiting demo is not started (step S471; (NO) saves the waiting for customer demonstration flag in the waiting for customer demonstration flag area (step S472).

  Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step S 473), rendering command setting processing (step S 474) is performed, special processing routine processing transition setting processing 1 (step S 475) is performed, and special processing routine processing is ended. . On the other hand, when the customer waiting demo has been started in step S471 (step S471; YES), the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 1 (step S475) is performed, and the special figure ordinary process is ended. The details of the special view ordinary processing shift setting process 1 (step S475) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 reservation number is not "0" in step S461 (step S461; NO), special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S462) is performed, and the decorative special drawing corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number is performed. A reserve number command is prepared (step S463), and effect command setting processing (step S464) is performed. Then, the processing for setting transition to special processing during special drawing 2 of special drawing 2 (step S465) is performed, and the special drawing routine processing is ended.
Also, if the special drawing 1 reservation number is not "0" at step S466 (step S466; NO), the special drawing 1 fluctuation start process (step S467) is performed, and the decorative special drawing corresponding to the special drawing 1 reservation number A reserve number command is prepared (step S468), and effect command setting processing (step S469) is performed. Then, the processing for setting transition to special processing during special drawing 1 of special drawing 1 (step S470) is performed, and the special drawing routine processing is ended.

  As described above, the special figure 2 change start process is performed when the special figure 2 hold number is not “0” by checking the special figure 2 hold number prior to the special figure 1 check number check. Will be executed. That is, the second special view variation display game is executed with priority over the first special view variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is the variable display based on the first start memory It is a priority control means that is executed prior to the game.

[Special figure normal process shift setting process 1]
Next, the details of the special view routine processing transition setting process 1 (step S475) in the special view routine processing described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step S481, "0" is set as the process number (for example, a table for shifting to the special figure normal process is prepared, and the process number "0" related to the special figure ordinary process is prepared in the table. Is set, and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area in step S482.
Next, in step S483, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared, and in step S484, a flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag region. After passing through step S484, the special figure transition processing transition setting process 1 ends.
Thereby, various data for shifting to the special figure normal processing, for example, the processing number "0" related to the special figure ordinary processing is set, and the flag (big prize opening fraud monitoring information) defining the special winning opening fraud monitoring period Processing for setting is performed.

[Special figure 1 change start processing]
Next, the details of the special view 1 fluctuation start process (step S 467) in the special view normal process described above will be described with reference to the left side of FIG.
The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, first, the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here 1) The special figure 1 variation flag is saved in the variation symbol discrimination area (step S491), and the big hit flag 1 is shifted information or big hit for determining whether the first special figure variation display game is a big hit or not A big hit flag 1 setting process (step S492) for setting information is performed. The details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process in step S 492 will be described later.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step S493) according to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (pattern information), the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. An information setting process (step S494) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special drawing fluctuation display game is set. (Step S495). Thereafter, the variation pattern setting process (step S 496) for setting the variation pattern which is the variation aspect in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting information of variation start of the first special figure variation display game (Step S497) is performed, and the special view 1 fluctuation start process is ended.
The details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process in step S493, the special figure information setting process in step S494, the variation pattern setting process in step S496, and the variation start information setting process in step S497 will be described later.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step S462) in the above special figure normal process will be described with reference to the right side of FIG.
The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, first, the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here The big hit flag 2 for the special figure 2 fluctuation flag which shows Figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation design distinction territory (step S491a), it is decided whether or not the 2nd special figure fluctuation indicatory game is the big hit The big hit flag 2 setting processing (step S492a) which sets information is done. The details of the big hit flag 2 setting process in step S492a will be described later.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step S493a) according to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (pattern information), the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. An information setting process (step S494a) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special drawing fluctuation display game is set. (Step S495a). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (step S 496 a) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation aspect in the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting process is set for setting information on fluctuation start of the second special figure fluctuation display game (Step S497a) is performed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step S 492) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above will be described from the left side of FIG.
In this big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the small hit flag area (step S501), and the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step S502). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) of RWM and prepared (step S503), the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (Step S504). The one for reserve number is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special drawing start storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the first in the special figure 1). Thereafter, a big hit determination process (step S505) is performed to determine whether the prepared big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not according to whether it is a big hit.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step S505) is a big hit (step S506; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area in which the outlier information is saved in step S502 (step S507). ), The big hit flag 1 setting process is ended. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step S505) is not a big hit (step S506; N), whether or not the prepared big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether it matches the small hit determination value or not Small hit determination processing (step S508) to determine

  Then, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step S508) is a small hit (step S509; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag area in which the outlier information is saved in step S501. (Step S510), the big hit flag 1 setting processing ends. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step S508) is not the small hit (step S509; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed while saving the outlier information in the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. finish. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the first special view variation display game is one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “deterioration”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step S492a) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to the right side of FIG.
In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step S 502 a). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special view 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step S 503 a), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (Step S504a). Thereafter, a big hit determination process (step S505a) is performed to determine whether the prepared big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not according to whether it is a big hit.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step S505a) is a big hit (step S506a; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area in which the outlier information is saved in step S502a (step S507a). ), And the big hit flag 2 setting process ends On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step S505a) is not a big hit (step S506a; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is ended while saving the shift information in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the second special view variation display game is either “big hit” or “losing”.

[Big hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the big hit determination process executed in step S505, step S505 a and the like in the above-described big hit flag 1 setting process and big hit flag 2 setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, at step S511, processing is performed to set a lower limit judgment value for jackpot determination. After that, it is checked in step S512 whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value, that is, the value of the big hit random number read in the steps S503 and S503a is the lower limit value of the hit judgment value of the big hit random number. Check if it is less than.
Note that being a big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit judgment value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is not less than the lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and not more than the upper judgment value which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.
If it is determined in step S512 that the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value, the process branches to step S517, and a deviation (meaning other than a jackpot) is set as the judgment result, and the process returns.

On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not smaller than the lower limit determination value in step S512, the process proceeds to step S513 to determine whether or not the high probability is in progress. This is to determine whether or not the jackpot probability is in a high state by probability fluctuation, that is, whether or not the probability of being hit in the special figure fluctuation display game is a high probability state (probability fluctuation state) It is to judge. If it is in the high probability, in step S514, processing is performed to set the upper limit judgment value for the jackpot determination in the high probability, and then the process proceeds to step S516.
If it is determined in step S513 that the high probability is not in effect, the process branches to step S515, performs processing for setting an upper limit determination value for jackpot determination in low probability, and then proceeds to step S516.
In this way, when the upper limit judgment value during the high probability and the low probability is set, if the value of the target jackpot random number is in the zone between the lower judgment value and the upper judgment value (zone), the jackpot It will be possible to judge.
Therefore, in step S516, it is checked whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (whether the upper limit determination value is exceeded) or not, and it is determined in step S516 that the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S516) If YES, it can be determined that it is not a big hit, so the process proceeds to step S517 to set a gap as a determination result, and returns.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S516 that the value of the target big hit random number is not more than the upper limit judgment value (not exceeding the upper limit judgment value) (step S516; NO), the value of the target big hit random number is the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment. It is determined that the game is a big hit while it is between the values (zone), and a big hit is set as a determination result in step S518, and the process returns.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process executed in step S508 or the like in the above-described big hit flag 1 setting process will be described with reference to FIG. Here, "Step A" is used for the step number.
In this small hit determination process, first, a small hit lower limit judgment value is set, and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is smaller than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A11). In addition, small hit determination is performed using the same random number (big hit random number) as the big hit determination. That is, being a small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit judgment value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is less than the determination value, it is determined that the small hit. Of course, the range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value are set so as not to be covered.

If the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A11; Y), that is, if it is a loss, a hit is set as the judgment result (step A13), and the small hit judgment processing is ended.
If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A11; N), the small hit upper limit judgment value is set and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (Step A12).

If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A12; Y), that is, if it is a loss, a hit is set as the judgment result (step A13), and the small hit judgment processing is ended.
If the value of the big hit random number is not greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A12; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the judgment result (step A14), and the small hit judgment processing is ended. Do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special view 1 stop symbol setting process (step S493) in the special view 1 change start process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In this special view 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step S 521), and if it is a big hit (step S 521; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (number of reservations 1) ) From the jackpot symbol random number is loaded (step S522). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step S523), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step S524). Here, as information defined on the special figure 1 big hit symbol table, there are the following.
· Judgment value of random number (Indicates distribution rate)
Stop symbol number corresponding to the determination value The stop symbol number is to set the stop symbol on the special view display (here, the 7-segment special view 1 display in the collective display device 35).

  Thereafter, the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step S525), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step S526). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on a special view display (here, a special view 1 display) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step S527), and the time shortening determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the time shortening determination is made. The data is saved in the data area (step S528), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step S529). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state. In the case of the present embodiment, the rendering mode shifts in response to a hit, and the transition destination of the rendering mode, which shifts after an end, changes in accordance with the type of the hit symbol (type of big hit symbol or small hit). In addition, if it becomes a specific big hit symbol (for example, 4R probability variation symbol) among the big hit in the special figure 1, depending on whether or not the game state is in a definite change, the transition destination's effect mode will be a definite change definite It is determined whether to shift to a rendering mode in which it is difficult to distinguish whether the rendering mode is a definite variation or not. Then, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step S538).

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step S 521; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag is a small hit (step S 530). If it is a small hit (step S 531; Y), the special figure 1 small hit A small hit symbol random number is loaded from the symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step S531). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step S532), the stop symbol number corresponding to the small hit symbol random number loaded is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step S533).
Thereafter, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step S534), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step S535). Then, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step S538).

  If the small hit flag is not a small hit (step S530; N), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step S536), and the off stop symbol pattern is in the stop symbol pattern area Save (step S537), and prepare a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step S538). For example, there are 11 types of decoration special drawing commands, and the special drawing type in the effect control device 300 can be determined by the difference in this type. By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step S539), and effect command setting processing (step S540) is performed. The decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step S 541), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step S 542). The small hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step S543), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is ended.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
Next, the details of the special view 2 stop symbol setting process (step S493a) in the special view 2 change start process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In this special view 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step S551), and if it is a big hit (step S551; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (number of reservations 1) ) From the jackpot symbol random number is loaded (step S552). Next, a special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step S553), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step S554). Here, the information defined on the special figure 2 big hit symbol table includes the following.
· Judgment value of random number (Indicates distribution rate)
Stop symbol number corresponding to the determination value Further, the stop symbol number is to set the stop symbol on the special view display (here, the special display 2 display of 7 segments in the collective display device 35).

  Thereafter, the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step S555), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step S556). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special view display (here, the special view 2 display 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step S557), and the time shortening determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the time shortening determination is made. The data is saved in the data area (step S558), and the effect mode shift information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step S559). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state. Further, in the case of the present embodiment, in the big hit in the special figure 2, it becomes a dedicated effect mode in which the effect mode of the transfer destination becomes a definite variation determination regardless of which big hit symbol. Then, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step S562).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step S551; N), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step S560), and the off stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area Then, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step S562). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is set.

Thereafter, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step S563),
An effect command setting process (step S564) is performed. The decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step S565), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step S566). 2 Stop symbol setting processing ends.

  That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variation display game as a variation display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start winning opening (starting entry 25), and the second start winning opening 26a (normal variation) The variable display game execution means is configured to execute the second variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the gaming ball in the winning device 26). In addition, the game control device 100 constitutes a variable display game execution control means for controlling the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special map information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting process executed in step S494, step S494a and the like in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the case of this embodiment, the probability state (low / high probability, presence / absence of time reduction) does not affect the distribution of the change, and the effect mode managed by the game control apparatus 100 affects the distribution of the change. In the effect mode, one effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes in accordance with the probability state, the presence or absence of a time saving state, the progress status of the special view variation display game, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 36, in the special view information setting process, first, the former half fluctuation group selection pointer table is set (step S571), and the former half fluctuation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step S572).
Next, the first half variation group selection offset table is set (step S573), and the offset data corresponding to the target special drawing reservation number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step S574).
Next, the former half variation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step S575), and the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 1 area (step S576). As a result, in the variable distribution information 1 area, the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the effect mode is saved. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (the fluctuation mode before the start of reach), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, although depending on the specifications of the model, since the fluctuation time is shortened only when the number of reservations is large, it is only in the case of loss, and as a result, the number of reservations does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuation. The fluctuation group includes a plurality of fluctuation patterns. When determining the fluctuation pattern, first, the fluctuation group is selected, and one fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation groups. ing.

Then, the second half fluctuation group selection pointer table is set (step S577), and the second half fluctuation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step S578).
Then, the second half fluctuation group selection offset table is set (step S579), and the offset data corresponding to the target special drawing reservation number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step S580).
Next, the latter half fluctuation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step S581), the value obtained by the addition is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area (step S582), and the special figure information setting process is ended. As a result, in the variable distribution information 2 area, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the effect mode is saved. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (including the type of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, the reach occurrence rate changes according to the number of reservations only in the case of an outfall (the reach incidence rate decreases when the number of reservations is large). Does not affect

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation pattern setting process executed in step S 496, step S 496 a and the like in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In addition, the fluctuation pattern is the first half fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation aspect from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation which is the fluctuation aspect from the reaching state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game The second half fluctuation pattern is set first, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

  In this variation pattern setting process, first, the variation group selection address table is set (step S591), the address of the second half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step S592). The fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and prepared (step S593). In the present embodiment, the structure of the second-half fluctuation group table is different in structure between a hit and a break. Specifically, it has a 1-byte size for hit and a 2-byte size for release. Since the rate of occurrence per hit is lower than the rate of occurrence of departure and even one byte is sufficient, the footprint is one byte in size from the viewpoint of saving of data capacity. Therefore, the hit time uses only the lower value of the 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1. In addition, the rate of occurrence of outliers is higher than the incidence rate of hits, and in order to make various renditions appear, the size for the removal is 2 bytes.

  Then, it is determined whether the result of the special view variation display game is disapproval (step S594). If it is disapproval (step S594; Y), 2-byte distribution processing (step S595) is performed, and the processing of step S597 is performed. Transfer to processing. If not (step S594; N), the distribution process (step S596) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S597.

  Then, the address of the second half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step S 597), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for holding number 1), Prepare (step S598). Then, distribution processing (step S599) is performed, and the latter half fluctuation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half fluctuation number area (step S600). By this process, the second half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step S601), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (step S602). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step S603), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for holding number 1) (Step S604). Thereafter, distribution processing (step S605) is performed, and the first half fluctuation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first half fluctuation number area (step S606), and the fluctuation pattern setting processing is ended. By this processing, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of a game, from a plurality of patterns.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting process executed in step S497 and step S497a in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the change start information setting process, first, the random number storage area of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step S611). Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step S612), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step S613). Further, the second half fluctuation time value table is set (step S614), and the second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is acquired (step S615).

  Then, the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value are added (step S616), and the addition value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S617). Thereafter, the variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step S618), the variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step S619), and effect command setting processing is performed (step S620). ). Next, the special figure reservation number corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is updated by -1 (step S621), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is set (step S622). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step S623), the free space after the shift is cleared (step S624), and the fluctuation start information setting process is ended.

  Information on the start of the special view variable display game is set by the above process. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a determination means for determining various random number values stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Further, the game control apparatus 100 forms a variation pattern determination unit capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Then, the information on the start of the special view variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information on the start of the special view variation display game. The detailed effect contents in the special figure variation display game are set. As information related to the start of these special view variation display games, an ornament special drawing reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), an ornament special view command including information on stop symbols, variation of the special view variation display game A variation command including information on a pattern and a stop information command including information on extension of a stop time may be mentioned, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special drawing command earlier than the change command, the process in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Process transition setting process during special figure fluctuation (special figure 1)]
Next, the details of the special figure during fluctuation process transition setting process (special figure 1) (step S470) in the special figure normal process described above will be described with reference to the left side of FIG.
When the routine starts, “1” (corresponding to the processing number relating to the special processing being processed) is set as the processing number in step S631, and the processing number (“1” in this case) in the special processing game processing number area in step S632. Save Next, at step S633, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared, and at step S634, a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special view 1 is saved in the test signal output data area. By this step S634, the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal is turned on.
Next, at step S635, the flag during fluctuation is saved in the special view 1 fluctuation control flag area, and at step S636, the special control 1 blink control timer in the special view 1 blink control timer area (display special figure 1 which is an LED segment in the collective display unit 35) Save the initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the timer of the blinking cycle of the unit and end the routine.
In this way, processing is performed to shift to processing during special figure fluctuation regarding special figure 1.

[Process transition setting process during special figure fluctuation (special figure 2)]
Next, the details of the special figure during fluctuation process transition setting process (special figure 2) (step S465) in the special figure normal process described above will be described with reference to the right side of FIG.
When the routine starts, “1” (corresponding to the processing number related to the special processing being processed) is set as the processing number in step S 641, and the processing number (“1” in this case) in the special processing game processing number area in step S 642 Save Next, in step S643, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared, and in step S644, a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area. By this step S644, the special symbol 2 fluctuating signal is turned on.
Subsequently, the flag under the fluctuation is saved in the special view 2 fluctuation control flag area in step S645, and the blinking control timer (the LED segment in the collective display device 35 is displayed in the special display 2 blink control timer area in step S646) Save the initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the timer of the blinking cycle of the unit and end the routine.
In this manner, processing is performed to shift to processing during special figure fluctuation regarding special figure 2.

[Process during special figure change]
Next, the details of the special figure variation in-progress process (step S330) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure changing process, first, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step S651), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S652). In the case of this embodiment, if the stop symbol pattern is a detached symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time, and if the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time, and the stop symbol is If the pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time.
Subsequently, the processing for setting transition to special processing in progress is performed (step S653), and the processing in processing special display is ended. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes stop time setting means for setting the stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Process transition setting process during special map display]
Next, the details of the processing for setting the processing for transition to special images in the processing to change the special images described above (step S653) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, "2" (corresponding to the processing number relating to the special processing being displayed) is set as the processing number in step S661, and the processing number ("2" in this case) in the special figure game processing number area in step S662. Save Then, save the signal related to the special view 1 fluctuation end process in the test signal output data area in step S663 (ie, turn off the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal during the special symbol 1), and test the signal related to the special figure 2 fluctuation end process in step S664. Save to the output data area (ie, turn off the signal during special symbol 2 fluctuation).
Next, in step S665, the control timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the symbol determination number signal control timer area. Thereafter, in step S666, the special figure 1 indicator in the special view 1 variation control flag area (special figure 1 indicator which is the LED segment in the collective display unit 35) is used as information for controlling the special view 1 variation display game. In the step S667, the stop flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area, and the routine is ended.
In this manner, processing is performed to shift to processing during special image display.

[Process while displaying special map]
Next, details of the special figure display process (step S331) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS.
In the special figure display process, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step S 681), and the small hit flag area of RWM is cleared (step S682) is performed.
Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process are loaded (Step S683) A process of clearing the big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM is performed (step S684). Then, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 loaded is a big hit (step S 685), and when it is determined that it is a big hit (step S 685; Y), the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the second special view fluctuation display game Save the test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the character continuous operation device operating signal is ON, and the special symbol 2 signal is ON) in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step S688), A round number upper limit table is set (step S689).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S685 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit as a result of checking the big hit flag 2 (step S685; N), it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step S686) and it is a big hit (step S686). S686; Y) If it is determined that the test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special view fluctuation display game (for example, the condition device operating signal ON, the bonus continuous operation device operating signal ON, The special symbol 1 signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (step S687), and a process of setting the round number upper limit table (step S689) is performed.

  After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step S689), the round number upper limit ("16" or "4" in this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired, and the RWM is acquired. The number of rounds is saved in the upper limit area of the number of rounds (step S690). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step S691).

  Next, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area of the RWM, prepared (step S692), and effect command setting processing (step S693) is performed. After that, a probability information command is prepared according to the information that makes the probability of becoming a hit result in the common drawing fluctuation display game and the special drawing fluctuation display game a normal probability state (low probability state) (step S694). (Step S695) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special view 1 or special view 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step S696), and the effect command setting process (step S696) Perform S697).

Next, save the large winning opening opening information representing the jackpot pattern and a signal corresponding to the probability of being hit in the regular drawing variation display game and the special drawing variation display game in the external information output data area of the RWM ( Step S698). In the case of the present embodiment, in step S698, the big hit 2 signal and the big hit 3 signal are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the big winning opening opening information and the probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is decided by the state of the special winning opening opening information and the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is ON if the big hit with popped out (big winning opening open information is other than the big winning opening opened information 1) ON, a big hit without popping out (so-called, 確 certain big hit etc. If the information is a large winning opening opening information 1), it will be ON if it is a big hit in the time saving state, and it will be OFF otherwise.
In addition, the jackpot 3 signal is ON when the jackpot is a jackpot with some balls, and is OFF when the jackpot is a jackpot without balls.
The special winning opening open information will be described later in the description of the fanfare / during interval process.

  After that, the big hit opening information and the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 4700 ms, 7700 ms or 300 ms) corresponding to the probability of being hit in the common view change display game and the special view change display game The setting is made (step S699), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S700). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step S701). As a result, information on the probability state and the time saving state of the special view when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

  Then, the large winning a prize opening fraud winning number area of the special winning a prize opening (the special fluctuation winning a prize device 27) which corresponds to the special winning a prize opening opening information is cleared (step S702) The fraud monitoring out-of-period flag is saved in the mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step S703). Thereafter, fanfare / interval process shift setting process 1 (step S704) is performed, and the special figure display process is ended.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit in step S686 (step S686; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step S725).
If it is determined in step S725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step S725; Y), the high probability change number updating process (step S726), the effect mode information check process related to setting of the effect mode (step S727) ) Is performed to determine whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step S728).

If it is determined in step S728 that the special drawing high probability is not found (step S728; N), the decoration special drawing command is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area and prepared (step S729), and the effect command setting The process (step S730) is performed. Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step S731), an effect command setting process (step S732) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S733.
If it is determined in step S728 that the high probability of the special view is being reached (step S728; Y), the process proceeds to step S733. As described above, in the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special view variation display game is the high probability state, the large winning opening is opened by the occurrence of the small hit, but the occurrence of the small hit is played In order not to make the person conscious, the screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step S733). Thereafter, the small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process 1 (step S734) is performed, and the special figure display process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step S725; N), the high probability change number updating process (step S735), the effect mode information check process related to setting of the effect mode (step S725) S736) is performed to set the switching preparation remaining rotation number corresponding to the rendering mode number (step S737), and it is determined whether the rendering remaining rotation number coincides with the switching preparation remaining rotation number (step S738). Note that the switching preparation remaining rotational speed may be a different value (rotational speed) in all the rendering modes of the plurality of rendering modes, or the same value in any of the rendering modes of the plurality of rendering modes (Number of rotations) may be used, or the same value (number of rotations) may be used in all of the effect modes among the plurality of effect modes.
If it is determined in step S738 that the effect remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed do not match (step S738; N), special figure normal processing shift setting process 1 (step S741) is performed, and the special view is displayed. Finish the middle process.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S738 that the effect remaining rotation number and the switch preparation remaining rotation number match (step S738; Y), a effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step S739), and the effect command setting is made. After the processing (step S740) is performed, special processing shift processing setting processing 1 (step S741) is performed, and the processing of displaying the special drawing is ended. The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading effect from being performed several revolutions before the effect mode is switched, and the effect mode switching preparation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 to cross the mode. So that there is no contradiction.

[High probability change frequency update processing]
Next, the details of the high probability variation count updating process executed in step S 726 and step S 735 in the above-mentioned special figure display process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the high probability change number updating process, it is determined whether the special figure high probability is in the middle (the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is in the high probability) (step S751). End the update process.
On the other hand, if the special figure high probability is in progress (step S 751; Y), the high probability fluctuation number is updated by −1 (step S 752), and it is determined whether the high probability fluctuation number is “0” (step S 753). The high probability variation number means the number of times the special feature variation display game is played in the special feature high probability (that is, in the probability variation mode) (special feature number of revolutions during special feature probability variation). The high probability change frequency is set to an initial value (for example, 100 times) in the jackpot end setting processing 1 and 2 described later.
If the high probability fluctuation number is not “0” (step S 753; N), the high probability fluctuation number updating process is ended.

If the high probability fluctuation number is “0” (step S 753; Y), the high probability notification flag area is cleared (step S 754), and a signal related to high probability end is saved in the external information output data area (step S 755). Do. In this step S755, specifically, the jackpot 2 signal is turned off.
Next, a signal regarding the end of the high probability & short time is saved in the test signal output data area (step S756). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is off, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is off, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is off, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal is off, the normal symbol 1 high probability The state signal is turned off, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned off, and the normal electric character 1 open extension state signal is turned off. In the high probability mode, there are a state of "high probability & time short" (with special charge high probability with general support) and "high probability & short time without" (with special height symbol with no general support).

Subsequently, save the number with no time saving in the gaming state display number area (step S757), save the general drawing low probability & time saving none flag in the regular drawing game mode flag area (step S758), and select the special drawing game mode flag area. The special figure low probability & time saving none flag is saved (step S759), and a signal relating to the left-handed command (the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step S760).
Thereafter, in order to turn off the display LED in the right strike, the number in the left strike state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step S761), and the high probability change frequency update process is ended.

  By the above high probability change frequency update process, high probability change frequency update (update that reduces the high probability change frequency by 1 each time the special figure change display game is performed) is performed, and the high probability change frequency becomes “0”. Various settings for ending the definite change mode are performed. Therefore, the special figure probability change ends when the special figure turns, for example, 100 times without the occurrence of a big hit, and the general electric power support (common time / short) performed at the same time as the special figure probability change ends with the special figure probability change. However, the probability change mode ends at that point if a big hit occurs. In addition, as can be understood from the high probability change number of times updating process, switching of the gaming state of the special figure (at least switching of the state of the big hit probability of the special figure), and switching of the gaming state of the common figure In the present embodiment, the switching between the state in which the normal voltage support is not performed and the state in which the normal voltage support is not performed is performed in conjunction with each other.

[Demonstration mode information check processing]
Next, the details of the effect mode information check process executed in step S 727 and step S 736 in the above-described process of displaying a special figure will be described with reference to FIG.
In the effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether the next mode shift information is a code without update (step S771). If the next mode shift information is the no update code (step S771; YES), the effect mode information check process is ended. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of special view variation display games that have been executed. For example, in the high probability state, the effect mode to continue until the next big hit is selected. is there.

  If the next mode transition information is not a no update code (step S771; NO), the effect remaining rotation number, which is the number of executable times of the special view variation display game up to the change of the effect mode, is updated by -1 (step S772). Then, it is determined whether the effect remaining number of revolutions has become 0 (step S773). If the effect remaining number of rotations becomes "0" (step S773; YES), that is, if the effect mode is to be changed from the next special image variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step S774), and the next The address of the table corresponding to the mode transition information is acquired (step S775).

Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area of the RWM (step S776), and the effect residual rotation number of the new effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect remaining rotational speed region Then, the next mode shift information of the effect mode to be shifted is acquired and saved in the next mode shift information area (step S778).
Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the new effect mode number is prepared (step S779), and it is determined whether the prepared command is the same as the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step S780). If the prepared command is the same as the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step S780; Y), the effect mode information check process is ended. This is to prevent the command from being sent to the effect control device 300 if the state of probability does not change, and to simplify the operation.

On the other hand, if the prepared command is not the same as the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step S780; N), the command prepared in step S779 is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step S781). A setting process (step S782) is performed, and an effect rotation number command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation number (the effect remaining rotation number newly set in step S777) of the new effect mode to shift is prepared (step S783). A command setting process (step S784) is performed.
Next, following step S784, a high probability change number command corresponding to the high probability change number (step S726, updated as necessary in the high probability change number update process performed in step S735) is prepared (step S785), effect command setting processing (step S786) is performed, and it is determined whether the new effect mode is a mode to hit left (step S787). If the new effect mode is not the mode to hit the left (step S 787; N), the effect mode information check process is ended.

Then, if the new effect mode is a mode for left hitting (step S 787; Y), a left hitting instruction notification command is prepared (step S 788), effect command setting processing (step S 789) is performed, and effect mode information End the check process.
As described above, by managing the effect mode in the game control apparatus 100, for example, control such as generating a specific reach can be performed only in a specific effect mode, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Fanfare / Intermediate process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / inter-interval process shift setting process 1 (step S704) in the above-described process of displaying the special view will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, "3" (corresponding to the processing number related to fanfare / in-interval processing) is set as the processing number in step S801, and the processing number (here "3") in the special figure game processing number area in step S802. Save Next, in step S803, the signal regarding the start of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area, and in step S804, the signal regarding the high probability & end of time saving is saved in the test signal output data area.
Here, in step S803, specifically, the big hit 1 signal (big hit + signal turned on at small hit) is turned on, and the big hit 4 signal (signal turned on at big hit) is turned on. Also, in step S804, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is off, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is off, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is off, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal is off, the normal symbol (1) The high probability state signal is turned off, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned off, and the ordinary electric character 1 open extension state signal is turned off. During the big hit (during special game state), the special view is in the normal state (not in the high probability mode), and the normal power support is not performed (the normal view is also in the normal state).

Next, in step S805, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special gaming state is cleared, and in the subsequent step S806, the game state display number area is saved with the low probability number (number without time saving). Then, in step S807, the common drawing low probability & time short not present (without common charge support) flag is saved in the common drawing game mode flag area.
Next, in step S808, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared, and in step S809 the high probability notification flag area is cleared in order to turn off the gaming state display LED related to the display of the high probability state. The special figure low probability & time saving none flag is saved in the area, and in step S811, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power recovery. Next, in step S812, the high probability change number area for managing the number of special figure change display games executable in the high probability mode is cleared. Thereby, the high probability state and the short time state are ended, and the normal probability state and the normal operation state are obtained. That is, since this fanfare / interval transfer processing setting process 1 is a process executed by the occurrence of a big hit, if it is a high probability mode in which the big hit probability of the special figure is made high before the big hit occurs, the big hit occurs. This high probability mode ends, and the game state of the special figure returns to the normal state (low probability state). In conjunction with this, if it is in a state where generalization support such as time reduction of generalization is performed (generalization support state), this general movement support is also ended by the occurrence of a big hit, and the generalization gaming state is It returns to the normal state (the state where the normal power support is not performed).

Thereafter, the effect mode 1 number is saved in the effect mode number area (step S813), and the effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step S814). Since this manages the effect mode in the game control apparatus 100 (main board), it is cleared once.
Next, the no-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step S815), and a signal related to a right-handed instruction (fire position designation signal 1 is on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step S816). The number in the right-handed state is saved in the number 2 area (step S 817), and the fanfare / interval processing shift setting process 1 is ended. As a result, the information on the effect mode is once cleared (that is, it becomes the initial value of the default state) along with the occurrence of the special gaming state.
Step S817 is a process for lighting the display LED during the right strike.

[Small hit fanfare medium processing transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process 1 (step S734) in the special figure display process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, "7" (corresponding to the processing number related to the small hitting fanfare middle processing) is set as the processing number in step S831, and the processing number (here, "7") in the special figure game processing number area in step S832. Save Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special pattern game processing timer area in step S833, and the signal related to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area in step S834. Save the signal regarding the start of the small hit in the test signal output data area.
Here, in step S834, specifically, one big hit signal (big hit + small hit output) is turned on. In step S835, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is turned on.

Subsequently, the large winning a prize opening illegal prize number area is cleared in step S836, a fraud monitoring out of time flag is saved in a large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area in step S837, The signal 1 is saved in the test signal output data area, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area in step S839, and the small hit fanfare in-progress processing shift setting process 1 is ended.
By the above processing, various settings are made when a small hit occurs. Step S839 is a process for lighting the display LED during the right strike.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Next, the details of the fanfare / in-interval process (step S332) in the above-described special view game process will be described with reference to FIG. After that, use "Step A" as the step number.
In the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special game state (big hit state) is updated by +1 (step A31), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state is prepared (step A32). The setting process (step A33) is performed.

Thereafter, the special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A34), the release switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening information is obtained (step A35), and the number of rounds of the special gaming state to be started is obtained. It is determined whether it is larger than the release switching determination value (step A36).
Here, the special winning opening operation determination table has a configuration shown, for example, in the middle of FIG. 48, and is an open switching determination value (round number corresponding to the special winning opening opening information, “0” in the example of FIG. 16 "," 4 ", etc.) are set in the data table. The opening switching determination value is a value indicating the number of rounds to be switched from long opening (long opening) to short opening (opening for a short time from long opening) for opening the special winning opening, and from the switching determination value (round number) Perform an opening operation that is long open before and short open thereafter.

Then, when the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (step A36; Y), the special opening game opening time for short opening (0.2 seconds in this embodiment) is set as the special figure game processing timer area. After saving (step A37), the process proceeds to step A39.
Also, when the number of rounds is not larger than the release switching determination value (step A36; N), the special opening game opening time for long opening (29 seconds in this embodiment) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then (step A38), the process proceeds to step A39.
In step A39, the special winning opening open processing transition processing setting process (step A39) is performed, and the fanfare / interval middle processing ends.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 48, as a big hit pattern, (1) 4R, big winning opening opening information 1 (all short opening), (2) 16R, large winning opening opening information 2 (All open long), (3) 16R, big winning opening open information 3 (1 to 4 R is long open, 5-16 R is short open), (4) 4 R, big winning opening open information 4 (all long open), (5) 16R, large winning opening opening information 5 (all long opening), (6) 16R, large winning opening opening information 6 (1 to 8 R is long opening, 9 to 16 R is short opening), (7) 16 R, large The winning opening opening information 7 (1 to 4 R is long opening, 5 to 16 R is short opening) is set.

Therefore, as shown in the middle row of FIG. 48, the special winning opening operation determination table includes the special winning opening opening information 1 data and the opening switching determination value “0”, the special winning opening opening information 2 data and the opening switching determination value "16", the special winning opening information 3 data and the opening switching determination value "4", the special opening opening information 4 data and the opening switching determination value "4", the special opening opening information 5 data The opening switching determination value "16", the big winning opening opening information 6 data and the opening switching determination value "8" are stored in association with the winning opening opening information 7 data and the opening switching determination value "4". ing. Then, while the number of rounds is equal to or less than the open switching determination value, the open operation is performed such that the open operation is short open when the number of rounds exceeds the open switching determination value.
The special winning opening open information is information indicating which of various kinds of big hit patterns as described above, and is set in step S698 of the processing during the above-described special view display.

[A special winning opening open process processing transition setting process]
Next, the details of the special winning opening open processing transition setting processing (step A39) in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special winning opening open processing transition setting process, first, set the processing number to "4" for the special winning opening opening processing (step A41), and save this processing number in the special figure game processing number area ( Step A42). After that, save the signal related to the opening start of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric combination 1 operation signal ON) in the test signal output data area (step A43) and store the number of winnings to the special winning opening The information on the mouth count area (i.e., the winning opening count) is cleared (step A44). Then, the on data of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 27) is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A45), and the special winning opening open processing transition setting processing is ended.

[Big winning opening open processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening open process (step S333) in the special view game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special winning opening open process, first, the current round number in the special gaming state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value of the RWM round number upper limit area to determine whether the current round is the final round (Step A61). Then, if it is not the final round (step A61; N), set the special winning opening operation determination table (step A62), obtain the opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information (step A63), It is determined whether the number of rounds is larger than the acquired release switching determination value (step A64).

Then, if the number of rounds is larger than the release switching determination value (step A 64; Y), the remaining figure processing time (for short closing) (in the case of this embodiment, 1.4 seconds) Save (step A65), prepare an interval command relating to an interval between rounds (step A66), and shift to processing of step A67.
In addition, when the number of rounds is not larger than the release switching determination value (step A64; N), the remaining figure processing time (for long closing) (1.9 seconds in this embodiment) is a special drawing game processing timer area (Step A71), prepare an interval command related to the interval between rounds (step A66), and shift to the processing of step A67.

On the other hand, if it is the final round (step A61; Y), save the remaining ball processing time (for the final) (1.9 seconds in the case of this embodiment) in the special figure game processing timer area (step A69) An ending command relating to the end of the jackpot state is prepared (step A70), and the process proceeds to step A67.
And if it transfers to step A67, the production command setting processing (step A67) is performed in order to transmit the prepared command, the special winning opening residual ball processing shift setting processing (step A68) is performed, and the special winning opening is open processing Finish.

[Large winning hole remaining ball processing shift setting processing]
Next, details of the special winning opening residual ball processing shift setting process (step A68) in the above-mentioned special winning opening open processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special winning opening residual ball processing shift setting process, first, the processing number is set to "5" for the special winning opening residual ball processing (step A81), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area ( Step A82). Thereafter, the off data for turning off the big winning opening solenoid 133 is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area in order to close the opening / closing member 27b of the variable winning device 27 (step A83). Processing transition setting processing is ended.

[Big win mouth remaining ball processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening remaining ball processing (step S334) in the special drawing game processing described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special winning opening ball game processing, first, the current round reached the upper limit value by comparing the current round number in the special gaming state under execution with the round number upper limit value of the round number upper limit value region of RWM (final It is checked whether it is a round) (step A101).
Then, when the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step A101; NO), the special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A102), and the opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is acquired (Step A22), an interval time (normal) (for example, 0.1 second) is set (step A104), and it is determined whether the current number of rounds is larger than the acquired release switching determination value (step A105).

Then, when the number of rounds is not larger than the acquired open switching determination value (step A105; N), it is determined whether the special winning opening open information is a rank down effect type (step A106), and the number of rounds is When it is larger than the acquired open switching determination value (step A105; Y), the process proceeds to step A109.
Here, the value of the rank down effect system means large winning opening opening information (large winning opening opening information 3, 6, 7 in the lower part of FIG. 48) corresponding to a big hit pattern switching from a middle round to short opening. .

If the special winning opening information is a rank down effect value (step A106; Y), it is determined whether the number of rounds is a special effect round value (for example, 2R, 4R, 8R) (step A107), If the special winning opening information is not a rank down effect value (step A106; N), the process proceeds to step A109.
Then, if the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (step A107; Y), an interval time (rank down effect) (for example, 3.6 seconds) is set (step A108), and the process proceeds to step A109. On the other hand, when the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A107; N), the process proceeds to step A109.

Next, when the process proceeds to step A109, the set interval time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A108), fanfare / in-interval process transition setting process 2 (step A110) is performed, and the special winning opening remains. End the ball processing.
Here, when the step A108 is executed, the setting of the previous step A104 is canceled, so that it is before the opening switching (switching from long opening to short opening) when it is not the final round, If the special winning opening information is a rank down effect value (step A106; Y) and the number of rounds is a special effect round value (step A107; Y), the interval time saved in step A109 is the interval time (Rank down effect). Thereby, the time which can implement | achieve the rank down production just before open switching (switching from long open to short open) is set.
In addition, even when it is not the final round, it is after opening switching (switching from long opening to short opening), whether the special winning opening opening information is not a rank down effect system value (step A106; N), or the number of rounds If it is not the value of the special effect round (step A107; Y), the interval time saved in step A109 is the interval time (normal) set in step A104. Also, in the case of the final round, there is no interval period (period between rounds), so there is no need to save the interval time.

On the other hand, when the current round is the final round (step A101; Y), the game mode flag (saved in step S701) is stored from the special figure game mode flag save area storing the probability state when the special result is derived. Data) (step A111). Then, the loaded flag, the special winning opening open information, and the ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern are set (step A112), and the set ending time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area ( Step A113) The big hit end processing shift setting processing (step A114) is performed, and the big winning opening remaining ball processing is ended.
As described above, the ending time is set based on the stop symbol information, the big winning opening opening information, and the big hit game mode flag.

The ending time is not limited to the above. For example, the ending time may be set based on the big winning opening information and the big hit game mode flag instead of the symbol information.
In addition, the period from the end of the last round to the end of the special gaming state (big hit state) (this may be called the ending period) is the winning hole remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) from the end of the last round. ), And a period (e.g., 3.8 seconds in total) until an ending time (e.g., 1.9 seconds) elapses from the elapsing of the special winning opening residual ball processing time. Then, in a period (sometimes referred to as an ending period) in which the ending time and the special winning opening residual ball processing time are combined, an ending effect can be made with the display device 41 or the like.

[Fanfare / Intermediate process transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing shift setting process 2 (step A110) in the above-mentioned special winning opening residual ball process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing 2, first, the processing number relating to the fanfare / interval processing is set (step A211), and this processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A212).
Next, save the signal related to the open end of the special winning opening (the variable winning device 27) (the special electric combination 1 operating signal is off) in the test signal output data area (step A213), and set the fanfare / interval processing transition End processing 2.

[Big hit end processing shift setting processing]
Next, the details of the big hit end process shift setting process (step A114) in the above-mentioned special winning opening residual ball process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the big hit end process shift setting process, first, "6" is set as a process number related to the big hit end process (step A221), and this process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A222). Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of the special winning opening open (signal during special electric combination 1 operation is off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A223).

  Next, clear the information on the large winning opening count number area storing the winning number to the special winning opening (step A224), clear the information on the round number area storing the round number of the special gaming state (step A225) ), Clears the information of the round number upper limit area storing the upper limit value of the round number of the special gaming state (step A226). Then, clear the information of the round number upper limit value information area storing the flag for upper limit value determination of the round number (step A227), and the large winning opening opening information area storing the flag for opening information determination of the special winning opening The information is cleared (step A228), and the big hit end process shift setting process is ended.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, the details of the big hit end process (step S335) in the special view game process described above will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
In this big hit end process, first, it is determined whether the time shortening determination data is time saving operation data (that is, whether there is a short time when general support is performed) (step A241). In the present embodiment, since 100% certainty changes after the big hit end (the special figure always becomes the definite change mode after the big hit end), it is not necessary to determine whether the special figure is in the high probability state.
Then, if it is not the time saving operation data (step A241; N), the big hit end setting process 1 is performed (step A 242), and if it is the time reducing operation data (step A241; Y), the big hit end setting process 2 is performed (step A243). After passing through step A243 or step A242, the effect mode information address table is set (step A244), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the start of fluctuation (at the time of stop symbol setting) is obtained ( Step A245).

  Next, as a process of saving information necessary for managing the effect mode in the game control apparatus 100, first, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (Step A246). Furthermore, the effect mode rotational speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired, saved in the effect remaining speed area (step A 247), and the next mode of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state The transition information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A248).

  Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the rendering mode number is prepared (step A249), the command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A250), and rendering command setting processing (step A251) is performed. Here, as the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands including information of any of “high probability, time reduction” and “high probability, no time reduction” and information of the rendering mode. In the case of the present embodiment, when the big hit is over, it becomes a definite change state (so-called ST state). Therefore, as a probability information command, "high probability · time short · presentation mode A", "high probability · time short · presentation mode B" There are "High probability · Time reduction · Reproduction mode C" and "High probability · Time reduction none · Reproduction mode A", which are not used in this process, but others are "Low probability · Time reduction none · Reproduction mode A", " There are low probability, no time saving, rendering mode B, and "low probability, no time saving, rendering mode C".

Next, an effect rotation number command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation number is prepared (step A 252), and effect command setting processing (step A 253) is performed.
Next, a high probability change frequency command corresponding to the high probability change frequency is prepared (step A254), a rendering command setting process (step A255) is performed, and it is determined whether a short time condition occurs after the big hit end (step A256) .
When the time saving state occurs after the big hit end (step A256; Y), the special view normal process shift setting process 2 is performed (step A259), and the big hit end process is ended.
In addition, when the time saving state does not occur after the big hit end (step A256; N), the left hitting indication notification command is prepared (step A257), after performing the production command setting processing (step A258), it moves special processing usually processing The setting process 2 is performed (step A259), and the big hit end process is ended.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
Next, the details of the big hit end setting process 1 (step A 242) in the above-mentioned big hit end process will be described with reference to the left side of FIG.
In this big hit end setting process 1, first, a signal related to no time saving state (for example, big hit 2 signal OFF) is saved in the external information output data area (step A271), a signal regarding the start of the high probability state and the no time saving state (For example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, the normal symbol 1 high probability The state signal is turned off, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned off, and the ordinary electric character 1 open extension state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A272).

  Next, save the number with no time saving state in the gaming state display number area (step A 273), save the general drawing low probability & time saving none flag in the regular drawing game mode flag area (step A 274), and select the special drawing game mode. The special figure height probability & time saving none flag is saved in the flag area (step A 275). Thereafter, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability variation frequency area (step A 276), and the signal related to leftward pointing (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A277) In order to turn off the right hitting display LED, the number in the left hitting state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A278), and the big hit end setting process 1 is ended.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, the details of the big hit end setting process 2 (step A243) in the above-mentioned big hit end process will be described with reference to the right side of FIG.
In the big hit end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of the time saving state (for example, 2 big hit signals ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A 281). In addition, since the signal regarding the start of the time saving state is output from the middle of the big hit, it is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous manner. Then, a signal related to the start of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 fluctuation Save the time reduction status signal ON, normal symbol 1 high probability status signal ON, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction status signal ON, and normal motorized character 1 open extension status signal ON in the test signal output data area ( Step A 282).

Next, save the number with time saving state in the gaming state display number area (step A 283), save the general drawing high probability & time saving flag in the regular drawing game mode flag area (step A 284), and select the special drawing game mode. The special figure height probability & time shortness flag is saved in the flag area (step A285). After that, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability fluctuation number area (step A286), and the big hit end setting process 2 is ended. In the case of the present embodiment, the right hitting mode is set during the time saving state, but since the right hitting mode is set from the big hit, the setting regarding the right hitting is not performed in the big hit end setting processing 2.
As a result of the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game becomes the high probability state and becomes the time saving state.

[Special figure normal processing shift setting process 2]
Next, the details of the special view ordinary process shift setting process 2 (step A 259) in the above-mentioned big hit end process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special view routine process transition setting process 2, first, "0" is set as a process number relating to the special figure routine process (step A291), and this process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A292). ).

  After that, save the signal regarding the end of the big hit (for example, the big hit 1 signal OFF, the big hit 3 signal OFF, the big hit 4 signal OFF) in the external information output data area (step A293) Then, the condition device in operation signal OFF, the accessory continuous operation device in operation signal OFF, the special symbol 1 signal OFF, the special symbol 2 signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A294). Subsequently, the information of the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A 295), the information of the pointer area of the round LED indicating the round count of the big hit is cleared (step A 296), and the information of the effect mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A 297). Then, clear the information in the special view game mode flag save area (step A 298), save the flag during the injustice monitoring period in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A 299), and set special processing shift processing 2 Finish.

[Small hit fanfare medium processing]
Next, details of the small hit fanfare middle process (step S 336) in the special view game process described above will be described with reference to the upper stage of FIG.
In the small hit fanfare medium process, a small hit, medium process shift setting process (step A311) is executed, and the small hit fanfare medium process is ended.

[Small hitting Medium process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hit middle processing shift setting process (step A311) in the above-described small hit fanfare medium middle processing will be described with reference to the lower part of FIG.
In the small hitting medium process transfer setting process, first, the process number is set to "8" for the small hit medium process (step A321), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A322). Thereafter, the small hit open time (for example: 0.2 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 323), and a signal related to the start of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric character 1 operating signal is turned on). Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A324), the on data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A325), and information on the large winning opening count number area storing the number of winnings on the large winning opening (Ie, the special winning opening count number) is cleared (step A326). Then, the small hit operation initial value "0" is saved in the small hit middle control pointer area (step A327), and the small hit middle processing shift setting process is ended.

[Small hit during processing]
Next, the details of the small hit middle process (step S337) in the special view game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the small hit middle process, first, the small hit middle control pointer (pointer initialized at step A327) is loaded (step A341), and the loaded value is equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (for example, "6") (Step A342).
If the loaded value is not equal to or less than the small hit operation end value (step A 342; N), the small hit opening by the small hit is not yet finished, so the small hit middle control pointer is updated by +1 (step A 343). A migration setting process (step A344) is performed, and the small hitting middle process is ended.
If the loaded value is equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step A 342; Y), the large winning opening opening by the small hit is ended, so the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A 345) It is determined whether this flag is in the special figure height probability (step A346). Here, it is determined whether or not the small hit in the high probability, the time saving state does not matter.

Then, if the flag is not in the special figure height probability (step A346; N), the process proceeds to step A349. If the flag is in the special figure height probability (step A346; Y), prepare a small hit end screen command (step A347), perform the rendering command setting process (step A348), and proceed to step A349.
In step A349, the small hit residual ball processing shift setting process (step A) is performed, and the small hit middle process is ended.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hitting operation shift setting process (step A344) in the small hitting medium process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the small hit operation shift setting process, first, the value of the small hit middle control pointer is checked, and a branch is made according to the value of this pointer (step A361). That is, if the value of this pointer is any of “0”, “2” and “4”, the process goes to step A 362, and if “1”, “3” and “5”, the process goes to step A 364.
At step A362, the wait time (eg, 1500 ms) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A362), and the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A363). The small hit operation shift setting process is ended.
At step A364, the special winning opening open time (for example, 200 ms) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A364), and the on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A365), small hit operation transition setting processing ends.

  By the control process of this embodiment including the small hitting operation shift setting process and the like, a small hitting operation (small winning opening opening operation at a small hit) as shown in FIG. 127, for example, is realized. Here, the small hit fanfare time is the step A833, the large winning opening opening time 200 ms is the step A364, the weight time 1500 ms is the step A362, and the small hit remaining ball time is a step A373 described later, the small hit ending time Are set in step A403 described later.

[Small hit residual ball processing shift setting processing]
Next, the details of the small hit residual ball processing shift setting process (step A 349) in the small hit middle process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the small hit residual ball processing shift setting processing, first, the processing number is set to "9" for the small hit residual ball processing (step A371), and this processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A372). And small hit residual ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) are saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A373). Thereafter, the off data for turning off the big winning opening solenoid 133 is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area in order to close the opening / closing member 27b of the variable winning device 27 (step A374). End the migration setting process.

[Small hit residual ball processing]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball processing (step S338) in the above-mentioned special view game processing will be described by the upper part of FIG.
In the small hit residual ball processing, the small hit end processing shift setting processing (step A391) is executed, and the small hit residual ball processing is ended.

[Small hit end process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hitting end processing shift setting process (step A391) in the above-described small hit residual ball processing will be described with reference to the lower part of FIG.
In the small hitting end processing shift setting processing, first, the processing number is set to "10" for the small hitting end processing (step A401), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A402). Thereafter, the small hit ending time (for example, 0.1 second) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A403), and a signal regarding the end of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric character 1 operating signal is turned off) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A404), the big winning opening count number area is cleared (step A405), and the small hit middle control pointer area is cleared (0 clear) (step A406). Processing transition setting processing is ended.

[Small hit end processing]
Next, details of the small hitting end process (step S339) in the above-described special view game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In this small hitting end process, first, the game mode flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A421), and it is determined whether the value of this flag is in the special figure high probability (step A422).
Then, if the special figure height probability is in progress (step A422; Y), the process proceeds to step A439.
On the other hand, when it is not in the special figure height probability (step A422; N), it sets the production mode information address table (step A423), corresponds to the production mode transition information which is set at the time of fluctuation start (at the time of stop symbol setting) The address of the table to be acquired is acquired (step A424).

  Next, as processing for saving information required to manage the effect mode in the game control apparatus 100, first, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the small hitting operation is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (Step A425). Furthermore, the effect residual rotation number of the effect mode set after the end of the small hitting operation is acquired, saved in the effect remaining rotational number region (step A 426), and the next mode of the effect mode set after the end of the small hitting operation The transition information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A427).

Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A428),
It is determined whether the prepared command is the same as the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A429). If the prepared command is the same as the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A429; Y), the process proceeds to step A439.
On the other hand, if the prepared command is not the same as the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A429; N), the prepared command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A430) to perform rendering command setting processing (A Perform step A431).

Next, an effect rotation number command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation number is prepared (step A432), and effect command setting processing (step A433) is performed.
Next, a high probability variation frequency command corresponding to the high probability variation number is prepared (step A 434), and a rendering command setting process (step A 435) is performed to determine whether the new rendering mode is a left strike mode ( Step A436). If the new effect mode is not the mode to hit the left (step A436; N), the process proceeds to step A439.

Then, if the new effect mode is a mode for left hitting (step A 436; Y), prepare a left hitting instruction notification command (step A 437), perform an effect command setting process (step A 438), and go to step A 439 move on.
At step A439, the game mode flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A439), and is the value of this flag being in the special figure time-short period (state in which the variation time of the special figure is shortened) Is determined (step A440).
Then, if the special drawing time is short (step A440; Y), the process proceeds to step A443.
On the other hand, if the special drawing time is not short (step A440; N), save the signal related to the left hitting instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is off) in the test signal output data area (step A441). In order to turn off the display LED, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A 442), and the process proceeds to step A 443.
In step A 443, special image processing shift setting processing 3 is performed (step A 443), and the small hitting end processing is ended.

[Special figure normal processing shift setting processing 3]
Next, the details of the special view ordinary process shift setting process 3 (step A 443) in the above-described small hitting end process will be described with reference to FIG.
In this special view routine process transition setting process 3, first, "0" is set as the process number relating to the special view routine process (step A461), and this process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A462) ).

  After that, save the signal regarding the small hit end (for example, the big hit 1 signal is off) in the external information output data area (step A463) and the signal regarding the small hit end (for example, turn off the special symbol 1 small hit signal) Are saved in the test signal output data area (step A464). Subsequently, the information of the variation symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A465), and the information of the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A466). Then, clear the information of the special figure game mode flag evacuation area (step A 467), save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A 468), and set special processing shift processing 3 Finish.

[Processing command setting process]
Next, an effect command setting process executed in many steps such as step S262 in the above-mentioned fraud & prize monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. The effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.
In this effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A481), and it is determined whether the transmission buffer is full (step A482). If the transmission buffer is full (step A 482; Y), the process returns to step A 481 to repeat the process.
On the other hand, when the transmission buffer is not full (step A482; N), the prepared command data (MODE (upper byte)) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A483), and the process proceeds to step A484.
In step A484, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A484), and it is determined whether the transmission buffer is full (step A485). If the transmission buffer is full (step A 485; Y), the process returns to step A 484 to repeat the process.
On the other hand, if the transmission buffer is not full (step A485; N), the prepared command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A486), and the effect command setting process is ended.

  As described above, since the command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, the burden on the game control device 100 can be reduced, and analysis of the command can be made difficult. In addition, the timing of command transmission can be advanced, and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300 as well, it is not necessary to capture a command in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced. In the present embodiment, since the command is also transmitted to the payout control device 200 by serial communication, the same effect can be obtained.

[Symbol variation control processing]
Next, the details of the symbol variation control process (steps S341 and S343) in the special view game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol of the first special figure (special figure 1) or the second special figure (special figure 2) and setting the display data of the special symbol. In the symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether the special figure variation control flag related to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) among the first special figure and the second special figure is changing (( Step A501).
And, when the special figure fluctuation flag is fluctuating (step A502; YES), it acquires the symbol display table (for fluctuation) which corresponds to the special figure (for example, the first special figure) of the control object (step) A 503).

Here, the variation control table prepared in step S340 of the special view game process has, for example, a configuration as shown in the lower part of FIG. 66, and the information defined on this table is as follows.
· Lower address of fluctuation control area · Address of display table 2 (for stop) Address of display table 1 (for fluctuation) · In the case shown in the lower part of Fig. 66, in the above step A503, prepared "Special figure 1 fluctuation control table Based on the address “D_TZ1_LED1” of the display table 1 above, “Special figure 1 display table 1 (for variation) (D_TZ1_LED1)” shown under “Special figure 1 variation control table” in FIG. 66 is acquired.
Then, of the first special drawing and the second special drawing, the blinking control timer according to the special drawing to be controlled (for example, the first special drawing) is updated by -1 (step A504), and the value of the timer is 0, That is, it is determined whether time is up (step A505).

If the value of the blinking control timer is not 0 (step A505; NO), display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number area is acquired (step A508). If the value of the blink control timer is 0 (step A505; YES), the blink control timer initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the blink control timer area to be controlled (step A506), and the first special view In the second special figure, the variation symbol number related to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is updated by +1 (step A507), and the display data corresponding to the value of the variation figure number area of interest is acquired (Step A508). Thereafter, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A 509), and the symbol variation control process is ended.
Here, in the step A508, for example, in the case shown in the lower part of FIG. 66, when the value of the variable symbol number area (ie, the special figure 1 symbol number) is "0", the acquired "special figure 1 The display data "C_SEG1_OFF" corresponding to the special figure 1 symbol number "0" on the display table 1 (for variation) (D_TZ1_LED1) is acquired.

On the other hand, when the special figure variation flag is not changing (step A502; NO), the symbol display table (for stop) corresponding to the special figure (for example, the first special figure) to be controlled is acquired (step A510) . Then, display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number area is obtained (step A511), the obtained display data is saved in the target segment area (step A509), and the symbol change control process is ended. Here, the processes of step A510 and step A511 are also performed based on, for example, the fluctuation control table configured as shown in the lower part of FIG. In this case, “special view 1 display table 2 (for stop) (D_TZ1_LED2)” is acquired in step A510 and used in step A511.
Of the special view 1 display and special view 2 display that are LED segments in the collective display device 35, the symbol numbers for the special view display (for example, special view 1 display) to be controlled by the above processing The special view corresponding to is displayed.

[2-byte distribution process]
Next, the details of the 2-byte distribution process (step S595) in the above-described fluctuation pattern setting process will be described with reference to the right side of FIG.
The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether the head data of the second half fluctuation group table (selection table) prepared in the fluctuation pattern setting process is a code without allocation (that is, "0") (step A521) ). Here, the second half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half fluctuation pattern group, but defines the second half fluctuation pattern group in which only the second half fluctuation pattern is "no reach". In the case of a fluctuation group table (for example, a partial fluctuation group table when the result is out), there is no need to distribute, so a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is specified at the head. ing.

  Then, if the first data of the second half change group table is a code without distribution (step A 522; YES), the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result is updated (step A 527), and the 2-byte distribution process is ended. Do. On the other hand, if the first data of the latter half fluctuation group table is not a code without distribution (step A 522; NO), one distribution value defined first in the latter half fluctuation group table is acquired (step A 523).

  Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A523 from the random number value (the value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) loaded in step S593 (step A524), and the calculated value It is determined whether the new random value is smaller than "0" (step A525). If the new random number is not smaller than “0” (step A 525; NO), the address is updated to the address of the next distributed value (step A 526), and then the process proceeds to step A 523 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do. That is, after the distribution value defined next in the variation group selection table is obtained in step A523, the distribution value is subtracted by using the determined random number value as a new random number value in step A525, and further new randomness A numerical value is calculated (step A524). Then, it is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than "0" (step A525).

  The above process is executed until it is determined in step A525 that the new random number is smaller than “0” (step A525; YES). Thereby, any one second half fluctuation selection table is selected from at least one second half fluctuation selection table defined in the second half fluctuation group table. When it is determined in step A525 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (step A525; YES), the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result is updated (step A527), and 2-byte distribution processing is performed. Finish.

[Distribution process]
Next, the details of the distribution process (steps S596, S599, and S605) in the above-described fluctuation pattern setting process will be described with reference to the left side of FIG.
In the distribution process, the second half variation pattern of the special view variation display game is selected from the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2 or the first half variation selection table ( It is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

  In this distribution process, first, it is checked whether the head data of the prepared second half change selection table (selection table) or the first half change selection table (selection table) is a code without distribution (ie, "0"). (Step A541). Here, the second-half fluctuation selection table and the first-half fluctuation selection table store predetermined distribution values in association with at least one second-half fluctuation pattern or first-half fluctuation pattern as in the second-half fluctuation group table. In the case of a selection table without any, the distribution value "0", that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

  Then, if the first data of the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is a code without distribution (step A 542; YES), the address of the data corresponding to the result of distribution is updated (step A 547). End the process. On the other hand, when the first data of the second half fluctuation selection table or the first half fluctuation selection table is not a code without distribution (step A 542: NO), one distribution value defined first in the second half fluctuation selection table or the first half fluctuation selection table To obtain (step A 543).

  Subsequently, after the distribution value acquired in step A 543 is subtracted from the random number value (the values of the variation pattern random number 2 and the variation pattern random number 3) loaded in step S598 or S604, a new random number value is calculated ( Step A544) It is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than "0" (Step A545). Then, if the new random number value is not smaller than “0” (step A 545; NO), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A 546), the process proceeds to step A 543 and the subsequent steps Do the processing.

That is, after the allocation value defined next in the second half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table is acquired in step A543, the allocation value is subtracted by using the determined random number value as a new random number value in step A545. , And further calculate new random numbers (step A544). Then, it is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than "0" (step A545). The above process is executed until it is determined in step A545 that the new random value is smaller than "0" (step A545; YES). Thus, any one of the second-half fluctuation number and the first-half fluctuation number is selected from at least one second-half fluctuation pattern or the first-half fluctuation pattern defined in the second-half fluctuation selection table or the first-half fluctuation selection table. Then, if it is determined in step A545 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (step A545; YES), the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result is updated (step A547), and the distribution processing is ended. Do.
The above-mentioned distribution processing and the above-mentioned 2-byte distribution processing are basically the same in configuration. Because the size of the random numbers used for distribution is 1 byte or 2 bytes, the program instructions for calculation are different.

Next, we will move on to the description of the flowchart related to the common drawing game processing, but here, the explanation will be made using "step B" as the step number.
[Puppet game processing]
First, the details of the common drawing game process (step S79) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the common drawing game processing, monitoring of the input of the gate switch 122, control of the entire processing related to the common drawing variation display game, setting of display of the common drawing, and the like are performed.
First, gate switch monitoring processing (step B1) for monitoring an input from the gate switch 122 is performed. The details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) will be described later.
Next, a general prize winning switch monitoring process (step B2) is performed to monitor the input from the second start port switch 121. In addition, the details of the routine compensation switch monitoring process (step B2) will be described later.

Next, if the regular game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step B3). Note that the minimum value of the common drawing game processing timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the common-play game processing timer has become 0 (step B4).
If it is determined that the value of the common-play game processing timer is 0 (step B4; YES), that is, it is determined that the time-up has occurred or the time-up has already occurred, the common-use reference to branch to the processing corresponding to the common-play game processing number A process (step B5) of setting a game sequence branch table (a specific example is shown in the upper right of FIG. 68) in a register (step B5) and processing of acquiring a branch destination address of a process corresponding to a common drawing game process number using the table (Step B6) is performed. Then, a subroutine call is made according to the game processing number (step B8).

If the game processing number is "0" in step B8, the start of fluctuation of the common drawing fluctuation display game is monitored, and the setting of fluctuation start of the common drawing fluctuation display game and the setting of the effect, and the processing during common drawing fluctuation The ordinary drawing routine processing (step B9) is performed to set the information necessary for the execution.
The details of the common drawing routine processing (step B9) will be described later.
If the game processing number is "1" in step B8, a common drawing variation processing (step B10) is performed to set information necessary for performing the common drawing display processing.
In addition, the details of the general drawing fluctuation processing (step B10) will be described later.
If the game processing number is "2" in step B8, and if the result of the common spread variation display game is a hit, then whether or not the normal variation winning device 27 is in common power support (during time saving) or not A general-diagram display processing (step B11) is performed to set the general-purpose power supply open time according to the weather, set the information necessary for performing the middle-general processing, and the like.
The details of the general-diagram display-in-progress process (step B11) will be described later.

If the game processing number is "3" at step B8, the processing of the common drawing is continued during the common drawing, or the setting of the information necessary for performing the general electric bulb remaining processing Perform step B12).
In addition, the details of the common process per process (step B12) will be described later.
If the game processing number is "4" in step B8, general electric ball remnant ball processing (step B13) is performed to set information necessary for end processing per common drawing.
The details of the routine charge ball processing (step B13) will be described later.
If the game processing number is "5" in step B8, a per-diagram generalization end process (step B14) is performed to set information necessary for performing the per-diagram ordinary process (step B9).
The details of the end processing per common drawing (step B14) will be described later.
Thereafter, after preparing various tables for controlling the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol by the common drawing display (collective display device 35) (step B15), the control of the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol by the common drawing display (collective display device 35) The symbol variation control process (step B16) according to is performed, and the regular game processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the drawing game processing timer is not 0 (step B4; NO), that is, time is not up, the process proceeds to step B15 and the subsequent processing is performed.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described standard game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the gate switch monitoring process, first, whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 122 is checked (step B21). Then, when it is determined that the gate switch 122 has an input (step B21; YES), it is determined whether or not the game state is to hit the right (step B22). If it is the gaming state in which the player strikes the right (step B22; Y), the process proceeds to step B25. If it is not in the gaming state to hit the right (step B22; N), a right strike instruction command is prepared (step B23), effect command setting processing is performed (step B24), and the process proceeds to step B25.
Here, there is the following in the game state to hit right.
・ Big wins in the middle ・ Small hit in the middle ・ Special drawing time short and in the middle

  In step B25, the common drawing reservation number is acquired, and it is determined whether the common drawing reservation number is less than the upper limit (for example, 4) (step B25). If it is determined that the common drawing reservation number is less than the upper limit (step B25; YES), the general drawing reservation number is updated (+1) (step B26).

Thereafter, processing is performed to calculate the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of general drawing reservations (step B27), and then the random number is extracted and saved in the random number storage area of RWM (step B28) The random symbol random number is extracted and saved in the random symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step B29), and the gate switch monitoring process is ended.
Also, if it is determined in step B21 that there is no input to the gate switch 122 (step B21; NO), or if it is determined in step B25 that the number of general drawing reservations is not less than the upper limit value ( Step B25; NO), finish the gate switch monitoring process.

[Puden prize winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the common prize winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-described standard drawing game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the Futo prize winning switch monitoring process, first, whether or not the regular drawing fluctuation display game is hit and the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 26 is executing the opening operation a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) ) Is checked (step B31). Then, if it is determined that the drawing is being performed (step B31; YES), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the second start port switch 121 (step B32), and there is an input to the second start port switch 121 ((step B32) If it determines with step B32; YES), the process (step B33) which updates the count number of a common charge counter (+1) will be performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the updated common charge counter has reached the upper limit (for example, 6) (step B34), and it is determined that the count has reached the upper limit (step B34; YES) Then, hit the control pointer area in the common drawing and save the value (for example, "4") of the operation end (step B35), clear the common drawing game processing timer to 0 (step B36), and execute the common control prize switch monitoring processing Finish.
In other words, if there is a general prize winning above the upper limit value in the hit state of the common drawing, then hit the normal processing control pointer area during the common drawing and save the end value, and the hit state of the common drawing is halfway Make it finish.

  Also, in step B31, it is determined that a general drawing is not in progress (step B31; NO), or it is determined in step B32 that there is no input to the second start port switch 121 (step B32; NO) Also, if it is determined in step B34 that the count number has not reached the upper limit value (step B34; NO), the routine compensation switch monitoring process ends.

[Normal figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the common drawing routine processing (step B9) in the above-described common drawing game processing will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, in the case of simply saying "per random number", it means a random number per common drawing, and in the case of simply referring to "per symbol random number", it means a per random drawing symbol random number.
In the ordinary drawing routine processing, it is first determined whether the ordinary drawing reservation number is "0" (step B41), and if it is determined that the ordinary drawing reservation number is "0" (step B41; YES), After shifting to B62 and performing the common drawing routine processing transition setting process 1, the common drawing routine processing is ended. The common drawing routine processing shift setting processing 1 is a process for repeating the common drawing routine processing next time, and the details will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step B41 that the common drawing reservation number is not 0 (step B41; NO), the RWM random drawing storage area per common drawing (for holding number 1) and the common drawing random number storage area (for holding number 1) These random numbers are loaded from each) (step B42), and then the common random number storage area (for holding number 1) and the common figure random number storage area (for holding number 1) are cleared to 0 (step B43). Go to B44.
In step B44, it is determined whether the probability of becoming a hit result in the common drawing variation display game is during a common drawing high probability higher than normal, that is, it is a time saving state (general power support state) (step B44) ). In the present embodiment, the general drawing high probability is in the common charge support state, and the special drawing is also in the high probability state (high probability mode). And in this embodiment, the common drawing when the gaming state of the common drawing is a normal state (a state where no special control such as making the hit probability of the common drawing a high probability is not performed, ie, a normal state not a common power support state) The probability of hitting is zero (for example, 0/251), and the probability of hitting a common figure in the state of common power support is, for example, 250/251, and the probability setting is large for the gap between the normal state and the high probability state . As a result, it is possible to increase the attraction of the player to be in the high probability state (that is, the probability change) and to enhance the interest while suppressing the payout in the normal state.

If it is not the time of general drawing high probability (step B44; NO), the low probability lower limit judgment value (for example, "251") is set (step B45), and it is judged whether the loaded random number is equal to or more than the prescribed upper limit judgment value. (Step B47). On the other hand, if the drawing probability is high (step B44; Y), the high probability lower limit judgment value (for example, "1") is set (step B46), and the loaded random number is equal to or more than the prescribed upper limit judgment value. Or not (step B47). The upper limit judgment value is a value common to both the normal drawing high probability (general power support state) and the normal time (normal state of general drawing), and is, for example, “251”.
If the loaded random number is not equal to or more than the upper limit determination value (step B47; N), it is determined whether the loaded random number is less than the set lower limit determination value (step B48).
Then, if the loaded random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value (step B47; Y), and if the loaded per random number is less than the set lower limit determination value (step B48; Y), it is out of the common drawing. , Save the shift information in the hit flag area (step B49), set the out-of-stop symbol number (step B50), save the out-of-pattern information corresponding to the stop symbol number in the common-view stop symbol information area (step B51), Go to step B55.

  Also, if the loaded random number is not less than the set lower limit judgment value (step B48; N), since it is per drawing, the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B52), and the loaded random number is The corresponding stop symbol number is set (step B53), the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the common drawing stop symbol information storage area (step B54), and the process proceeds to step B55. In the present embodiment, there are three types of hit symbols in the common drawing.

Next, in step B55, the set stop symbol number is saved in the common figure stop symbol area (step B55), and the set stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B56). The general drawing variation time corresponding to the figure game mode state (for example, normal time; 700 ms, during general power support; 500 ms (short due to time reduction)) is saved in the general drawing game processing timer area (step B57).
Next, the random number storage area per common drawing is shifted (step B58), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B59), and the number of general drawing reservations is updated by -1 (step B60). That is, with the common drawing variation display game regarding the oldest common drawing reservation number 1 being executed, the processing of raising the positions of the common drawing reservation numbers 2 to 4 held by the common drawing reservation number 1 or later one by one I do. As a result of this processing, the values for the number of general drawing reservations 2 to from the number of general drawing reservations 4 for the random number storage area per common drawing move from the number 1 for general drawing reservations for the random number storage area to the number 3 for general drawing reservation It will be done. Then, the value for the common drawing reservation number 4 of the random number storage area per common drawing is cleared, and the common drawing reservation number is decremented by one.

Next, after passing through step B60, the processing for setting transition to normal processing is set (step B61), and the normal processing is ended.
In the case where the gaming state of the common drawing is the normal state (in the present embodiment, the gaming state of the special drawing is also the normal state (low probability state)), the above upper limit judgment value and the lower limit judgment value are also “251”, for example. Since the values are the same, in the determination process of steps B47 and B48, the process always proceeds to step B49, and the probability per common drawing in the normal state in this embodiment is zero.

[General drawing normal processing transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the ordinary drawing routine processing transition setting process 1 (step B62) in the ordinary drawing routine processing described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, "0" (corresponding to the process number related to ordinary drawing normal processing) is set as a processing number for shifting to ordinary drawing normal processing in step B71, and processing is performed in the ordinary drawing game processing number area in step B72. Save the number (here "0"). Next, at step B73, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the general electric power fraud monitoring period flag area, and the process returns. By this, it shifts to the common drawing normal processing next time.

[Processing setting setting process during general drawing fluctuation]
Next, the details of the processing for setting transition to normal processing during normal processing in the above-described normal processing (step B61) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, Step B81 sets "1" (corresponding to the process number related to the processing during general drawing variation) as the processing number, and Step B82 sets the processing number (here "1") to the common drawing game processing number area. Save Next, in step B83, a signal relating to the start of common drawing fluctuation (for example, the signal during normal symbol 1 fluctuation is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area, and in step B84, the fluctuation flag is saved in the common drawing fluctuation control flag area. Next, in step B85, the initial value of the blinking control timer (for example, 100 ms), which is the initial value of the timer of the blinking cycle of the common drawing display (general drawing display LED of batch display device 35), is saved in the common drawing blinking control timer area , The general processing during the process transition setting processing ends. By this, the processing shifts to the processing during the general fluctuation.

[During processing of common map fluctuation]
Next, the details of the general drawing variation-in-progress processing (step B10) in the above-described common drawing game processing will be described with reference to the upper part of FIG.
When the routine starts, at step B91, a process transition setting process is carried out during the display of a common drawing. This is to make settings for shifting to processing during the display of a common drawing, and the details will be described later. After this process, it returns.

[Processing transition setting processing during common map display]
Next, the details of the processing for setting transition to processing during general drawing display (step B91) in the above-described processing of changing the general drawing will be described with reference to the lower part of FIG.
When the routine is started, "2" (corresponding to the process number related to the processing in the general drawing display) is set as the processing number in step B101, and the processing number ("2" in this case) in the common drawing game processing number area in step B102. Save Next, in step B103, the common drawing display time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the common drawing game processing timer area, and in step B105 a test signal output related to the common drawing fluctuation end (for example, normal symbol 1 fluctuation signal OFF) Save to data area. Next, in step B106, the stop flag is saved in the common drawing variation control flag area, and the process returns. By this, the processing shifts to the processing of displaying the common drawing next time.

[Process while displaying a common map]
Next, the details of the general drawing display processing (step B11) in the common drawing game processing described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the process of displaying the common drawing, first, load the hit flag (hit information or out information) set in the normal processing of the common drawing (step B111), and clear the hit flag area of the RWM (step B112). Do.
Next, it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit or not (step B113), and if it is determined that the hit flag is not hit (step B113; NO), the process branches to step B122 to set transition processing for general processing 1 (Described with reference to FIG. 72), and the process of displaying a common drawing is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step B113 that the hit flag is hit (step B113; YES), processing (step B114) is performed to determine whether the power transmission support is in progress (during time saving state).
Then, if the normal power support is in progress (step B114; YES), the hit processing setting table is set (step B115), and the hit start pointer value (initial value of control pointer, details corresponding to the normal drawing stop symbol information (Described later) is saved and saved in the control pointer area during the common drawing (step B116), and the common power release time (for example, 500 ms or 1700 ms) corresponding to the common drawing stop symbol information is obtained. Is saved in the common-play game processing timer area (step B117), the common-per-diagram process transition setting process (step B121) is performed, and the common-diagram display processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the normal power support is not in progress (step B114; NO), the hit start pointer value (initial value of control pointer) for normal use is set, and this is saved in the control pointer area during normal hit (step B119) Set the normal power release time (for example, 100 ms) for the normal time, save it in the normal game processing timer area (step B120), and perform normal processing transition setting processing 1 of FIG. 72. Then (step B122), the processing for displaying the common drawing is ended.

FIG. 128 shows a specific example (specific example of the common charge release pattern) of the common charge operation timing chart according to the present embodiment. In the case of this specific example, there are three types of hit symbols in the common drawing, such as "hit symbol 1", "hit symbol 2", and "hit symbol 3".
Then, when the hit symbol 1 is hit, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 128, 500 ms (set in the step B117) is passed after a display time of 600 ms (generally set in the step B104). After the release of the common charge of the common charge open time), a one-time open common charge open pattern provided with a general charge residual ball processing time of 600 ms (a time set in step B158 described later) is provided.

Next, in the case where the hit symbol 2 is hit, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 128, after passing the display time of the common drawing of 600 ms, the common charge of 1700 ms (the common charge open time set in step B117) After the release, and after a wait time of 200 ms (the time set in step B152 described later), the second release of the 1700 ms common charge is performed, and then the 600 ms common charge residual ball processing time is provided. It will be a regular power release pattern that opens twice.
Next, when hit with the hit symbol 3, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 128, after passing the display time of the common drawing of 600 ms, the common charge of 1700 ms is released, and then the waiting time of 200 ms is passed, and The first release of 1700 ms of common charge followed by a 200 ms wait time followed by the release of the third 1700 ms of common charge followed by a 600 ms common charge residual ball treatment time followed by a third open It becomes a public power release pattern.

  Further, in the present embodiment, although not shown in FIG. 128, although a hit per common drawing occurs during the common charge support (during high probability), the common charge is opened against the per common drawing (general drawing reserved) If the normal time point is not during normal power support (normal time) (that is, when the process proceeds to step B119 after step B114), the normal power open pattern is 100 ms (the above pattern does not depend on the symbol). It is configured to be opened once (that is, the opening time of the opening operation of the symbol 1 is shortened) (generally described later with reference to FIG. 124 and the like).

Then, in the present embodiment, in order to realize a total of four types of common charge open operations as described above, the control pointer for common charge open control (also shown in FIG. 128) is used. The value of this control pointer is changed as shown in FIG. 128 in each opening pattern, corresponding to the point in time when the open / close state changes after the end of the first opening operation. There is.
The hit start pointer value in the steps B116 and B119 means the first value (initial value) of the value of such control pointer. Therefore, in the case of the specific example of FIG. 128, in step B116, "4" is in the case of hit symbol 1, "2" in the case of hit symbol 2, and "0" in the case of hit symbol 3. It is saved as the start pointer value. Further, in step B119, "4" is saved as the hit start pointer value, as in the case of the hit symbol 1.

[Per process of processing transition setting processing per common map]
Next, the details of the processing transition setting processing (step B121) per common drawing in the processing of the common drawing display described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, "3" (corresponding to the processing number related to the processing in the common drawing) is set as the processing number in step B131, and the processing number ("3" in this case) in the common drawing game processing number area in step B132. Save Next, in step B133, a test signal output data (for example, a signal relating to the start of power operation) (for example, a signal relating to normal motor vehicle 1 operation) for a signal related to the start per common drawing (for example, Save to area. Next, the ON data is saved in the common power solenoid output data area in step B134, and the common power count number area storing the winning number to the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 26 is cleared in step B135. Clear the general electric power misappropriate number area to store the number of winning prizes to the normal fluctuation winning device 26 in the monitoring period, in step B137 a flag for abnormal monitoring period out of the general electric power illegal monitoring period flag area (incorrect monitoring of the normal fluctuation winning device 26 Save the flag (out of period) and return. By this, next time it moves to the middle processing per common drawing.

[Every time per popular map]
Next, the details of the per-diagram normal process (step B12) in the above-mentioned figurative game processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the processing during the per drawing, the processing control pointer for the per drawing is loaded and prepared first (step B141), and the value of the control pointer per per drawing, which is loaded, is within the control pointer upper limit value area per per drawing. It is determined whether the value (the value of the hit end: for example, "4") has been reached (step B142).
Then, if the value of the control pointer during the common drawing does not reach the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the common drawing (step B142; NO), the control pointer during the common drawing is updated by +1 (step B143), The routine operation shift setting process (step B144) is performed, and the routine is ended during the routine.
If the value of the control pointer during the common drawing reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the common drawing (hit end value) (step B142; YES), the processing control pointer during the common drawing per step B143 The general electric power transition setting process (step B144) is performed without performing the process of updating (+1) the area, and the process is ended during the common drawing.

[Puppet operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the general-purpose power transition setting process (step B144) in the above-mentioned per-normal-period process will be described with reference to FIG.
In addition, for the time control of the common charge release operation, a per-medium processing time value table is used, a specific example of which is shown in the lower part of FIG. The hit-intermediate process time value table is in the hit-intermediate process setting table which is set in step B115 in the process of displaying the map. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 78, in the hit processing time value table, the value of the control pointer and the value of the general power operation (general power release or general power blockade) after each time point of the general power operation corresponding to the value. The duration values are recorded in association with each other. The hit middle processing time value table shown in the lower part of FIG. 78 is for controlling the general-purpose power release pattern corresponding to the hit symbol 3 shown in FIG. 128 described above. In steps B152 and B154 described later, the time corresponding to the value of the control pointer is saved with reference to such a hit processing time value table.

The routine operation shift setting process is a process of controlling the drive of the routine solenoid 132 for opening and closing the normal fluctuation winning device 26, and branches the process according to the value of the control pointer.
When the routine starts, a branch is performed by the control pointer in step B151. Here, the process branches depending on the value of the control pointer loaded and prepared in step B141. Specifically, when the value of the control pointer is either 0 or 2 in step B151, the process proceeds to step B152 to control the closing of the normal fluctuation winning device 26, so that the normal fluctuation corresponding to the control pointer is performed. The wait time (for example, 200 ms) after blocking of the winning device 26 is saved in the common game processing timer area (step B152), and the public electric solenoid output data area is turned off in order to turn off the public electric solenoid 132 in step B153. Is set, and the routine power transition setting process is ended. As a result, the closing time after the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 26 is opened becomes the above-mentioned wait time, and the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 26 is closed in that period.

  On the other hand, when the value of the control pointer is either 1 or 3 in step B151, the process proceeds to step B154 to control the opening of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 26, the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 26 corresponding to the control pointer On the general data solenoid output data area to save the general power open time (for example, 1700 ms), which is the open time of the general purpose game processing timer area (step B154) and turn on the general electric solenoid 132 in step B155. Is set, and the routine power transition setting process is ended. As a result, the open time of the normal fluctuation winning device 26 is the above-mentioned common power release time, and the normal fluctuation winning device 26 is opened during that period.

  If the value of the control pointer is 4 in step B151, the process proceeds to step B156 to complete the release control of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 26 and perform the general electric power remaining ball processing (step B13). "4" is set as the number (step B156). Next, in step B157, the processing number (here, "4") is saved in the common drawing game processing number area. Next, in step B158, save the common sphere residual ball processing time (for example, 600 ms) in the common drawing game processing timer area, and then turn off the common pole solenoid output data area to turn off the common solenoid 132 in step B159. Save and complete the normal power transfer setting process.

[Puden residual ball treatment]
Next, the details of the routine residual ball processing (step B13) in the above-described regular game processing will be described with reference to the upper side of FIG.
When the routine starts, at step B161, a per-diagram end processing shift setting process is performed. This is to set for shifting to the end processing per common drawing, and the details will be described later. After this process, it returns.

[Process for setting end processing transition per common drawing]
Next, the details of the end processing shift setting process (step B161) per common drawing in the above-described normal charge residual ball processing will be described with reference to the lower side of FIG.
When the routine starts, "5" (corresponding to the processing number for ending processing per common drawing) is set as the processing number in step B171, and the processing number ("5" in this case) in the common drawing game processing number area in step B172. Save Next, at step B173, the regular drawing ending time (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the regular game processing timer area, and at step B174, a signal related to the termination of operation of the normal fluctuation winning device 26 (for example Save (OFF) in the test signal output data area. Next, at step B175, the general charge count number area for counting the number of prizes to be awarded to the normal fluctuation winning device 26 is cleared. Then, in step B176, the control pointer area in the common drawing is cleared, and the processing for setting the end processing per common drawing is ended. As a result, the process proceeds to the end processing per common drawing next time.

[End processing per popular map]
Next, the details of the end-of-round-drawing processing (step B14) in the above-described common-play game processing will be described with reference to the upper side of FIG.
When the routine starts, at step B181, processing 2 for transition to ordinary processing is set. This is to make settings for shifting to common processing, and the details will be described later. After this process, it returns.

[General drawing normal processing transition setting processing 2]
Next, the details of the common drawing routine processing transition setting process 2 (step B181) in the above-described common drawing end processing will be described from the lower side of FIG.
When the routine starts, "0" (corresponding to the processing number related to ordinary processing) is set as the processing number in step B191, and the processing number ("0" in this case) is added to the common drawing game processing number area in step B192. Save. Next, in step B193, a signal related to the end per common drawing (for example, the signal during the normal pattern 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area. Next, in step B194, a flag during the fraud monitoring period (a flag defining the fraud monitoring period of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 26) is saved in the general electric power fraud monitoring period flag area, and the process returns. By this, next time, it shifts to the common drawing normal processing.

The flowchart related to the common game processing has been described above. Next, the subroutine of step S80 and subsequent steps in the timer interrupt processing described above will be described.
Here, the description will be made using “step C” as the step number.
[Segment LED editing process]
First, the details of the segment LED editing process (step S80) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The segment LED editing process is a process for processing segment LEDs provided in the collective display unit 35. As described above, the collective display unit 35 displays a common view and a special view, and further displays a special view and a common view. The display of start memory storage (special map display, general drawing display) and display of the game state are performed.
These displays are configured to be performed by, for example, a plurality of displays (for example, one lamp or 7-segment display) using an LED as a light emission source. More specifically, for example, the special figure 1 reserve indicator, the special figure 2 reserve indicator, the general drawing reserve indicator, the first gaming state indicator, the second gaming state indicator, the error indicator, the round indicator, etc. It is segment LED edit processing that is configured with segment LEDs having a function, and performs settings relating to their driving and the like.

In the segment LED editing process, first, the blink control timer is updated by +1 (step C1), and it is determined whether it is an output on timing (step C2). This determination is made based on whether the specific bit of the timer is 1 or not. In this example, by looking at bit 5, a blink cycle of 128 ms is created.
If it is the output on timing (step C2; Y), the common drawing reserve number display table 1 is set (step C3), and the process proceeds to step C5. If it is not the output on timing (step C2; N), the common drawing reserve number display table 2 is set (step C4), and the process proceeds to step C5.
In addition, if the number of reservations is 0 to 2, the display data is the same in both tables of the common drawing reservation number display table.

In step C5, display data corresponding to the common drawing reservation number is acquired based on the set common drawing reservation number display table 1 or 2 and saved in the segment area (step C5), and it is determined whether or not the output is on timing. (Step C6). When it is the output on timing (step C6; Y), the special figure 1 reservation number display table 1 is set (step C7), and the process proceeds to step C9. When it is not the output on timing (step C6; N), the special figure 1 reservation number display table 2 is set (step C8), and the process proceeds to step C9.
Note that, by saving display data in a predetermined segment area, the corresponding LED of the batch display device 35 is turned on or off.

  In step C9, display data corresponding to the special drawing 1 holding number is acquired based on the set special drawing 1 holding number display table 1 or 2 and saved in the segment area (step C9), and the output is on timing. It is determined (step C10). When it is the output on timing (step C10; Y), the special figure 2 reservation number display table 1 is set (step C11), and the process proceeds to step C13. When it is not the output on timing (step C10; N), the special figure 2 reservation number display table 2 is set (step C12), and the process proceeds to step C13.

In step C13, display data corresponding to the special drawing 2 holding number is acquired based on the set special drawing 2 holding number display table 1 or 2 and saved in the segment area (step C13), and the round display table is set. The display data corresponding to the round display LED pointer is obtained from this table and saved in the segment area (step C15).
Next, the gaming state display table 1 is set (step C16), display data corresponding to the gaming state display number is acquired from this table, and saved in the segment area (step C17). In addition, in the game state display, it is informed whether it is during the special drawing time (in the power transmission support). For example, it is performed with one LED, and represents the normal state by the light off, and represents the special figure time short and medium (during the common charge support) by the light.
Next, the gaming state display table 2 is set (step C18), display data corresponding to the gaming state display number 2 is acquired, and saved in the segment area (step C19), and the segment LED editing process is ended. In addition, in the gaming state display 2, it is informed whether it is a gaming state in which the player strikes the right. For example, it is performed with one LED, and represents a normal strike (left strike) by turning off and a right strike by turning on. In the case of this example, as described above, the right strike period is during the big hit, during the small hit, and during the general power support.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
Next, the details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S81) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the magnet fraud monitoring process, a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 126 is checked to determine whether there is an abnormality, and setting of start and end of fraud notification is performed.
In the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, the magnetic sensor 126 is turned on, that is, an abnormal magnetism is detected, from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 126 and taken into the second input port 161 (input port 2). It is determined (step C21).
If the magnetic sensor 126 is on (step C21; YES), that is, if an abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer that counts the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by +1 (step C22). It is determined whether the time is up (step C23).

  If the magnet fraud monitoring timer has timed out (step C23; YES), that is, if abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C24), and the magnet fraud notification timer initial value ( For example, 60000 ms) is saved in the magnet fraud alert timer area (step C25). Then, a command for magnet informing notification is prepared (step C26), and a magnet fraud flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step C27), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region. (Step C33). That is, when the magnetic sensor 126 is continuously turned on for a predetermined period (for example, a period of eight interruptions, ie, an interruption period of 4 ms × 8 = 32 ms), it is determined that an abnormality occurs. There is.

  On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor 126 is not on (step C21; NO), that is, when the abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C28), and the magnet fraud specifying the notification time of magnet fraud If the notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step C29). The minimum value of the magnet fraud alert timer is set to zero. Next, it is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud alerting timer is 0 (step C30). If the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed out (step C23; NO), the process also proceeds to step C29.

Then, if the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (step C30; NO), that is, if the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended.
In addition, when the value of the magnet fraud alert timer is 0 (step C30; YES), that is, when the time is up or the time is up, the fraud alert period is over, or the fraud alert is from the beginning. If it is not performed, a command for magnet informing end is prepared (step C31). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step C32), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step C33).

Then, if the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (Step C33; YES), the command for the state has been transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended. If the values do not match (step C33; NO), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step C34), and a rendering command is set to transmit a command for the state to the rendering control apparatus 300 A process is performed (step C35), and the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended.
Here, the arrow in FIG. 82 indicates a processing route (normal route) in the case where there is no magnet irregularity and is normal. That is, if normal, the processing route of step C21, step C28, step C29, step C30, step C31, step C32, step C33 and RET is passed. Usually, this normal route is repeated.

[Board radio wave fraud monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S82) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The board radio wave fraud monitoring process determines the presence or absence of an abnormality based on the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 127, and sets the start and the end of the fraud notification.
In the radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, the board radio wave sensor 127 is turned on from the state of the detection signal output from the board radio wave sensor 127 and taken into the second input port 161 (input port 2) via the proximity I / F 163, That is, it is determined whether an abnormal radio wave is detected (step C41). If the radio wave sensor is on (step C41; YES), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is detected, the initial value (for example, 60000 ms) of the radio wave fraud alert timer is saved in the radio wave fraud alert timer area (step C42).

  Then, a command of radio wave informing notification is prepared (step C43), and a radio wave fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a radio wave fraud flag (step C44), and it is determined whether the prepared radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the radio wave fraud flag region. Step C49). That is, unlike the case of the magnet fraud, in the case of the radio wave fraud, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, it is determined that an anomaly has occurred.

On the other hand, if the radio wave sensor is not on (step C41; NO), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer defining the notification time of radio wave fraud is not 0 and is updated -1 C45). The minimum value of the radio wave fraud alert timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave fraud alert timer is 0 (step C46).
If the value of the radio wave injustice timer is not 0 (step C46; NO), that is, if the time is not up, the radio wave improper monitoring process is ended. In addition, if the value of the radio wave informing timer is 0 (step C46; YES), that is, if the time is up or the time has already been up, and the period of the informing is over, or the informing of the injustice from the beginning If not done, prepare a command of radio wave fraud notification end (step C47), prepare a radio wave fraud release flag as a radio wave fraud flag (step C48), and prepare a prepared radio wave fraud flag as a value of radio wave fraud flag area It is determined whether or not it matches (step C49).

Then, if the prepared radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the radio wave fraud flag area (step C49; YES), the command for the state has already been transmitted to the effect control device 300, so the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is ended. . If the values do not match (step C49; NO), the prepared radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area (step C50), and a rendering command for transmitting a command about the state to the rendering control apparatus 300 A setting process is performed (step C51), and the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is ended.
Here, in FIG. 83, the arrow indicates a processing route (normal route) in the case where there is no radio wave irregularity and is normal. That is, if normal, the processing route of step C41, step C45, step C46, step C47, step C48, step C49, RET is passed. Usually, this normal route is repeated.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S83) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIGS.
In the external information editing process, the payout command transmission process (step S74), winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S77), magnet fraud monitoring process (step S81) and board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S82) Based on the information collecting terminal, external equipment such as the game arcade internal management device, and information to be output to the test shot testing device, processing is performed to set in the output buffer.

As shown in FIG. 84, in the external information editing process, first, at step C61, it is determined whether or not a glass frame opening error is occurring. In this process, instead of directly monitoring the opening of the glass frame 5 (door) based on the signal of the glass frame opening detection switch 211, the determination based on the monitoring result in the "game machine state check process" of FIG. I do. That is, it is determined whether or not a glass frame opening error has occurred based on whether or not an error flag (error occurrence flag) is set in the "game machine state check process" of FIG.
If the glass frame opening error is not occurring, the process proceeds to step C62, and it is determined whether or not the front frame (body frame) opening error is occurring. Also in this process, the determination based on the monitoring result in the “game machine state check process” of FIG. 20 is performed.

If the front frame (body frame) opening error is occurring, the process proceeds to step C65. Further, also when the glass frame opening error is occurring at step C61, the process proceeds to step C65.
That is, if a glass frame opening error is occurring or a front frame opening error is occurring, the process proceeds to step C65, and the on data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area in step C65. The on data of the machine error state signal is saved in the external information output data area, and the process proceeds to step C67.
On the other hand, if the front frame (body frame) opening error is not occurring (step C62; N), the process proceeds to step C63 to save the off data of the door / frame opening signal in the external information output data area in step C63. Then, the off data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area, and the process proceeds to step C67.

  In step C67, if the security signal control timer is not 0, "-1" is updated (step C67), and then it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step C68). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to 0. The security signal control timer is a timer in which an initial timer value (for example, 256 ms) is set in step S29 of the main processing, and when the power is turned on by clearing the RAM, the security signal is turned on for a predetermined time (for example 256 ms). It is for outputting.

If the value of the security signal control timer is not 0 in step C68, that is, if the time is not up, the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area in step C69, and the process proceeds to step C70 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C68 that the security signal control timer has already timed out after time-up or “−1” update, the process proceeds to step C70 and subsequent steps.

  At step C70, in steps C70, 71, 72, 73, 74, the magnet fraud, board radio wave fraud, frame radio wave fraud, general electricity charge fraud, or the special winning opening fraud occurs Determine if it is medium. In these processes, a determination is made based on the monitoring result or the like in the "game machine state check process" of FIG. That is, it is determined whether or not each of the above-mentioned injustices is occurring based on whether or not the error flag (error occurrence flag) is set in the "game machine state check process" of FIG. Alternatively, based on the flag of the fraud flag area (the magnet fraud flag area or the board radio wave fraud flag area) saved in the fraud monitoring process of FIG. 82 or 83, it may be determined whether the above fraud is occurring.

Then, if any one or more injustice occurs, the process proceeds to step C 78 to save the on data of the security signal in the external information output data area, and in step C 79 the test data of the on data of the gaming machine error status signal Save in the output data area and proceed to step C80. As a result, an illegal state or a gaming machine error state is output to the outside.
In the case of this example, the security signal is turned on not only in step C69 but also in step C78. Therefore, the security signal control timer does not turn off unless time is up and no error occurs. That is, when the security signal control timer is timed up and any error does not occur, the process of step C64 is effective and the security signal is turned off.

  On the other hand, if NO at step C70, NO at step C71, NO at step C72, NO at step C73, NO at step C74, ie, all NO at steps C70 to C74, the process branches from step C74 to step C75. After the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area, the process proceeds to step C80.

At step C80, main prize ball signal editing processing (step C80) for setting information on the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out is performed, and then starting opening signal editing processing (step C81) for editing winning signals at the starting opening is performed. . Subsequently, if the symbol determination number control timer is not 0, "-1" is updated (step C82), and then it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination number control timer becomes 0 (timed up) (step C83) ). The symbol determination frequency control timer is a timer for controlling the on time of the symbol determination frequency signal.
If the symbol determination frequency control timer is not up (step C83; NO), the process proceeds to step C85, the on data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area, and the process returns. Then, the routine is repeated, and if it is determined in step C83 that the symbol determination frequency control timer has timed up (step C83; YES), the process proceeds to step C84, and the off data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area End the external information editing process.
In this manner, the symbol determination number signal is output as the external information each time the symbol of the special drawing ends the fluctuation.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, the details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step C80) in the above-mentioned external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
The main prize ball signal editing process outputs a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (predetermined number of payouts) generated by the winning to the winning opening becomes a predetermined number (here 10) to the external device It is a process.
In the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step C101). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step C102). If the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step C102; YES), it is determined whether the number of times of outputting the main prize ball signal updated in step S160 is 0 (step C103).

If the main prize ball signal output number is not 0 (step C103; NO), the main prize ball signal output number is updated by 1 (step C104), and the main prize ball signal output is output to the main prize ball signal output control timer area. The control timer initial value is saved (step C105). The main prize ball signal output control timer initial value is obtained by adding the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) of the main prize ball signal and the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) It is time (for example, 192 ms). Thereafter, the on data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C107), and the main prize ball signal editing process is ended.
If the main prize ball signal output count is 0 (step C103; YES), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C108), finish the main prize ball signal editing process.

On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step C102; NO), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step C106). Note that the main prize ball signal output control timer being in the output ON period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms).
If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step C106; YES), the process proceeds to step C107. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step C106; NO), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of RWM. Then (step C108), the main prize ball signal editing process is ended.
As described above, from the game control apparatus 100, a main prize ball signal of one pulse is output to an external device (for example, a management device of a game arcade) every 10 scheduled balls for which the number of prize balls is to be paid out. The payout control device 200 outputs a 1-pulse winning ball signal generated every 10 pieces to the external device (for example, the management device).
That is, the main prize ball number signal output frequency is updated by +1 every 10 pieces of delivery schedule (every time the payout command is transmitted) in the game control apparatus 100 (main substrate) (subroutine in payout command transmission processing), and then updated ( The main prize ball number signal is output for the set number of outputs. Then, for the main prize ball signal output for every 10 pieces of the delivery schedule as described above, the payout ball signal is transmitted from the delivery control device 200 (delivery substrate) when the 10 pieces of delivery are actually performed. By aligning the schedule with the results, it is possible to respond to fraudulent payouts.

Also, from the main prize ball signal, it becomes possible to determine by the management device as an external device when it is a prize that has been generated, which also helps the policy in hall sales.
Specifically, it can be determined whether a winning occurred during a big hit or a winning occurred during a normal game. For example, if there is a lot of winning if it is a big hit in the big hit, but there is a lot of winning in the normal game, there is an effect that it can be judged that the nail adjustment is too sweet, etc. become.
On the other hand, if there is only the prize ball signal from the payout control device 200 which is outputted at the completion of the payout and the main prize ball signal is not outputted to the external device, the ball will run out during the big hit and the payout will be made. It is not possible to determine when the prize has been generated, for example, when it is after the big hit that the supply is delayed and paid out after the big hit.
Therefore, if the supply is delayed and paid out after the big hit, there will be a lot of winnings (payouts) during the normal game, and it is possible for the business data to be defective etc. There is sex.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, both the main winning ball signal and the winning ball signal from the payout control device 200 are used in combination, and the main winning ball signal is output immediately after winning, so There are no problems.

Further, the ON / OFF pattern of the main prize ball signal generated by the main prize ball signal editing process is, for example, as shown in the timing chart shown in the lower side of FIG. That is, it is a pattern consisting of an on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and an off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms). Here, since the value of the output control timer represents 4 ms which is a timer interrupt cycle as one unit, "48" corresponds to 192 ms and "16" corresponds to 64 ms.
The starting opening signal generated by the starting opening signal editing process described later has the same pattern as the main winning ball signal.

[Starting mouth signal editing process]
Next, the details of the starting opening signal editing process (step C81) in the above-mentioned external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
The start opening signal editing process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when the first start opening switch 120 and the second start opening switch 121 are input.
In the starting opening signal editing process, first, if the starting opening signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step C111). The minimum value of the starting opening signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is 0 (step C112). If the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is 0 (step C112; YES), it is determined whether the number of starting opening signal outputs updated in step S382 is 0 (step C113).

Then, if the starting opening signal output number is not 0 (step C113; NO), the starting opening signal output number is updated by -1 (step C114), and the starting opening signal output control timer initial value is set to the starting opening signal output control timer area. Is saved (step C115). The start opening signal output control timer initial value is a time (for example, 64 ms) obtained by adding the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) of the start port signal and the off state (for example, low level) For example, it is 192 ms). Thereafter, on data for turning on the starting opening signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C117), and the starting opening signal editing process is ended.
In addition, when the number of start opening signal outputs is 0 (step C113; YES), the off data for turning off the start opening signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of RWM (step C118) , And finish the starting opening signal editing process.

  On the other hand, when the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is not 0 (step C112; NO), it is determined whether the starting opening signal output control timer is in the output on period (step C116). In addition, that a starting opening signal output control timer is in an output on area is that the value of a starting opening signal output control timer is more than predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the starting opening signal output control timer is in the output on period (step C116; YES), the process proceeds to step C117. In addition, when the start opening signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step C116; NO), save the off data for turning off the start opening signal for the external device in the external information output data area of RWM ( Step C118) The start opening signal editing process is ended.

Next, control of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 88 to FIG.
Here, the description will be made using “step D” as the step number.
The special view controlled by the effect control device 300 is a special view for effect displayed on the display device 41, and the special view in the following description of the control process of the effect control device 300 is the special view for this effect It means (decorative design which is not this special figure).

Also, in general, the term "character" means characters or characters having a property or character, or a property or character, and may also mean characters as computer terms. However, in the following description of the effect control device 300, particularly in the description of image display control using VDP, a series of movies, background images, images of special symbols (special symbol or fourth symbol), characters A group of still images or moving images such as images may be referred to as characters, and such image data (still images or moving image data) may be referred to as character data (or character data).
Further, in the following description of the effect control device 300, in the case of display control, an object means a target of display control with grouping, and a display element (a background image, an image of a decorative pattern of a special view, an image of a notice character , An image of a pending display, etc.) For example, in the case of this example, the decorative symbols of the special drawing are distinguished by the difference display area (reel) such as left symbol, right symbol and middle symbol, and further, in each of these distinctions, present symbol, next symbol, There is a distinction that the display position of the scroll direction of the front symbol is different. That is, for example, with regard to the left symbol, there are the present symbol of the left symbol, the next symbol of the left symbol, and the front symbol of the left symbol, each of which is one object when viewed in detail. However, in the control process, for example, the entire left symbol including the present symbol, the next symbol, and the previous symbol may be classified as one display element.

Further, in the present embodiment, a scenario table (also referred to as a scenario data table) is used when rendering on the display device 41 or the like. In this scenario table, data for controlling the flow of a specific effect (data specifying which motion table is to be executed at what timing, etc.) is set.
The motion table described above includes motion data (that is, data for specifying image data to be displayed and its display position, etc.) of each effect (mainly effect display) that is blocked (partized), and the motion is blocked It means a standardized rendering operation. That is, the motion table is a control table for performing each of the blocked effects, also referred to as a motion control table. The data of the motion table can be easily produced by a graphical input operation using a mouse or the like by commercially available application software that can be executed by a PC (personal computer). It is stored in advance in the PROM 321.

In the present embodiment, the concept of a scenario layer is used in drawing control of a screen displayed on the display device 41 or the like. The scenario layer means each layer in a method of controlling effect display etc. divided into a plurality of layers. In this example, a scenario table is set as needed for each scenario layer, and the entire presentation is realized by combining the presentation of each scenario layer.
The “scenario management area” is a storage area of a structure including an area (scenario timer area) for storing the value of the scenario timer and an area (scenario data table area) for storing the address of the scenario table. is there. Then, a scenario management area of the same structure exists for a scenario layer corresponding to each scenario layer, and in this example there are eight scenario layers, so there are also eight scenario management areas (scenario management areas 0 to 7). .
Also, “address area of scenario management area” means a storage area for storing the top address of the scenario management area.

[Main processing]
First, main processing of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The main process starts when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is started.
When the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 starts, the interrupt is first inhibited in step D1, then the CPU 311 is initialized in step D2, then the VDP 312 is initialized in step D3, and then the interrupt is executed in step D4. To give permission. Next, after sequentially executing steps D13, D15, and D19, the process proceeds to step D20.

In step D13, generation of display data is permitted. This is processing for permitting a display circuit (not shown) in the VDP 312 to access a VRAM (not shown) in the VDP 312 to generate display data.
In step D15, a random number seed is set. This is processing for setting a pseudo-random number generation sequence using, for example, a srand function. Here, as an argument given to the srand function, a fixed value such as 0 (zero) may be used, or a value created based on an ID value of a CPU or the like is used so as to be different for each gaming machine. It is also good.
In step D19, power is turned on to an area to be initialized (for example, a flag area for presentation (a storage area used as various flags described later in the control process of the presentation control apparatus 300) to be initialized in the RWM of the presentation control apparatus 300). Save the initial value of time.

Next, in step D20, steps D20 to D32 are sequentially executed.
At step D20, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared.
At step D21, an effect button input process is performed. This is processing for performing editing when the effect button 9 (for example, a configuration including a push button and a select button) or the touch panel 9a is operated when activated. Note that since the effect button is not turned on and off at high speed, processing for detecting button input may be performed within this processing (in the main loop processing described later) or within a short-period timer interrupt (not shown). It is also good.

In step D22, the hall / player setting mode process is performed to receive operations such as setting of changeable ranges such as brightness of LED and display device 41 and volume, and changes of brightness and volume of LED and display device 41 by the player. .
In step D23, random number update processing is performed. This is, for example, processing of updating the pseudo random number at least once every control cycle of the main processing using the rand function. Since the rand function generates random numbers based on the specified generation sequence each time recalculation is performed, it is only necessary to execute the function. In addition, you may use the random number which updates +1 each like a main board | substrate (game control apparatus 100).
At step D24, a reception command check process (described later) is executed.

At step D31, an effect display editing process is performed. This is processing for setting various commands for instructing the VDP 312 to draw contents on the display device 41 and parameters thereof. In the effect display editing process, commands are set in a table form, and the commands thus set are sequentially transmitted to the VDP 312 in step D34 (instruction for screen drawing) described later.
At step D32, the drawing command preparation end setting is executed, and the process proceeds to step D33. The process of step D32 is a process of setting that preparation of all commands to the VDP 312 set in step D31 is completed.

  In step D33, it is determined whether it is a frame switching timing. If it is a frame switching timing, steps D34 to D38 are sequentially executed, and if it is not a frame switching timing, this step D33 is repeated. Here, the frame switching timing is a time corresponding to the processing cycle (for example, 1/30 seconds3333.333 ms) created based on the cycle (for example, 1/60 seconds) of the V blank interrupt (also referred to as V sync interrupt). It is the timing which arrives at a regular interval. The V blank interrupt is generated each time one scan of the entire screen for drawing is completed by the VDP 312. The generation cycle of this V blank interrupt is, for example, 1/60 seconds as described above. In the case of this embodiment, frame switching is performed when the same drawing is repeated twice and the V blank interrupt occurs twice, and the frame switching timing cycle is twice the cycle of the V blank interrupt (for example, 1/60 seconds). (For example, 1/30 seconds ≒ 33.33 ms). However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, frame switching (image updating) may be performed in a cycle of 1/30 seconds or more, or 1/30 seconds or less Frame switching may be performed in a cycle.

  By the process of step D33, the subsequent processes (steps D34 to D38 and the subsequent steps D20 to D32) are performed at the frame switching timing for each processing cycle. In addition, time management which needs to be synchronized with the effect content is performed in units of this frame (that is, in units of the processing cycle). In the case where the processing cycle is 1/30 seconds, for example, three frames result in 100 ms. This is the same as the main board (game control device) managing time values in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt cycle.

Next, in step D34, the VDP 312 is instructed to draw a screen.
At step D35, a sound control process is performed to process sound volume from the speakers (upper speaker 12a and lower speaker 12b) (details will be described later).
In step D36, a decoration control process is performed to control various LEDs and the like of the panel decoration device 42 and the frame decoration device 43.
At step D37, movable body control processing for controlling movable bodies including various motors and SOL (solenoid) is executed.
In step D38, a launch information control process (described later) is performed.
After this step D38 is executed, the process returns to step D20, and the same process as in step D20 is repeated. That is, steps D20 to D38 constitute loop processing (sometimes referred to as main loop processing) repeatedly executed in the above processing cycle after activation of the effect control device 300.

  In addition, although the control process of steps D35 to D37 is performed in these steps in which switching of operation is executed in units of processing cycles in order to match the effect of the screen, the signals generated or set in these control processes or The process of actually outputting data (particularly various LEDs and signals for driving and controlling the motor, etc.) to the port is performed within a short-period timer interrupt (not shown). However, when using an IC specialized for control of various devices, there is also a case where the output of a signal or the like is not performed by a timer interrupt only by instructing by serial communication or the like.

[Sound control process]
Next, sound control processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In this sound control process, first, it is determined whether there is switching of the volume SW 338 (rotation operation of the volume SW 338 by a worker of a gaming machine manufacturing plant or a store clerk of a game arcade (hole)) (step D51). If there is switching of the volume SW 338 (step D51; Y), the hall volume (described later) is set to the default value corresponding to the SW state after switching (step D52), and it is determined whether a customer waiting demo is in progress (step D52) Step D53).

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 104, regarding the volume of the speakers 12a and 12b, the entire range of volume that can be set as performance (hereinafter referred to as the entire volume range) ranges from "0" to "20" The sound pressure level is so high that there is a range of 21 steps. The specific sound pressure level at each stage is not limited and can be set as appropriate. And, the range of the volume (hereinafter referred to as the effective range of the volume, or simply the effective range) with which the player can also adjust the volume is a range of 10 consecutive steps among them. In addition, the default value of the volume of the speakers 12a and 12b is set to a specific level within this effective range (for example, in the case shown in FIG. 104, the fifth level including the bottom to the bottom of the effective range) Ru. Then, when the volume SW 338 is switched (in this case, when the rotational operation is performed), the volume setting table (not shown) for determining the effective range and the default value is displayed at the rotational position of the operation unit of the volume SW 338 (step D52). By switching according to the operation position, the effective range is set and changed together with the default value. For example, when the operation position of the volume SW 338 is switched to the operation position at which the volume is minimum, the effective range is the range from "0" to "9" in the entire volume range, as shown by "volume SW" low "" in FIG. The default value is set to “4” (the fifth sound pressure level including “0”) in the entire volume range. Further, when the operation position of the volume SW 338 is switched to the operation position at which the volume is maximum, as shown by “volume SW“ high ”” in FIG. 104, the effective range is the range from “11” to “20” in the entire volume range. The default value is set to “15” (the sound pressure level at the sixteenth stage) in the entire volume range. Therefore, in this case, the effective range can be changed in the range of 12 steps as a whole, the minimum value of which can be changed from “0” to “11”. Similarly, the default value can be changed in 12 steps of "4" to "15". Such a change (the change of the default value and the change of the effective range accordingly) is possible by the operation of the volume SW 338. The middle level in FIG. 104 indicates “volume SW“ medium ”” when the default value is switched to “10” (effective range is “6” to “15”). Although only three steps are shown as "large", "medium" and "small" in FIG. 104, in the case of this example, 12 steps are variable.

  Next, if the customer waiting demo is not in progress (step D53; N), the process proceeds to step D72. If the customer is waiting for a demonstration (step D53; Y), display setting of the hall volume setting screen corresponding to the volume SW 338 is performed (step D54), and the hall volume setting screen display timer is initialized to an initial value (eg 10 seconds). The setting is made (step D55), the hall volume setting flag is set (step D56), and the process proceeds to step D57.

  Here, the hall sound volume setting screen corresponding to the sound volume SW 338 is displayed on the screen by the setting value of the hall sound volume by the sound volume SW 338 (for example, “high”, “medium”, “low”, etc. described above). It is written as "corresponding" to change the value of the scale. That is, the hall sound volume setting screen is, for example, shown in the middle or lower part of FIG. Then, in step D54, for example, when it is switched to the "volume SW" small "" by the volume SW 338, a hall volume setting screen as shown in the middle of FIG. 107 is displayed, and it is switched to "volume SW" large ". In the case where it is determined, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 107, the display setting for displaying the hall sound volume setting screen corresponding to the operation of the sound volume switch 338 is performed.

  In step D57, it is determined whether the cursor up / down operation has been performed (step D57). If there is no cursor up / down operation (step D57; N), the process proceeds to step D60. When cursor up / down operation is performed (step D57; Y), the active menu is switched between the item of "volume setting" and the item of "return" (step D58), and display setting corresponding to the active menu is performed (step D59) Proceed to step D60.

  Here, the cursor up / down operation is an operation of switching the active menu on the screen (selecting the items displayed side by side vertically) by, for example, the touch operation input to the touch panel 9a on the upper surface of the effect button 9. For example, as can be seen from the display example of the operation method of the hole setting screen in FIG. 105, this cursor up-down operation becomes possible by the touch of a finger or the like on the back side (upper side) or the front side (lower side) . The active menu is one item selected by the cursor up / down operation, and means an item whose execution operation such as setting change can be performed by the cursor left / right operation described later, and other items on the screen For example, the setting item is displayed brighter (or the characters are displayed thicker) or the like so as to indicate that it is the active menu. In step D58, if the active menu before the operation is "volume setting" to switch the active menu to "return", the active menu before the operation is "return", in order to realize such active menu change by cursor up / down operation. If it is, switch the active menu to "volume setting". Then, in step D59, in response to the switching of the active menu in step D58, display setting is performed to change the item of the switched new active menu as an active menu so as to be brighter than others and to darken the other items. .

  In step D60, it is determined whether "volume setting" is active (that is, "volume setting" is an active menu) (step D60). If the "volume setting" is not active (step D60; N), the process proceeds to step D68. On the other hand, when "volume setting" is active (step D60; Y), it is determined whether or not the cursor left / right operation is performed (step D61). When the cursor left / right operation is not performed (step D61; N), the process proceeds to step D68. On the other hand, when the cursor left / right operation is performed (step D61; Y), the hall volume value is updated in the effective range according to the operation direction (step D62), and display setting corresponding to the hall volume value is performed (step D63). And a request to output a volume switching sound (step D64), and the process proceeds to step D68.

  Here, the cursor left / right operation is an operation for executing an active menu on the screen by, for example, a touch operation input to the touch panel 9 a on the upper surface of the effect button 9. For example, as can be seen from the display example of the operation method of the hole setting screen of FIG. 105, this cursor left / right operation becomes possible by touching the left or right side of the top surface of the effect button 9. Then, for example, when the "volume setting" is the active menu, when the cursor left / right operation is performed, for example, the volume increases with the operation on the right (sound pressure level increases) and the volume decreases with the operation on the left (sound pressure Level goes down). For example, when "Return" is the active menu, when the cursor left / right operation is performed, for example, an operation to return to the original screen (screen displayed in front of the hall volume setting screen) is realized by any operation on either side. It may be done. In order to realize a part of such operation, in the above steps D60 to D63, according to the cursor left / right operation when “volume setting” is the active menu, the hall volume value is set within the effective range at that time. The setting is changed (up or down), and the display content of the hall volume setting screen is changed according to the setting change.

The hall volume or the hall volume value is a volume or a volume value assumed to be set by a store clerk in the hall or a worker of a game machine manufacturing plant instead of the player, and more specifically, the operation of the volume SW 338 or This means the volume or the volume value set by the cursor operation on the hall volume setting screen as shown in FIG. 107 (or the hole setting screen described later as shown in FIG. 105).
In step D64, the "sound output process" in step D78 described later is performed so that the switching sound (operation sound) corresponding to the volume is emitted from the speakers 12a and 12b each time the volume is changed by the cursor operation. Setting information (output request) to request it.

  On the other hand, if there is no switching of the volume SW 338 (step D51; N), it is determined whether the hall volume is being set (step D65). Here, if the hall volume setting flag set in step D56 is set (if it is not cleared), it is determined that the hall volume setting is in progress. If the hall volume setting is not in progress (step D65; N), the process proceeds to step D74. If the hall volume setting is being performed (step D65; Y), the hall volume setting screen display timer is updated (step D66), and this timer has timed out (ie, an initial value has been added from the execution time of step D55) It is determined whether a time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed (step D67). When time is up (step D67; Y), the process proceeds to step D70 to finish the hall volume setting screen, and when time is not up (step D67; N), the volume setting operation on the hall volume setting screen is performed. To continue with step D57.

In step D68, it is determined whether "return" is active (step D68). If "return" is not active (step D68; N), the process proceeds to step D74. If "return" is active (step D68; Y), it is determined whether there is a button operation of determination (step D69). The determination button operation is, for example, an operation of pressing the effect button 9 (PUSH). Then, if the determination button operation is not performed (step D69; N), the process proceeds to step D74. On the other hand, if there is a button operation for determination (step D69; Y), the process proceeds to step D70.
In step D70, return setting to the original screen is performed (step D70), the hall volume setting flag is cleared (step D71), and the process proceeds to step D72.
At step D72, the hall volume is stored in the backup memory (for example, the FeRAM 327) (step D72), the player volume is set to the same value as the hall volume (step D73), and the process proceeds to step D74. Here, the player's volume is a volume that can be adjusted by the player as well, and is the volume of the sound actually output from the speakers 12a and 12b. This player volume is set to the amplifier circuit 337, for example, by the sound output process of step D78 described later. In step D72, the setting of the effective range of the sound volume described above is also stored in the backup memory.

In step D74, it is determined whether a customer waiting demo is in progress (step D74). If the customer is not waiting for a demonstration (step D74; N), the process proceeds to step D78. When the customer waiting demo is being performed (step D74; Y), if the player volume effective timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step D75), and it is determined whether the value of this timer is 0 (step D76). If the value of the player volume effective timer is not 0 (step D76; N), the process proceeds to step D78.
On the other hand, when the value of the player volume effective timer is 0 (step D76; Y), the player volume is set to the same value as the hall volume (step D), and the process proceeds to step D78.
At step D78, a sound output process (step D78) is performed to end the sound control process.

According to the above sound output processing, the following operation is realized.
That is, when the customer waiting demo is being performed, when the volume switch 338 is switched, step D54 is executed and the hall volume setting screen is automatically displayed. It is displayed even if the conditions for entering the hole setting screen such as opening the glass frame described later are not satisfied. The scale number on the volume setting screen of the hall volume setting screen corresponds to the switched volume switch. For example, as shown in the upper stage of FIG. 107, when the display of the guest special demonstration is being displayed during the decoration special display, when the volume SW 338 is switched from the non-small state to the small operation position, as shown in the middle of FIG. A hall volume setting screen is displayed. For example, when the volume SW 338 is subsequently switched to the “high” operation position, a hall volume setting screen as shown in the lower part of FIG. 107 is displayed. Here, the display of the volume setting in the middle part of FIG. 107 indicates the default value “4” of the volume in the case of “low”, and the display of the volume setting in the lower part of FIG. It shows the value "15". That is, FIG. 107 shows the case where the hall volume value is the default value, but a hall clerk or the like in the hall operates the cursor from this state to change the hall volume value to a value different from the default value. It is possible to change (action of steps D57 to D63).

  After the display of the hall volume setting screen, when a prescribed time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses, or "RETURN" is selected, step D70 is executed and the original screen is restored. When returning to the original screen, the volume selected at that time is determined as the hall volume value, and is stored in the backup memory in step D72 performed immediately before. Every time the volume is changed by cursor operation, a switching sound corresponding to the volume is emitted (action of step D64). The hall volume setting screen is displayed only when the volume SW is switched to other than during gaming (during a customer waiting demo) (action of step D53) and is not displayed when switched to during gaming (for example, during variation), step D53 The process is branched from step D72 to step D72, and it is immediately determined by the default value (4 if "small") of the level corresponding to the switched volume SW and stored in the backup memory. When storing in the backup memory as the hall volume, the player-set volume (player volume) is also rewritten to the same value (action of step D73).

Further, when a fluctuation command or the like is received from the game control device 100 while the hall volume setting screen is displayed, the screen immediately switches to a screen corresponding to the command (this also includes the action of steps D24 and D31 of the main process). At this time, the volume is determined by the value at that time, and is stored in the backup memory in step D72 performed immediately before.
Further, in the above-mentioned sound control process, even if there is no switching of the volume SW 338 and the hall volume setting is not in progress, the process proceeds to step D74, and step D74 and subsequent steps are executed. For this reason, if the player volume effective timer is timed up during the customer waiting demonstration, step D77 is executed, and the player is independently adjusted to the player volume value to a value different from the hall volume value. The volume value is automatically changed to the same value as the hall volume value. For this reason, when the player who has adjusted the volume independently ends the game and leaves the platform as it is, the volume is automatically returned to the hall volume value after a predetermined time, so that the clerk etc. of the hall returns to the hall volume value one by one. There is no need to

[Hole / player setting mode processing]
Next, the hall / player setting mode process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the hall / player setting mode process, first, it is determined whether the hall setting mode is in progress (step D91). Here, if a hole setting mode flag described later is set, it is determined that the hole setting mode is in progress.
When the hole setting mode is in progress (step D91; Y), the process proceeds to step 96. If the hall setting mode is not in progress (step D91; N), it is determined whether the player setting mode is in progress (step D92). Here, if the player setting mode in progress flag described later is set, it is determined that the player setting mode is in progress.

  When the player setting mode is in progress (step D92; Y), the process proceeds to step D111. If the player setting mode is not in progress (step D92; N), it is determined whether the hole setting mode start condition is satisfied (step D93). The hall setting mode start condition includes that there is an operation input for entering the hall setting mode (for example, an operation of pressing the effect button 9 twice with the glass frame 5 opened), and a customer waiting demo is in progress, etc. Also includes the conditions of That is, for example, when the effect button 9 is pressed twice while the glass frame 5 is opened during the customer waiting demonstration, the hole setting mode start condition is satisfied.

When the hole setting mode start condition is not satisfied (step D93; N), the process proceeds to step D108. If the hole setting mode start condition is satisfied (step D93; Y), the screen drawing start setting in the hole setting mode is performed (step D94), the flag in the hole setting mode is set (step D95), and the process proceeds to step D96. Note that drawing update setting (such as highlight item update for brightening the active menu) after entering the hole setting mode is performed in the effect button input process (step D21).
The screen displayed in the hole setting mode in step D94 is, for example, a hole setting screen as shown in FIG.

At step D96, hall volume adjustment processing is performed (step D96), hall LED luminance adjustment processing is performed (step D97), liquid crystal luminance adjustment processing is performed (step D98), and power saving setting processing is performed (step D99) The logo color setting process is performed (step D100), the ball lending unit number setting process is performed (step D101), and it is determined whether there is a setting confirmation operation input (step D102). The setting confirmation operation input is an operation of pressing, for example, the effect button 9 (PUSH) after selecting each item or after changing the setting by cursor left / right operation in each item.
If there is no setting confirmation operation input (step D102; N), the hall / player setting mode process is ended.

Here, the hall volume adjustment process (step D96) is a process for realizing the setting change of the item "volume setting" at the top position of FIG. 105, for example. When the above-mentioned volume SW 338 is operated during the hole setting mode, the effective range of the volume that can be changed by, for example, the item at the top position (volume setting) in FIG. 105 changes (the number of displayed volumes also changes). However, control processing for that is also performed in this hall volume adjustment processing.
Hall LED luminance adjustment processing (step D97) is processing for realizing the setting change of the item “LED luminance setting”, for example, the second stage from the top of FIG.
The liquid crystal luminance adjustment processing (step D98) is processing for realizing the setting change of the item “liquid crystal luminance setting” (luminance setting of the display screen 41a) of the third stage from the top of FIG. 105, for example.
The power saving setting process (step D99) realizes, for example, a setting change of the item “power saving setting” in the fourth row from the top of FIG. 105 (function setting such as darkening the display screen 41a during customer waiting demo) It is.
The logo color setting process (step D100) is a process for realizing the setting change of the item “logo color setting” (setting of the light emission color of the logo display portion 14) of the fifth row from the top of FIG.
The sphere lending unit number setting process (step D101) is a process for realizing the setting change of the item “sphere lending unit number setting” which is not shown. The number of sphere lending units corresponds to an increase in the amount of pitched balls due to a single payout operation of the rental balls (a payout operation by one pressing operation of the sphere lending button 16).

  On the other hand, when there is a setting confirmation operation input (step D102; Y), confirmation with factory default settings (for example, confirmation operation performed by cursor operation in the item “factory default setting” in the lowermost position of FIG. 105) It is determined whether or not (step D103). If it is not determined by the factory default setting (step D103; N), the process proceeds to step D105. If it is determined in factory default settings (step D103; Y), factory default setting processing is performed (step D104), and the process proceeds to step D105. The factory default setting process is a process of setting the settings of all the items which can be changed by the operation of the effect button 9 and the touch panel 9a during the hole setting mode as default values.

In step D105, the determined hole setting data (steps D96 to D101 or the value changed in step D104) is written to the backup RAM (step D105), and the screen drawing end setting in the hole setting mode is performed (step D105). D106) The flag in the hole setting mode is cleared (step D107), and the hole / player setting mode process is ended.
According to the above steps D93 to D107, the store clerk or the like of the hall can easily change the setting in the hall setting mode as described above (for example, the hall setting screen as shown in FIG. 105 is displayed). The setting change content is stored in the backup memory.

On the other hand, when the process branches in step D93 and proceeds to step D108, it is determined whether a player setting mode start condition is satisfied (step D108). The player setting mode start condition is that there is an operation input for entering the player setting mode (for example, an operation of pressing the effect button 9 once during the customer waiting demo).
Then, if the player setting mode start condition is not satisfied (step D108; N), the hall / player setting mode process is ended. If the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (step D108; Y), the screen drawing start setting of the player setting mode is performed (step D109), a player setting mode flag is set (step D110), and step D111. Go to The screen displayed in the player setting mode in step D109 is a player setting screen as shown in FIG. 106, for example.

In step D111, player volume adjustment processing is performed (step D111), player LED luminance adjustment processing is performed (step D112), and it is determined whether there is a setting confirmation operation input (step D113).
Here, the player's volume adjustment process (step D111) is a process for realizing the setting change of the item "volume setting" at the top position of FIG. 106, for example (details will be described later).
The player LED brightness adjustment process (step D97) is a process for realizing the setting change of the item “brightness setting”, for example, the second stage from the top of FIG.

Then, if there is no setting confirmation operation input (step D113; N), the hall / player setting mode process is ended. When there is a setting confirmation operation input (step D113; Y), the screen drawing end setting of the player setting mode is performed (step D114), and the player setting mode in-progress flag is cleared (step D). End mode processing.
According to the processing of the above steps D108 to D115, the player can easily change the setting in the player setting mode as described above (for example, the hole setting screen as shown in FIG. 106 is displayed). That is, when the PUSH button (effect button 9) is pressed once during the customer waiting demonstration, the player setting mode is entered. However, since there is no big problem even if the setting by the player disappears, the contents set in the mode are not saved in the backup memory. Then, when the power is turned on again, or a state in which the player is not played for a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) managed by the player volume effective timer continues, the same as the hole setting value (including the hole volume value and the brightness setting value) It is switched to the value (by the above-mentioned step D77 etc.).

[Player Volume Adjustment Process]
Next, the player's volume adjustment process (step D111) will be described with reference to FIG. In this player volume adjustment process, first, it is determined whether the player volume adjustment mode is active (step D121). When the player volume adjustment mode is active, for example, it means that the item “volume setting” at the top position in FIG. 106 is the active menu.

Then, if the player volume adjustment mode is not active (step D121; N), the player volume adjustment processing is ended. When the player volume adjustment mode is active (step D121; Y), it is determined whether or not the cursor left / right operation is performed (step D122). If there is no cursor left / right operation (step D122; N), the process proceeds to step D127. On the other hand, when the cursor left / right operation is performed (step D122; Y), the player volume value is updated within the effective range in accordance with the operation direction (step D123), and display setting corresponding to the player volume value is performed ( Step D124), the output request of the volume switching sound (setting of the request information for the sound output process of the above-mentioned step D78) is performed (step D125), and an initial value (for example: 5 minutes) is set to the player volume effective timer ( Step D126) The process proceeds to step D127.
By setting an initial value of, for example, 5 minutes in the player volume effective timer, as described above, the player volume is cleared and switched to the hall volume when 5 minutes elapses after entering the customer waiting demo. (See steps D74 to D77 described above).

  Next, in step D127, it is determined whether or not there is an operation below the cursor (an operation on the lower side in the cursor up / down operation described above) (step D127). If there is no cursor down operation (step D127; N), the process proceeds to step D130. On the other hand, when there is an operation under the cursor (step D127; Y), "brightness setting" (for example, the second item from the top of Fig. 106) is switched to active (step D128), and display setting corresponding to the active menu (In this case, display setting is performed to make the item “brightness setting” brighter than others, for example, to make it stand out) (step D129), and the process proceeds to step D130.

  Next, in step D130, it is determined whether or not there is an operation on the cursor (an upper operation in the cursor up / down operation described above) (step D130). If there is no operation on the cursor (step D130; N), the player volume adjustment processing is ended. On the other hand, when there is an operation on the cursor (step D130; Y), "RETURN" (for example, the third item from the top of FIG. 106) is switched to active (step D131), and display setting corresponding to the active menu (this In the case, display setting is performed to make the item "RETURN" more prominent than others (step D132), and the player volume adjustment processing is ended.

[Receive command check process]
Next, the details of the received command check process (step D24) in the main process described above will be described with reference to FIG. The command from the main board includes data of MODE (1 byte) and data of ACTION (1 byte), which are sequentially transmitted. Hereinafter, such data constituting a command is referred to as command data or command data.

  Also, the processing of command reception from the main board is performed by "command reception interrupt processing" (not shown). That is, in the serial communication of this example, transmission / reception is automatically performed by hardware (by the function of the CPU itself), and when reception of a command is completed, an interrupt (command reception interrupt) is generated to notify you. It is only necessary to take out from the buffer, but in the above-mentioned "command reception interrupt processing", every time there is a command reception interrupt, the command is loaded from the serial reception buffer, and after checking the loaded command data for abnormality, the relevant command Data (MODE and ACTION data) is stored in the command buffer, and updating is performed to increase the value of the command reception counter by 1 by the amount stored. In the description of the control control process, simply “store” means to readably store in a predetermined storage area for use in later control processing (the same applies to the following). The command buffer is, for example, a ring buffer. The command buffer is constituted of, for example, a storage area in the RAM 311 a (or RAM 326) of the CPU 311. The capacity of the command buffer may be equal to or more than the number of commands that may be transmitted from the main board in a system control cycle (the above-mentioned processing cycle; for example, 1/30 seconds).

When this reception command check processing routine is started, first the value of the command reception counter is loaded as the command reception number in step D151, and then it is judged in step D152 whether the command reception number is not zero. After sequentially executing D153 to D155, the process proceeds to step D156, and if it is zero, the process returns. In the present application, “loading data” in the control processing means extracting data from the RAM (in the effect control device 300 of this example, the RAM 326 or the RAM 311 a) as in the step D 151.
Also, since the command reception counter is decremented at the next step D153 of this routine executed at each frame switching timing and basically cleared to 0, as a result, it is for one frame (1/30 seconds) (described above) The number of commands received in one processing cycle of (1) is counted, and the command reception counter area of the RWM (the RAM 326 or the RAM 311a) is used.

At step D153, the content of the command reception counter area (ie, the value of the command reception counter) is subtracted by the number of command receptions.
Here, assuming that A: a value of a command reception counter and B: the number of command receptions, “A = B” immediately after the execution of step D151. Then, it is a normal movement that “A = A−B = 0” immediately after the execution of step D153, but in the aspect of this example, the effect control device interrupts the command reception interrupt from the game control device (main board) Since the highest priority is given without prohibition, there is a possibility that the value of A increases between the processing of step D151 and the processing of step D153. Therefore, if the process of step D153 is set to “A ← 0” (that is, the process of setting the value of the command reception counter to zero), the count of the command is shifted. Is going. However, if serial communication is used to transmit / receive a command from the main board as in this embodiment, the interrupt is inhibited and the value of A is not increased between the process of step D151 and the process of step D153. By doing this, the processing content of step D153 may be "A.rarw.0".

At step D154, the contents of the reception command buffer (corresponding to a command buffer, may be simply referred to as a command buffer hereinafter) (ie, command data stored in the address corresponding to the read pointer of the command buffer) Copy to the command storage area). The command area is a storage area in, for example, the RAM 326 or the RAM 311 a that constitutes a so-called FIFO (first-in first-out) buffer.
At step D155, since the data in the command buffer has been read, updating is performed to increase the value of the command reading index, which is a pointer for reading the command buffer, by one within the range of 0 to 31, for example. Here, the range of 0 to 31 corresponds to the capacity of the command buffer (for example, 32).

  In step D156, it is determined whether copying of the command for the number of received commands has been completed (ie, whether steps D154 and D155 have been repeatedly executed for the number of received commands) or not. The process is repeated from step D154, and if completed, the process proceeds to step D157.

At step D157, the contents of the command area (the first stored data among the unread data in the command area, ie, the data to be read next) are loaded (ie, read), In the next step D158, a received command analysis process (described later) is executed on the data of the loaded command (hereinafter referred to as the present command), and then the process proceeds to step D159.
In step D159, the address of the command area (the address of the data to be read out next) is updated, and the process proceeds to step D160.
In step D160, it is determined whether or not analysis of the command for the number of received commands has been completed (ie, whether steps D157 to D159 have been repeatedly executed for the number of received commands) has not been completed. The process is repeated from step D157, and if completed, the process returns.

[Receive command analysis process]
Next, details of the received command analysis process (step D158) in the received command check process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first in step D171, the upper byte of the data of the current command loaded in step D77 is stored separately in MODE and the lower byte is stored in ACT, and then the process proceeds to step D172. In the case of a variable system command instructing a variation pattern of a special figure, the upper byte data stored as MODE commands a first half variation pattern, and the lower byte data stored as ACT commands a second variation pattern It is a thing.

In steps D172 and D173, it is determined whether the values of MODE and ACT separated in step D171 are respectively in the normal range, and if any one of these values is not in the normal range, the process returns. Both of these values are in the normal range If so, the process proceeds to step D174. The value of MODE is not defined and may not be used, and if it is such an unused value, the determination in step D172 is determined to be out of the normal range.
Further, the determination of whether or not the value of ACT separated in step D171 in step D173 is within the normal range is performed, for example, as follows. That is, the effective ACT value is different for each MODE, and the upper limit to the lower limit of the effective value of this ACT are defined in a predetermined ACTION check table (not shown), and in step D173, separation is performed within the upper limit and lower limit. It is checked whether the value of ACT is within the range, and if it is within the range, it is determined that the range is normal (no missing teeth check has been made at this point).

In step D174, it is determined whether the value of separated ACT for the separated value of MODE is a correct combination. This determination is performed using, for example, a match check table. The match check table is a table in which all valid ACT values (action values) for the value of MODE are registered in order from the top address, and are provided for each value of MODE. Then, if there is a separated ACT value in this matching check table corresponding to the value of MODE, it is determined that the combination is correct, and if there is no separated ACT value in the matching check table, it is correct It determines that it is not a combination.
In the process of step D174, a check (including a missing tooth check) is performed to determine whether or not the combination of ACT is normal to MODE. Because there is a plurality of valid ACTs for one MODE, but their values are not continuous (that is, values that do not exist discontinuously or have missing values), the command We are comparing and checking if is a valid value. Then, since only valid values are defined in the match check table, one of them is compared and checked one by one.
If the determination result in step D177 is NO, the value of ACT is abnormal. Therefore, the command is abnormal and step D175 and subsequent steps are not performed and the process returns. If the determination result in step D177 is YES, the process proceeds to step D175.

In step D175, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is within the variable command range, and if it is within this range, variable command processing (described later) is executed in step D176 and the process returns. move on. Here, the data of MODE is data of MODE stored separately in step D171 (the same applies to step D177 and the like described later). Further, a variation system command (also referred to as a variation command or variation pattern command) is a command for instructing a variation pattern of a special figure, and the range that data of this variation command can take is a variation system command range.
In step D177, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is in the big hit system command range, and if it is within this range, the big hit system command processing (details omitted) is executed in step D178 and the process returns. Go to step D179. The big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) relating to a big hit medium effect, and the range which can be taken by data of the big hit system command is a big hit system command range.

At step D179, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is within the symbol system command range, and if it is within this range, symbol system command processing (described later) is executed at step D180 and the process returns. Go to D181. A symbol system command (sometimes referred to as a symbol command or a decoration special figure command) is a command for instructing information on a special figure symbol (for example, what to make the stop figure of the special figure, etc.) The range that the data of can take is the symbol system command range.
In step D181, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is within the one-shot system command range. If it is in this range, one-shot system command processing (described later) is executed in step D182 and the process returns. move on. It should be noted that unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands, commands that stand alone are called single-shot commands. The one-shot commands (sometimes referred to as single-shot commands) include a wait for customer demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model specification command, and the like. The range that can be taken by the data of this one-shot command is the one-shot system command range.

At step D183, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is within the pre-reading symbol system command range for pre-reading effect, and if it is within this range, pre-reading symbol system command processing (details omitted) is executed at step D184 and return If it is out of this range, the process proceeds to step D185.
At step D185, it is determined whether the data of MODE is within the range of the prefetch variation system command for the prefetching effect, and if it is within this range, the prefetch variation system command processing (details omitted) is executed at step D186 and the return is made. If it is out of this range, the received command analysis process is ended and the process returns.

  Here, the pre-reading effect (also referred to as pre-reading advance notice or pre-reading advance notice effect) is a change display game corresponding to start winning memory (no start winning memory hold or just hold) for which the variable display game of the special drawing is not executed. In order to inform the player in advance with predetermined reliability whether or not it will be a big hit when it is executed after that, the display of start winning memory storage etc. is performed in an unusual manner And so on. And the pre-reading system command (pre-reading fluctuation system command and pre-reading pattern system command) is the command which notifies beforehand the fluctuation pattern and the stop design which corresponds to the reservation of the starting winning a prize memory which becomes the object of pre-reading effect It is transmitted from the control device 100 to the effect control device 300. In addition, the normal variation system command and symbol system command which are not pre-read are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the time of the variation display start.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, the details of the one-shot system command processing executed in step D176 in the received command analysis processing described above will be described with reference to FIGS.
When this routine is started, first, at step D201, it is determined whether data of MODE (data of upper byte separated at step D171 described above, the same applies to the following) is device specification (data of model specification command). If model specification is to be performed, model setting processing (not described) is performed in step D202, and then the process returns (ends the one-shot system command processing). If model specification is not to be performed, the process proceeds to step D203.

  In step D203, it is determined whether the data in MODE indicates that the RAM is initialized (the power is turned on with the initialization switch (RAM clear switch) turned on) (data of the command for the RAM initialization), and the RAM If initialization is notified, the process returns to the execution of the RAM initialization setting process at step D204, and if not, the process proceeds to step D205. The command for initializing the RAM is a command for notifying the effect control apparatus 300 that the game control apparatus 100 has cleared RWM (also referred to as a power on command), and is transmitted in the above-described step S30. The command for initializing the RAM is sent to cause the effect control device 300 to clear the effect state and to cause RWM clear notification (operation to display the RWM clear, for example, on the display device 41), and for that purpose The process is the RAM initialization setting process of step D204.

In step D205, it is determined whether the data in MODE indicates power failure recovery (data of a command upon power failure recovery), and if power failure recovery is notified, the power failure recovery setting process is performed in step D206. If it is not intended to return a power failure recovery command, the process proceeds to step D207. In the power failure recovery setting process of step D206, for example, a message such as "game resumed" is displayed on the display device 41, or lamps are blinked in a predetermined manner to notify the player of power failure recovery, etc. It is a process, and the scenario data setting process for that is included.
The scenario data setting process is not shown, but will be executed from the scenario management storage area (“scenario management area address area” and “scenario management area”) corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number. This is processing for setting scenario control data for effect to be made. Also, scenario control data is data set in the scenario management area or the address area of the scenario management area described above to control the flow of specific effects (for example, a scenario data table for writing in the scenario management area (scenario Table) address etc.).

At step D207, it is determined whether the data of MODE indicates command for waiting for customer demonstration (data for waiting for customer demonstration command), and if command for waiting for customer waiting is instructed, steps D208, D209, and D210 are sequentially performed. After execution, the process returns, and if it is not intended to order a customer waiting demo, the process proceeds to step D211. The customer waiting demonstration is a customer waiting demonstration effect (or also referred to as a customer waiting effect), and is an effect including a customer waiting demonstration display performed on the display device 41. In the guest waiting demonstration effect, the display is not limited to the display on the display device 41, and the display may be performed on another display device, lighting (including blinking) of lamps, or output by sound may be performed.
In step D208, a customer waiting demo setting process (details will be omitted) for setting scenario control data for performing customer waiting effects is executed.

At step D209, an initial value (eg, 5 minutes) is set to the player volume enable timer. In addition, although the initial value setting to the player volume effective timer is also performed in the above-mentioned step D126, the above-mentioned initial value setting in the above-mentioned step D126 adjusts the volume in the player volume adjustment mode (player volume (player volume In the step 209, the above-described initial value setting is performed at the start of the customer waiting demonstration effect (this operation is performed regardless of the player's operation).
Next, in step D210, a character item position confirmation process (not described) is executed, and then the process returns.

In step D211, it is determined whether the data of MODE indicates the value of the special figure 1 pending number (data of the pending number command of the special figure 1), and if the value of the special figure 1 pending number is notified. For example, the process proceeds to step D212, and proceeds to step D215 if it does not notify the value of the special figure 1 hold count.
At step D212, it is determined based on the data of MODE whether the number of reservations (number of starting memory of special figure 1) of special drawing 1 has increased by one. After updating the number by +1, the process proceeds to step D214, and if not incremented, the process proceeds to step D214 without executing step D213. At step D214, the process returns after executing the special view 1 suspension information setting process (not described). In addition, since the starting opening winning command reception number is also updated by 1 in steps D217 and D220 described later, the number of game balls entering one of the starting winning openings 25 and 26a (that is, the number of starting winnings) It corresponds and is used by the emission information control process of step D38.

At step D215, it is determined whether the data of MODE indicates the value of the special figure 2 pending number (data of the pending number command of the special figure 2), and if the value of the special figure 2 pending number is notified For example, the process proceeds to step D216, and proceeds to step D219 when not indicating the value of the special figure 2 hold number.
At step D216, it is determined based on the data of MODE whether the number of reservations (number of starting memory of special drawing 2) of special drawing 2 has increased by one. If it is increasing, reception of starting opening winning combination command is received at step D217. After updating the number by +1, the process proceeds to step D218, and if not incremented, the process proceeds to step D218 without executing step D217. At step D218, after executing the special view 2 suspension information setting process (not described), the process returns.
In order to simplify the description, in the above steps D213 and D217, the number of winning balls at the first starting opening (starting opening 25) and the second starting opening (the second starting winning opening 26a) is the same. Although the winning command reception number area is incremented by 1, the areas may be divided as different winning balls. In that case, the emission information control process of step D38 also changes accordingly.

  If the process proceeds to step D219, it is determined whether the data of MODE indicates that the starting opening over winning is notified (data of starting opening over winning command prepared in step S399 described above), and if starting opening over winning is notified. For example, in step D220, the reception number of starting opening winning commands is incremented by one, and then the processing proceeds to step D221. When the starting opening over winning is not notified, the processing proceeds to step D222. In step D221, the process returns after the starting opening over winning setting process (not described) is executed. In addition, the starting opening over winning means the starting winning which exceeds the upper limit value of the special figure reservation number (number of starting memory).

At step D222, it is determined whether the data of MODE is for notifying probability information (data of probability change information command), and if it is for notifying probability information, probability information setting processing is executed at step D223 and then return is made. If the probability information is not instructed, the process proceeds to step D224.
Here, the probability information setting process is a setting process for screen switching at the time of definite variation end (during transition from a high probability state to a low probability normal state) when a definite change occurs after a big hit, and a scenario therefor It may include data setting processing.
In step D224, it is determined whether the data in MODE indicates an error / incorrectness (for example, data of an error notification command). If it indicates an error / incorrectness, an error / incorrect setting process (description in step D225) After the execution) is executed, the process returns, and if the command does not command an error / incorrectness, the process proceeds to step D226.

  When the process proceeds to step D226, it is determined whether the data of MODE is for instructing rendering mode switching (data of rendering mode switching command), and if rendering mode switching is instructed, rendering mode switching setting processing is performed in step D227. After executing (details will be omitted), the process returns, and if it is not one to instruct the effect mode switching, the process proceeds to step D228. The effect mode switching setting process is a control process for performing an operation according to the effect mode switching command, and includes scenario data setting process for that.

At step D228, it is determined whether the data of MODE is for instructing symbol stop of the special figure (ie, symbol stop command), and if command for symbol stop of the special figure is instructed, the procedure proceeds to step D229. If it is not intended to instruct the symbol stop of the special drawing, the process proceeds to step D232.
In step D229, it is determined whether the command corresponding to the data of MODE is a normal command. If normal, the process returns. If normal, the processes in steps D230 and D231 are performed, and then the process returns.
At step D230, stop setting of the corresponding special figure (of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 designated by the symbol stop command data) is executed.
At step D231, the normal state is set as the content of the gaming state flag (information representing the state of the gaming machine (the state of the P machine)). Here, the normal state indicates that it is neither a big hit in the special figure, a small hit in the special figure, a variation in the special figure nor a waiting for customers (waiting for customers). In addition, after being set as normal here, for example, during special feature fluctuation or waiting for a customer depending on the next command from the main board.

  When the process proceeds to step D232, the MODE data informs the emission touch information (a state off command or a state on command related to the touch switch signal prepared in step S304 or S307 described above and transmitted in step S317 (hereinafter referred to as an on-fire command) If the firing touch information is indicated, the firing touch information setting process (to be described later) is performed in step D233, and then the process returns, otherwise the firing touch information is not notified. Go to step D234.

In step D234, it is determined whether the MODE data indicates that the ball lending button is pressed (data of the ball lending button pressing command prepared in step S298 and transmitted in step S299), and the ball lending button is pressed. If the ball lending information setting process (to be described later) is executed in step D235, the process returns. If the ball lending button depression is not notified, the process returns.
Note that there is a step in which illustration and description are omitted for the one-shot command processing. For example, the corresponding processing in the case of receiving another non-variable system command is omitted. Also, scenario control data is not set for all commands. For example, when an error-related command indicating opening of a frame is received, the screen of the display device 41 is not changed, and setting of scenario control data is not performed.

Launch Touch Information Setting Process
Next, the firing touch information setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
In this firing touch information setting process, first, it is determined whether the data of MODE is a normal command (step D251). If the command is not normal (step D251; N), the process for setting the emission touch information is ended. If the command is normal (step D251; Y), it is determined whether it is a touch on command (a state on command to be prepared in step S307 for the touch switch signal and transmitted to the presentation control apparatus 300) (step D252) . If the command is a touch on command (step D252; Y), a firing flag is prepared (step D253), and the process proceeds to step D255. If it is not a touch on command (step D252; N), it is a touch off command (a state off command prepared for the touch switch signal in the step S304 and transmitted to the effect control device 300), so a shooting suspension flag is prepared. (Step D254), and the process proceeds to Step D255.

In step D255, it is determined whether the flag prepared in step D253 or D254 is the same as the value of the firing state flag area (step D255). The launch state flag area is an area for saving information of the launch state flag (in-launch flag or in-launch flag). Then, if the prepared flag is the same as the value of the firing state flag area (step D255; Y), the firing touch information setting process is ended. Here, if the prepared flag is the same as the value of the firing state flag area, the process returns because it is not necessary to save.
On the other hand, when the prepared flag is not the same as the value of the firing state flag area (step D255; N), the prepared flag is saved in the firing state flag area (step D256), and based on the firing state flag (ie, firing state) Based on the value of the flag area), it is determined whether it is in the process of being fired (step D257).

  Then, if it is not in the process of being fired (Step D 257; N), the process of setting the firing touch information is ended. If it is under fire (step D 257; Y), is the unfired state flag established (that is, is the information of the unfired state established flag saved in step D 337 described later saved in the unfired state flag area? ) (Step D258). If the unfired state flag is not established (step D258; N), the process of setting the fired touch information is ended. On the other hand, if the unfired state flag is established (step D258; Y), it is determined whether or not the low probability state (in the case of latent probability change, the low probability may be treated or the high probability may be treated) (step D259). ).

Then, if the low probability state is not in progress (step D259; N), the emission touch information setting process is ended. When it is in the low probability state (step D259; Y), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration effect is being performed (step D260). If the customer waiting demonstration effect is not being performed (step D260; N), the emission touch information setting process is ended. On the other hand, when the customer waiting demonstration effect is being performed (step D260; Y), the output setting of the welcome voice is performed (step D261), the screen drawing start setting of the welcome message is performed (step D262), and the firing touch information setting process is performed. finish.
According to the above-described firing touch information setting process, upon receiving a firing command (a status off command or a status on command related to a touch switch signal), the value of the firing status flag according to the command is set (steps D251 to D256). ).

Then, it is in the process of being launched (the command being launched is the state on command), the unfired condition satisfaction flag is saved (the unfired condition flag is fulfilled), the low probability condition is in progress, and customer demonstration effects are being produced. If all the conditions are satisfied, a welcome effect (output of a welcome voice and display of a welcome message on the screen 41a) is performed (step D257 to 262).
Here, in the state where the firing is in progress and the non-firing status flag is established, the touch (contact with the finger of the player or the like) on the firing operation handle 11 is longer than the non-firing prescribed time (for example, 3 minutes) described later Although not present, a touch on the firing operation handle 11 is detected after that (continuous touch prescribed time has not passed after the touch). The timing at the start of the launch from the non-playing state by making the condition of the start of the welcome effect the condition of being in such a state, and further, that during the low probability state and during the customer waiting demo effect as described above It is possible to ensure that the welcome effect is not performed when the welcome effect is well performed and the welcome effect should not be performed (during game, odd change, etc.). The welcome message is not limited to the text message display, and characters may appear. You may change the aspect of a character according to various game states.

  In the present embodiment, when power is turned on with RAM clear (when a command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 in step S30), the above welcome message is given to give priority to the RAM initialization notification. The function to output the (Welcome message function) is started unconditionally disabled (ie, when the gaming machine is started with RAM clear, for example, it is started from the state where the determination result in step D258 is NO) ). However, at the time of the power failure recovery (when the command at the time of the power failure recovery is transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 at step S25), the command of the display screen in the command at the time of the power failure recovery When the command (waiting demo command) is received, whether the welcome message function is valid or invalid is determined according to the command. Specifically, when a command for a customer waiting demo is transmitted as a command on the display screen at the time of power failure recovery (when restoration is performed on the customer waiting screen), the determination result in step D260 becomes YES. Start with the welcome message feature enabled. On the other hand, when the command on the power failure recovery screen is transmitted as the command on the display screen at the time of power failure recovery (when recovery is performed on the power failure recovery screen), the determination result in step D260 becomes NO, and the welcome message function It is started in the invalid state. As a result, the game is interrupted due to a power failure during the game, and then the player who resumes the game due to the power failure recovery can be made to resume the game comfortably. That is, since it can be assumed that the game has just been interrupted when it is possible to launch in the recovery screen, it is possible not to perform extra presentation (welcome message output) in such a case. it can.

Launch Information Control Process
Next, the emission information control process will be described with reference to FIG. In the launch information control process, launch related information is set based on the launch state flag, and the special view rotation state (the number of times of special figure fluctuation per game for a predetermined amount of money (that is, a predetermined number of lent balls)) I am performing mode correction of the production.
In this emission information control process, first, it is determined whether the emission state flag is in emission (that is, whether the information saved in the emission state flag area is the in-progress flag) (step D301). If the firing state flag is not firing (step D301; N), that is, if there is no contact with the firing operation handle 11 (touch-off state, a state in which firing is stopped), the process proceeds to step D317.
On the other hand, if the firing state flag is firing (step D301; Y), that is, if there is a touch on the firing operation handle 11 (touch on state), the value saved in the continuous touch timer area is +1 It updates (step D302), and determines whether the value of the continuous touch timer (that is, the value of the continuous touch timer area) is greater than or equal to the continuous touch prescribed time (eg, 3 minutes) (step D303).

If the value of the continuous touch timer is not equal to or longer than the continuous touch prescribed time (step D303; N), the process proceeds to step D305. If the value of the continuous touch timer is equal to or greater than the continuous touch prescribed time (step D303; Y), a process of setting an initial value of firing touch information is performed (step D304), and the process proceeds to step D305.
The continuous touch timer is updated by +1 in step D302 when the touch-on state is reached, and when the touch-off state becomes equal to or longer than the unemitted specified time described later in step D338 described later in the firing touch information initial value setting process (step D319 described later). It is a timer that is cleared to 0.

In step D305, it is determined whether the unit number emission monitoring wait timer (ie, the value of the unit number emission monitoring wait timer area) is 0 (step D305). If the unit number emission monitoring wait timer is not 0 (step D305; N), the value of the unit number emission monitoring wait timer area is updated by -1 (step D320), and the emission information control process is ended.
The unit number emission monitoring wait timer is set to an initial value (for example, 10 minutes) in step D 321 immediately before the mode correction condition determination described later (step D 324) is performed, and the above value is not 0 when the touch on state is reached. This is a timer that is updated by −1 in step D320. Once the mode correction condition is determined (step D324 described later) by the unit number emission monitoring wait timer, processing for mode correction (steps D306 to D316) is performed for a time corresponding to the initial value of the timer. Steps D321 to D325 are not performed.

  On the other hand, if the unit number emission monitoring wait timer is 0 (step D305; Y), it is determined whether the unit number emission monitoring timer (the value of the unit number emission monitoring timer area) is 0 (step D306). If the unit number emission monitoring timer is 0 (step D306; Y), the process proceeds to step D313. Then, when the unit number emission monitoring timer is not 0 (step D306; N), the value of the unit number emission monitoring timer area is updated by -1 (step D307), and it is determined again whether the unit number emission monitoring timer is 0 (Step D308).

It should be noted that the unit number emission monitoring timer is an initial value (for example, 150 seconds = 2.5) in step D341 described later in the emission touch information initial value setting process (step D319 described later) when the touchoff state becomes equal to or longer than the unemitted specified time described later. Minute) is set, and the timer is updated by one in step D307 when the unit number emission monitoring wait timer is 0 in the touch on state. This unit number firing monitoring timer is a game time portion (game time portion by firing only for the number of balls for bonusing) for monitoring a special figure rotation state (number of times of special figures fluctuation during game using the number of balls for predetermined amount of money). It is a first timer that defines a basic monitoring period.
Here, the initial value of the number-of-units emission monitoring timer is, for example, 250 × (60/100, since the number of firings is about 100 per minute, assuming a game with the number of balls for one thousand yen (250). ) = 150 (seconds). Although the effect control device 300 does not know the number of balls actually fired, by setting the time in this way, it is possible to monitor the number of times of special feature fluctuations during the game by the number of balls for a predetermined amount. However, the specific numerical value is not limited to the above aspect, and for example, the time value (initial value of the unit number emission monitoring timer) may be changed according to the ball unit price.

  If the unit number emission monitoring timer is not 0 (step D308; N), the process proceeds to step D313. When the unit number emission monitoring timer is 0 (step D308; Y), it is determined whether the number of starting opening winning command receptions during updating of the unit number emission monitoring timer is 0 (step D309). If the number of starting opening winning command received while updating the unit number emission monitoring timer is 0 (step D309; Y), the process proceeds to step D313. However, as a modification, when the number of starting opening winning commands received while updating the unit number emission monitoring timer is 0 (step D309; Y), the process may proceed to step D321 (described in detail later).

  Here, the process proceeds to step D309 through step D306 to step D308 when the unit number emission monitoring timer is updated by 1 from a non-zero state to -1, that is, the unit number emission monitoring timer is just this time It is when the time is up by the routine execution of the processing cycle, and the game time (for example, 150 seconds) at which the firing of the number of balls for the assumed predetermined amount of money ends is just elapsed. Therefore, in step S309, the basic monitoring period by the first timer is ended, and the number of starting opening winning commands received during that period (the number corresponding to the number of starting opening winnings) is checked. Here, to check the starting opening winning number, in addition to the game time (basic monitoring period) for firing the number of balls for the predetermined amount for the predetermined amount of money, the launched gaming ball wins in any starting winning opening Next, it is to monitor the game for the prize balls to be paid out. That is, in addition to the firing of the number of the lent balls for which the player has lent the predetermined amount to the ball lending machine, in addition to the firing of the number of lent balls lent by the deposited amount Since the game is also performed by the firing of the winning balls paid out by winning the winning opening), the game for the winning balls is to be monitored next.

For this reason, when the number of starting opening winning command receptions while updating the unit number firing monitoring timer is not 0 (step D309; N), the unit number firing monitoring extension timer value is calculated from the starting opening winning command reception number (step D310) The calculated timer value is saved in the unit number firing monitor extension timer area (step D311), the start opening winning command reception number area is cleared to 0 (step D312), and the process proceeds to step D313.
In addition, the number-of-units emission monitoring extension timer is a timer for monitoring the number of times of special figure fluctuation during the game for the prize ball due to the above-mentioned starting opening winning, and special figure rotation state (a predetermined amount of money It is a second timer that defines a game time (an extended time portion by a winning ball; an extended monitoring period) for monitoring a special figure fluctuation count per game).
Therefore, the initial value of this unit number emission monitoring extension timer is, for example, 3 × (60/100) = 1. It is 8 (seconds). For example, if the number of starting opening winning commands checked in step S309 (= number of starting opening winnings) is temporarily ten, the initial value of the unit number emission monitoring extension timer is calculated to be 18 seconds in step D310, and in step D310 The data of the timer corresponding to the 18 seconds is saved.

In step D313, it is determined whether the unit number emission monitoring extension timer is 0 (step D313). If the unit number emission monitoring extension timer is 0 (step D313; Y), the emission information control process is ended.
On the other hand, when the unit number emission monitoring extension timer is not 0 (step D313; N), the value of the unit number emission monitoring extension timer area is updated by -1 (step D314), and the unit number emission monitoring extension timer = 0 It is determined again (step D315). Then, if the unit number emission monitoring extension timer is not 0 (step D315; N), the emission information control process is ended in order to continue this monitoring even at the next processing cycle (next frame switching timing). On the other hand, if the unit number emission monitoring extension timer is 0 (step D315; Y), it is determined whether the number of starting opening winning commands received during updating of the unit number emission monitoring extension timer is 0 (step D316). If the number of starting opening winning command receptions during unit number emission monitoring extension timer updating is not 0 (step D316; N), the process returns to step D310 and repeats the same process as in step D310. Then, when the number of starting opening winning command receptions being updated during unit number emission monitoring extension timer is 0 (step D316; Y), the process proceeds to step D321.

  Here, the process proceeds to step D316 through step D313 to step D315 above when the unit number emission monitoring extension timer is updated from non-zero to -1 and becomes 0, that is, the unit number emission monitoring extension timer This is when the time is up due to the routine execution of the processing cycle (frame switching timing) this time, and it is the time when the game time for the winning balls set in step 311 has just passed. Therefore, in step S316, the first extension monitoring period (extension monitoring period 1) by the second timer is ended, and the number of starting opening winning command received during that period (the number corresponding to the number of starting opening winnings) is checked. There is. Here, the reason for checking the number of starting opening prizes is to further monitor again about the winning balls worth of the game balls fired in the extended monitoring period 1 are paid out in any starting winning opening and are paid out It is. Therefore, if it is determined in step D316 that the number of start mouth winning command reception is not 0, the process returns to step D310, the value of the unit number emission monitoring extension timer is calculated again and saved, and the second extension monitoring period (extension The monitoring period 2) is further configured to be monitored. Then, similarly in the same way, this extended monitoring period is “during a predetermined amount of money + interval, etc. until the number of start winning command receptions becomes zero in step D316, etc. It will be repeated until the firing for "total number of balls" is completed.

  On the other hand, the determination in step D301 is NO, and when the process proceeds to step D317, the value of the unfired timer area is updated by +1 (step D317), and the value of this unfired state timer (ie, saved in the unfired state timer area) It is determined whether or not the value being stored is equal to or more than a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) not yet fired (step D318). Then, if the unfired state timer (the value of the unfired state timer) is not longer than the predetermined time for unfired (step D318; N), the fire information control process is ended. If the unfired state timer is equal to or more than the prescribed time not yet fired (step D318; Y), firing touch information initial value setting processing is performed (step D319), and the firing information control processing is ended.

Then, after proceeding to step D316, in step D321, the timer initial value (eg, 10 minutes) is saved in the unit number emission monitoring wait timer area (step D321), and the number of revolutions per unit number is obtained from the special figure fluctuation frequency. Is determined (step D322), the rotation state mode is set from the determined number of rotations (step D323), and it is determined whether the mode correction condition is satisfied (step D324). If the mode correction condition is not satisfied (step D324; N), the emission information control process is ended. On the other hand, if the mode correction condition is satisfied (step D324; Y), the rotation state mode is corrected according to the mode correction condition (step D325), and the emission information control process is ended.
Here, the special figure fluctuation frequency is cleared to 0 in step D344 described later in the firing touch information initial value setting process when the touch-off state becomes equal to or more than the prescribed time not fired, and fluctuates when a normal fluctuation system command is received from the game control apparatus 100. This counter is updated by 1 in step D408 described later in the system command processing. In step D322, from the value of the number of times of special feature fluctuation, during the game due to the firing of the "preset amount of money + the total number of balls in between" (ie, the basic monitoring period and all the monitoring was performed extension During the game time obtained by adding up the monitoring period, the number of times of special pattern fluctuation (ie, the number of rotations per unit number) is determined.

According to the above-described firing information control process, the firing touch information initial value setting process described later is executed depending on whether the touch on the firing operation handle 11 is longer than the specified time or not. Various timer values and counter initial values are set and zero is cleared (steps D301 to D304, steps D317 to D319).
Then, if there is a touch on the firing operation handle 11 (if the firing state flag is firing), step D305 and subsequent steps are executed, and the above-described predetermined amount of money (predetermined number of lent balls) is executed by the processing up to step D322. The number of times of special feature fluctuation during the game (including the winning balls) for the minute, that is, for the number of unit balls is obtained. The method of calculating the number of times of special figure fluctuation is shown in the upper part of FIG. 120 in a sentence. Among the steps after the step D305, the determination of the number of times of the special figure fluctuation according to this calculation method is realized particularly by the steps D306 to D316 and the steps D321 to D322.

  Also, in the above steps D323 to D324, for example, with the contents shown in the lower part of FIG. 120 and FIG. 121 (state transition diagram) based on the number of times of special figure fluctuation per unit number (for example 250 balls for rent) determined in step D322. The correction of the rotation state mode is performed as necessary. The rotation state mode, unlike the effect mode, means the game states A, B and C shown in the lower part of FIG. 120 and FIG. Basically, when the number of special figure fluctuations per unit number is small (that is, the special figure rotation state is bad for the player), it shifts to the game state C and the rendering excess state (a special rendering that does not normally occur) The frequency of occurrence of etc. is high. This can promote the player's willingness to continue playing the game. Details are as shown in the lower part of FIG. 120 and FIG.

  The unit number emission monitoring wait timer is a third timer that monitors the number of times of special figure fluctuation per unit number and determines the execution interval of the operation for correcting the rotation state mode as necessary. For example, the initial value is set to 10 minutes, and monitoring of the next rotation state is set to 10 minutes later. This makes it possible to prevent adverse effects of continuous monitoring. That is, if continuous monitoring is performed, for example, the mode changes every time a thousand yen is inserted, but such a problem can be solved by this third timer. However, when continuous monitoring is desired, the initial value of the third timer may be set to a small value, and such an aspect may be possible.

  Further, in the above-mentioned launch information control process, when the number of starting opening winnings under monitoring of the first timer is zero, the process proceeds from step D309 to step D313, and the process returns from step D313. (In that case, the unit number emission monitoring extension timer is 0). In this case, in this case, in the present example, it is an aspect of returning as a result, since no special feature fluctuation is performed at all in such a case. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and in the case where step D309 is YES, the process proceeds to step D321 to execute the processing after step D321, and the number of starting opening winnings under monitoring of the first timer is zero. Even in this case, the number of special figure fluctuations per unit number is determined, and it is determined whether or not the predetermined mode correction condition (FIG. 120 lower stage and FIG. 121 step D 325) is applicable. It may be a mode to execute. In this way, for example, when a predetermined amount of money is used to play a game and there is a player who has made a predetermined amount of money again and continued to play, there is an effect in the special figure fluctuation effect by the subsequent start hole winning. Since the effect by the excess state is executed, such player can further promote the motivation to continue the game thereafter. The starting opening winning a prize zero is a rare case, and if the starting opening winning a prize is zero, the normal player changes the stand (individual gaming machine) if it is a starting opening winning a prize If this is the case, there may be a case as described above.

[Fired touch information initial value setting process]
Next, the firing touch information initial value setting process executed in steps D304 and D319 in the shooting information control process will be described with reference to FIG.
In this firing touch information initial value setting process, first, similarly to step D301 described above, it is determined whether or not the firing state flag is being fired (step D331). If the firing state flag is firing (step D331; Y), save the continuous touch specified time value (eg, 3 minutes) in the continuous touch timer area (step D332), and continuously touch the continuous touch condition flag area. The establishment flag is saved (step D333), the unfired state timer area is cleared to 0 (step D334), and the unfired condition non-established flag is saved in the unfired state flag area (step D335). Finish.

On the other hand, if the firing status flag is not firing (step D331; N), save the non-firing prescribed time (e.g. 3 minutes) in the non-firing status timer region (step D336) and have not fired at the non-firing status flag region. The condition satisfaction flag is saved (step D 337), the continuous touch timer area is cleared to 0 (step D 338), and the continuous touch condition non-establishment flag is saved in the continuous touch condition flag area (step D 339). It is cleared to 0 (step D340).
Subsequently, after step D340, the timer initial value (for example, 150 seconds) is saved in the unit number emission monitoring timer area (step D341), and the unit number emission monitoring wait timer area is cleared to 0 (step D342). The winning command reception number area is cleared to 0 (step D343), the special figure fluctuation number area is cleared to 0 (step D344), and the firing touch information initial value setting process is ended.

  The ball rental use amount information is information on the ball rental use amount (the accumulated value of the amount used by the player for the ball rental), and the amount of balls to be used is proportional to the accumulated value of the number of balls borrowed by the player. Equivalent to. In this embodiment, after the player has played the game (touched the launch operation handle 11) for a predetermined time or more, the effect is changed when the effect change condition including the condition of releasing the hand from the launch operation handle 11 (touch off) is satisfied. (Described later in detail), since this effect change condition includes the condition that the above-mentioned sphere rental use amount exceeds the prescribed amount, this sphere rental use amount information is managed. Then, in the step D340, it is determined that the player has stopped playing the game, and the ball lending use amount information is cleared to 0 so that, for example, the amount of the ball lending by another player is not added. When it is determined that the ball lending operation of the player has been made, this sphere lending use monetary amount information is incremented by the unit amount in step D363 described later.

[Sphere lend information setting process]
Next, the sphere lending information setting process executed in step D235 of the one-shot system command process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the sphere lending information setting process, first, it is determined whether the sphere lending button pressing command determined in step D234 described above is a normal command (step D361). If the command is not normal (step D361; N), the ball lending information setting process is ended. On the other hand, if the command is normal (step D361; Y), the unit amount information is set based on the ball lending unit number information set in the above-mentioned hole setting mode (step D101) (step D362). The unit money amount information is added to the value of the sphere rental use amount information area (step D363), and the sphere rental information setting process is ended.

By the above processing, as long as the game continues (unless the touch-off state from the firing operation handle 11 becomes the non-fired prescribed time or more), every time the player performs the ball lending operation (ball lending button pressed), The ball rental use amount information is increasing (ie, the total amount of the lent balls is accumulated).
Here, the ball lending unit number information is information corresponding to information (unit price information) of the amount of money used by pressing the ball lending button once (information capable of obtaining unit price information from the information, unit price information itself) May be). The ball lending unit number information corresponds to an increase in the lent ball amount due to one payout operation of the lent ball. The registered value of the increased amount of the lent ball amount (that is, the lent ball unit number information) can be rewritten in the game arcade (hole) in the above-mentioned hole setting mode (see step D101).

[Design system command processing]
Next, the details of the symbol system command processing executed in step D180 in the above-described received command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, at step D371, a special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure) corresponding to the data of MODE (the upper byte data separated at step D171 described above, the same applies to step D372 described later). Set 2) information. For example, when the data of MODE is 85h, the special figure 1 is set as the special figure type, and when the data of MODE is 86h, the special figure 2 is set as the special figure type. As described above, since it is possible to determine whether the special view 1 or the special view 2 is the data of MODE, in this step D 371, the special view type is determined and set from the data of MODE.

Next, in step D372, the symbol type corresponding to the combination of MODE and ACT is set and saved, and then the process returns (that is, the symbol system command processing is ended).
Specifically, in step D372, a symbol type setting table corresponding to the data of MODE is set. The symbol type setting table is a table for determining symbol types corresponding to symbol commands (for example, categories such as off symbol, 16R positive variation big hit symbol, 2R positive variation big hit symbol, 11R normal big hit symbol, ...), It is the table in which the correspondence of the data (for example, there are 11 types of 11h-1Bh) of symbol command, and symbol classification is defined. Since the symbol ratio changes in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 (the probability change ratio is the same), this symbol type setting table is provided separately for each MODE, and in step D372, first, a plurality of symbol type setting tables Select and set the corresponding data.

Next, in step D372, based on the set symbol type setting table, the symbol type corresponding to ACT data (data of lower byte separated in the above-mentioned step D171) is acquired and saved as symbol type information.
In addition, the information on the special drawing type and the symbol type set in step D371 or D372 in this way upon receiving the symbol command is described later for the variation command which becomes a group received subsequent to the symbol command (or before the symbol command) It is used in the processing of steps D401 and D402. Then, even if the information of the special view type is used for the determination in step D401, the data set in step D371 is stored and held until step D371 is newly executed. Further, even after the information of the symbol type is used in step D402, the data previously set in step D372 is stored and held until step D372 is newly executed.
As described above, according to this routine, the special figure type and the symbol type are set each time a symbol system command is received.

[Variable system command processing]
Next, the details of the variable system command processing executed in step D176 in the received command analysis processing described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D401 whether the special drawing type is unconfirmed, and if unconfirmed, the process returns, and if not, the step D402 is performed. At step D403, the combination of the variation command and the symbol command is checked, and the process proceeds to step D403. The special view type is information indicating whether the special view type is special view 1 or special view 2, and is information set in step D371 described above of the symbol system command processing.

In step D403, it is determined whether or not the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent, and if it is inconsistent, the process returns. If it is not inconsistent, the process returns after executing steps D404 to D408.
The symbol type means a category of symbols, and as described above, the symbol types include, for example, a detached symbol, a 16R probability variation big hit symbol and the like. In addition, the inconsistency in step D403 mentioned above contradicts in rendering, for example, when the symbol command of 16R positive variation big hit symbol is received even though the variation command (variation pattern command) of out of phase is received. It means that it is a combination (combination of variation command and symbol type). That is, at step D402, a check is made to see if the variation pattern command matches the stop symbol, and the process branches at step D403 according to the result.

Then, in step D404, a variation pattern type (a rough classification of variation display effects of a special figure, determined by variation pattern type data) according to the received command is determined.
In step D405, in order to produce an effect corresponding to the fluctuation command, fluctuation effect setting processing (described later) is executed.
Further, in step D406, the special figure variation middle is set as the P machine state (the state of the pachinko machine). Here, “during special figure fluctuation” indicates that the special figure is being displayed in a fluctuating manner (during a customer demonstration or during a big hit, or not being fanfare middle grade, etc.).
In step D407, if the pre-reading effect frequency (pre-reading execution frequency) is not zero, processing to update the pre-reading effect frequency by one (processing to reduce the pre-reading effect frequency by 1) is executed. Here, the reason for updating the number of pre-reading effect times by -1 is that step D407 is executed when a valid change system command is received (from here on, change of the special figure is started and the number of start prize storages is one) (When it decreases).
Then, in step D408, the number of times of the special figure fluctuation described above (the counter used in step D322) is updated by +1. Since this step D408 is executed each time the special figure fluctuation display is started, the special figure fluctuation number for counting the number of times of execution of the special figure fluctuation display is updated by +1 here.

[Change production setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation effect setting process executed in step D405 in the above-described fluctuation system command process will be described with reference to FIGS.
When this routine is started, first, in step D421, it is determined whether the variation pattern type data determined in step D404 of variation system command processing is a no reach variation, and if no reach variation, steps D422 and D423 are sequentially After execution, the process proceeds to step D426, and if it is not a no reach fluctuation, steps D424 and D425 are sequentially performed, and then the process proceeds to step D426.
At step D422, the emission related information (to be described later) set at the time, the model code, the special view type, and the first half advance distribution group address table (not shown) corresponding to the effect mode at that time are set. In addition, when it progresses to step D422, it is a change without reach, and since symbol classification is sure to be a lost pattern, symbol classification may not be referred in particular in step D422.
The effect mode corresponds to a game mode managed by the effect control device 300 (in the present embodiment, a command for the game mode is also sent from the game control device), which naturally differs depending on the model, but in this example the basic mode In addition to (K), there are, for example, a military mode, a decisive battle mode, and the like.

The first-half advance notice group address table is a table for selecting the address of the first-half advance notice group group table to be described later, and data of the addresses of the first-half advance notice group group table are arranged in a matrix. In this first half of the previous day distribution group address table, the data in each row of the table corresponds to the same value of MODE (data specifying the first half variation pattern). Then, when the variation pattern type is no reach variation, the same hold number (number of start winning memory in which the variation display game of the special figure has not been executed) is displayed in each row of the first half notice distribution group address table. Corresponding data is arranged. That is, in the first half of the case, in the case of no reach fluctuation, the group address table for determining the row has the value of MODE, and the parameter for determining the column has the pending number. On the other hand, when the variation pattern type is other than the no reach variation, data corresponding to the same variation pattern type is arranged in each column of the first half of the first half of the day prior distribution group address table. That is, in the first half of the case, in the case of non-reach variation, the group address table for determining the row has the value of MODE as the parameter for determining the row, and the parameter for determining the column is the variation pattern type.
Thereby, in the case of the present example, the lottery contents of the notice effect (specifically, the appearance rate of each notice effect mode) appearing during each change is changed according to the number of reservations only in the case of no reach fluctuation. become. For example, in the case of non-reach fluctuation, as the number of reservations increases, the fluctuation time is shortened.

In step D423, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the pending number of the MODE and the special view type is acquired based on the first half notice distribution group address table set in step D422.
Specifically, the address of the line corresponding to the value of MODE (the value separated at step D171, and so on) is calculated as the address of the line of the set first half advance notice distribution group address table. Next, the address of the column corresponding to the number of reservations of the special view type at that time is calculated as the address of the column of the set first half notice distribution group address table. Then, based on these calculation results, the address of the first half advance distribution group table is acquired from the position of the corresponding row and column in the corresponding first half advance distribution group address table.

On the other hand, in step D424, the first half of the day prior distribution group address table corresponding to the firing related information (described later), the model code, the special view type, the symbol type, and the effect mode at that time are set. .
Next, in step D425, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and the variation pattern type is acquired based on the first half notice distribution group address table set in step D424.
Specifically, the address of the line corresponding to the value of MODE is calculated as the address of the line of the set first half advance notice group address table. Next, the address of the column corresponding to the variation pattern type at that time (data determined in step D404, the same applies hereinafter) is calculated as the column address of the set first-half advance notice distribution group address table. Then, based on these calculation results, the address of the first half advance distribution group table is acquired from the position of the corresponding row and column in the corresponding first half advance distribution group address table.

In step D426, a first-half notice distribution group table of the address acquired in the immediately preceding step D423 or D425 is used to execute a notice lottery process (a lottery for notice effect by random numbers) for first-half fluctuation. According to the preliminary lottery process, the distribution result is selected in advance for all the preliminary distribution types set in the first half preliminary distribution group table, and various information for designating the contents of the effect corresponding to the distribution result is in advance. It will be respectively stored in a predetermined storage area.
According to the processing up to the above step D426, the address of the first half advance distribution group table is selected, and based on the selected first half advance distribution group table, the advance lottery process (previous lottery process of first half fluctuation) in step D426 is performed. To be executed. Here, in the first half of the early warning distribution group table, the address of one preliminary warning distribution table and the address of the result area of one effect distribution result corresponding to the address are arranged in a plurality corresponding to the same row. It is. A very large number of different distribution patterns (lottery for determining the presence / absence and mode of the preview effect) to be performed for one variable display game are executed depending on the fluctuation pattern, and the distribution table of the preliminary distribution group table accordingly The number of lines is also huge.

Here, the firing related information referred to in the above steps D422 and D424 includes at least the information of the firing state flag described above (the firing in progress flag indicating the touch state to the firing operation handle 11, or the firing stop indicating the touch off state) Information on flag), information on continuous touch status flag (information saved at step D339), and sphere rental use amount information (information updated at step D363) are included.
Then, in the above-described steps D422 and D424, the first-half advance notice distribution group address table to be selected is changed according to the emission related information including the above information. As a result, the effect is changed by the establishment of a predetermined effect change condition (for example, the frequency of occurrence of a special advance effect is increased). In this embodiment, after the player has played the game (touched the launch operation handle 11) for a predetermined time or more, the effect change condition including the condition (first condition) that the hand is released (touched off) from the launch operation handle 11 is satisfied. A condition (second condition) is also included in which the effect is changed, and the sphere change usage amount exceeds the specified amount in this effect change condition. In addition, the condition (third condition) that there is only 1 special figure reserve (special figure start winning memory) corresponding to the special figure variation (special figure variation about to start from now on) which is going to change the effect is It may be included in this effect change condition. In the table selection in steps D422 and D424, the table to be selected changes depending on whether such conditions (for example, all of the second condition and the third condition in addition to the first condition) are satisfied, and as a result The contents are changed.

  The condition that the player plays the game (touching the firing operation handle 11) for a predetermined time or more and then releases the hand from the firing operation handle 11 (touches off) can be determined by the firing state flag and the continuous touch state flag. That is, when the firing state flag is the firing-stopping flag and the continuous touch condition flag is the continuous touch condition satisfaction flag, the touch operation is not performed at this time, so that the player's finger or the like does not touch the firing operation handle 11. Until the predetermined time (in a time shorter than the above-mentioned specified time not yet fired), there is a touch on the firing operation handle 11. Therefore, in steps D422 and D424, assuming that the firing condition flag is the firing suspension flag and the continuous touch condition flag is the continuous touch condition satisfaction flag, it is assumed that the aforementioned first condition is satisfied, and the remaining second conditions and If the third condition is satisfied, table selection is performed so as to change the contents of the effect. The effect change condition may be a mode in which the success or failure is determined only by the first condition (a mode without the second condition or the third condition), or an embodiment in which the success or failure is determined by the first condition and the second condition. Alternatively, there may be an aspect in which the success or failure is determined by the first condition and the third condition, or an aspect in which another condition is added.

Next, after performing step D426, steps D427 to D429 are executed.
Steps D 427 to D 429 are processes for drawing a notice effect of the latter half fluctuation. In addition, with the second half fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game, it fluctuates in the so-called reach action (for example, the special result aspect (combination of special symbols) where the display area excluding the specific area becomes big hit among the display areas of the special figure) The display is stopped, and it is a fluctuation display of the state which is fluctuating display only in a specific field. On the other hand, the first half of the variation display game of the special figure is variation display before the start of the reach action.
In step D427, the second half of the previous minute sorting group address table corresponding to the launch related information, model code, special view type, symbol type, and effect mode at that time are set, and the process proceeds to step D428. .
Here, the second half notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting the address of the second half notice distribution group table, and data of the second half notice distribution group table address is arranged for each variation pattern type. That is, in the second half of the last minute distribution group address table, data of each row of the table correspond to each variation pattern type.

In step D428, the address of the second half of the previous day distribution group table corresponding to ACT is acquired. Specifically, the address of the second half of the last minute sorting group table is acquired from the position of the line corresponding to the variation pattern type at that time in the second half of the last day sorting distribution group address table set in the immediately preceding step D427.
Next, in step D429, a lottery for a preliminary announcement that appears during the second half fluctuation (during reach) is performed. That is, for the second half change, the notice lottery processing (lottery of the notice effect by random numbers) is executed using the second half notice distribution group table of the address acquired in step D428.
According to the preliminary lottery process, the distribution result is selected in advance for all the preliminary distribution types set in the second half of the preliminary distribution group table prepared in step D428, and the effect contents according to the distribution result are displayed. Various types of information to be designated are stored in advance in predetermined storage areas.

  According to the process from step D427 to step D429, the address of the second half of the last minute sorting group table is selected, and the last time lottery process of step D429 based on the selected second half half of the day sorting group table Processing is performed. Then, at the time of selection of the second half of the last minute sorting group address table in step D427, the above-mentioned emission related information is referred to in the same manner as in the first half fluctuation, To be realized.

Next, after step D429, the process proceeds to step D431.
At step D431, a basic BGM number (song number of the basic BGM) corresponding to the effect mode and a decoration number (number indicating the type of effect by a decoration lamp (LED) or the like) are set, and then the process proceeds to step D432. It should be noted that the BGM and the decoration during normal change change for each of the effect modes. In this step D431, the default in each mode is first set. If it changes to special BGM and decoration by a notice etc., it has become a structure changed by the scenario table.

In step D432, it is determined whether or not the first-half fluctuation type determined in the process up to this point (in particular step D426) is pseudo ream 3. If pseudo ream 3, the process proceeds to step D433; In step 103, the process proceeds to the step of another process (not shown by broken lines) (the process of various fluctuations when the first-half fluctuation type is not pseudo run 3). The pseudo ream 3 is a specific example in the case where the above-mentioned effect change condition is satisfied and a special notice effect (for example, an effect with a low appearance rate or an appearance rate of zero in a normal state) is performed. As a display example of is a type in which effect display as shown in FIG. 112 and FIG. 113 is performed.
The first-half fluctuation type is the fluctuation advance notice type assigned by the effect control device side in the same MODE (for example, the first 12 seconds normal fluctuation). Further, in order to avoid complication, only the situation of the advance notice distribution in the case where the above-mentioned effect change condition is satisfied and the first half change type is the pseudo ream 3 is described in the flowchart (FIG. 103). Then, the processing of various fluctuations (including normal fluctuations) when the first half fluctuation type is not pseudo run 3 is a step after the flow when the determination result in step D432 is NO (omitted by broken lines in FIG. 103) Although it is executed, after the processing after this flow is executed, the process proceeds to step D437.

  In step D433, it is determined whether the notice type (data of effect distribution result area; notice data) determined in the processing up to this point (in particular, steps D426 and D429, and so on) designates the selected pseudo-run. If it is not a selection pseudo link, the processing proceeds to the case where another advance notice effect is selected (omitted by a broken line in FIG. 103), and then the process proceeds to step D437, and if it is a selection pseudo link, steps D434 and D435, After D436 is sequentially executed, the process proceeds to step D437.

Here, in step D434, scenario layer No. 5 is prepared, in step D435, a scenario table for selected pseudo continuous PB presentation is prepared, in step D436, scenario data setting processing is performed on the prepared scenario table, and then in step D437. move on.
As described above, the scenario data setting process is to be executed in a scenario management storage area ("scenario management area address area" and "scenario management area") corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number. This is processing for setting scenario control data for presentation.
In these steps D434 to D436, scenario control data for performing "button press effect" at the time of selecting a route is set.

In step D437, it is determined whether the special drawing type is special drawing 2 or not. If special drawing 2, steps D438 and D439 are executed, and then step D442 is performed. In the case of step D440 and step D441, the process proceeds to step D442.
At step D438, the special figure 2 pending scenario table information corresponding to the special figure 2 pending number is set.
In step D439, the fourth symbol (special figure 2 variation) scenario table information is set.
At step D440, the special view 1 suspension scenario table information corresponding to the special view 1 suspension number is set.
In step D441, the fourth symbol (special figure 1 variation) scenario table information is set.
Steps D438, D439 or D440, D441 set scenario control data regarding the animation whose retention (special view start memory) decreases.

Next, proceeding to step D442, it is determined whether or not the data of MODE (data of the first half fluctuation pattern) separated in step D171 instructs pseudo reciprocation 3 fluctuation, and if pseudo reciprocation 3 fluctuation is instructed Proceeding to step D443, if it is not a command to give a pseudo run 3 change command, the process proceeds to another step omitted in dashed lines in FIG.
Note that after the flow when the determination result in step D442 is NO (a dotted line is omitted), processing similar to steps D443, D444, etc. is executed for the variable display effect when the data of the MODE is other than the above. If the MODE data does not correspond to any of the above, it is abnormal and the process returns.

At step D443, it is determined whether the data of ACT (second-half fluctuation pattern) separated at step D171 instructs "SP4 deviance", and if "SP4 deviance", SP4 deviating setting process is executed at step D444. After that, the process returns, and if not "SP4 is not out", the process proceeds to step D445. In addition, SP4 deviation setting processing is processing including scenario data setting processing for performing the latter half fluctuation presentation of "SP4 deviation".
In step D445, it is determined whether the data of ACT is to instruct "SP3 deviance". If "SP3 deviance", the process returns to SP3 after deviating setting process in step D446, and is not "SP3 deviance" To the other steps omitted in FIG. In addition, SP3 deviation setting processing is processing including scenario data setting processing for performing the latter half fluctuation presentation of "SP3 deviation".
In addition, after the flow where the determination result in step D445 is NO (where the illustration is omitted by a broken line), the other reach effects (for example, including a change display effect in the case of a big hit) in the case of the pseudo reciprocity 3 change are included in step D445. The processing similar to that of D446 is executed, and if the data of the ACT does not correspond to any of them, the processing is abnormal because it is abnormal.

[Specific example of effect display, etc.]
Next, specific examples of effect display performed on the display unit 41a (screen) of the display device 41 under the control of the effect control device 300 described above will be described with reference to FIGS.
First, FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the settable volume adjustment range, which has already been described in the step D52 and the like (sound control processing).

Next, FIG. 105 is a specific example of the hole setting screen. As described in steps D57 and D60 (sound control processing), a picture of the effect button 9 is displayed at the lower part of the screen, and an explanation display of the operation method is performed. Cursor up / down operation (selection operation of an item to be an active menu) becomes possible by touching the finger to the back side (upper side) or the front side (lower side) of the effect button 9 upper surface, and the left or right side of the effect button 9 upper surface It is described in the display that the cursor left / right operation (setting change of the item which is the active menu, etc.) becomes possible by touching it. And although the steps D94 to D104 and the like (hall / player setting mode processing) have been described, various setting items are displayed above the display location of the operation method of the hole setting screen, that is, "volume setting" from above The items of “LED brightness setting”, “liquid crystal brightness setting”, “power saving setting”, “logo color setting”, “return to normal screen”, and “factory default setting” are displayed. Although not shown in FIG. 105, the item of “Set ball rental unit number setting” for setting the above-mentioned ball rental unit number is also displayed, and a store clerk or the like in the hall can arbitrarily select this ball rental unit number. It can be set.
As described above, for example, when the PUSH button (effect button 9) is pressed twice while the glass frame 5 is opened during the customer waiting demo, the hall setting mode is entered, and the hall setting screen is displayed. The contents set in the mode are stored in the backup memory (for example, the FeRAM 327).

Next, FIG. 106 shows a specific example of the player setting screen. As in the case of the hall setting screen, a picture of the effect button 9 is displayed at the lower part of the screen to display an explanation of the operation method. And although the steps D109 to D112 and the like (hall / player setting mode processing) have been described, various setting items are displayed above the display location of the operation method of the player setting screen, that is, "volume setting" Each item of “brightness setting” and “return” is displayed. In the volume setting, the player can change the setting of the volume setting (ie, adjust the volume) in, for example, the above-described 10-step range, and a bar-like bar graph in which 10 bar portions corresponding to each step are arranged as shown in the figure. The present setting value is displayed in real time in the display of. Further, the brightness etc. of the display section 41a (screen) can be adjusted, for example, in a 10-step range by the brightness setting, and the current setting value is displayed in the form of a bar graph as well. In FIG. 106, the item "volume setting" indicates the state of the active menu, the item "volume setting" is displayed brighter than the items "brightness setting" and "return", and a female character appears. It is displayed on the balloon that "you can adjust the volume" and explains that it is the active menu.
As described above, for example, when the PUSH button is pressed once during the customer waiting demo, the player setting mode is entered, and the player setting screen is displayed. The contents set in the mode are not stored in the backup memory. When the power is turned on again or the game is not played for a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes), the value is switched to the same value as the hall setting value.

  Next, FIG. 107 shows a state of display on the display section 41a when the volume SW 338 is switched during the customer waiting demo. Although explained in step D53 and the like (sound control processing), when the volume SW 338 is switched during the customer waiting demo shown in the upper stage, a hall volume setting screen as shown in the middle or lower stage is displayed. In the hall volume setting screen, items of "volume setting" and "return" are displayed. In the "volume setting", the current setting value is displayed by the bar graph display as in the player setting screen, but in this hole volume setting screen, numerical values indicating the volume on the lower side of each of ten bar-shaped portions Is displayed. When the volume SW 338 is switched to, for example, the “small” (minimum setting) described above, the range in which the player can also adjust becomes “0” to “9” as shown in FIG. The numbers from “9” to “9” are displayed below the bar graph display. When the volume SW 338 is "small", the above-described default value is "4", so that in the middle part of FIG. 107, four bar-like parts from the left are displayed brighter than others, for example. (Alternatively, it may be displayed darker than others, or it may be distinguished according to a different color, etc.), whereby it is displayed that the current hall volume value is "4" which is the default value.

Then, for example, when the volume SW 338 is subsequently switched to the above-described “high” (maximum setting), the range in which the player can also adjust becomes “11” to “20” as shown in FIG. The numbers "11" to "20" are displayed below the bar graph display. When the volume SW 338 is "high", the above-described default value is "15", so that four bar-like parts from the left in the bar graph display are displayed brighter than, for example, the lower in FIG. (Alternatively, it may be displayed darker than others, or it may be distinguished according to a different color, etc.), and it is displayed that the current hall volume value is “15” which is the default value.
Even when the volume SW 338 is switched to another setting, the hall volume setting screen is displayed according to the same principle. Then, as described in the steps D60 to D63, the hole volume is different from the default value within the adjustable range at that time by the hall clerk or the like operating the cursor in the state that the hole volume setting screen is displayed thereafter. When the value is adjustable and adjusted, the bar graph display is switched in real time to a display indicating the adjusted hall volume.

Next, in the upper part of FIG. 108, there is a handle touch (a touch of a player's finger or the like on the launch operation handle 11, and the same applies hereinafter), and a mountain image is displayed on the background. The display unit 41a is shown in a state where the special drawing starts to change with three drawings reserved. In the figure, reference signs H1 to H4 indicate the status of four special drawing reservations (starting storage of special drawings), and in this case, a circular image in black (filled) indicates holding is present. The dotted white circle (no fill) circular image indicates no hold. In the case of the upper stage of FIG. 108, since the number of reservations is reduced by one due to the start of the special figure fluctuation, the suspension indications H1 and H2 are blackened, indicating that the number of reservations is two. A symbol H0 is a pending change indication that starts a special feature change and indicates a pending change. When the special figure variation ends and the suspension becomes 0, as shown in the lower part of FIG. In addition, reference symbols KTL, KTC, and KTR indicate the left pattern of the decorative special figure, the middle pattern of the decorative special figure, and the right pattern of the decorative special figure, respectively. In the case of the upper part of FIG. 108, since it is changing, it is indicated by a thick arrow pointing downward (in this case, the scroll direction). Further, reference numeral T14 denotes a fourth symbol of the special drawing 1, reference numeral T24 denotes a fourth symbol of the special drawing 2, and reference numeral F4 denotes a common drawing (decorative drawing).
As described above, the suspension display H1 to H4, the suspension display H0 during variation, the left pattern KTL of the decoration special figure, the middle pattern KTC of the decoration special figure, the right pattern KTR of the decoration special figure, the fourth pattern T14 of the special figure 1, the special Each symbol of the fourth symbol T24 of FIG. 2 and the decorative drawing F4 is illustrated only in the upper part of this FIG. 108, and in order to avoid complication, in the other diagrams (diagram showing the display portion 41a (screen)) these symbols Illustration of is omitted. In addition, depending on the state of the effect display, the left symbol KTL, the middle symbol KTC, and the right symbol KTR of the special drawing may not be displayed at the center of the screen, for example, as shown in the middle of FIG. is there.

Next, in the middle part of FIG. 108, reach (that is, reach action, the same applies hereinafter) occurs from the state of the upper part of FIG. 108, and the button image (code omitted) written “PUSH”, character image Z1, and “button Is displayed on the screen, and the display unit 41a is shown in a state (there is a handle touch) in which the reach effect using the effect button 9 is started. In addition, since it is reach, for example, as shown in the figure, it becomes "4, 、, 4", and the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, and only the middle symbol KTC is changing. .
Next, in the lower part of FIG. 108, the button effect is performed from the state in the middle of FIG. 108, and the image Z2 of the character climbing the mountain hard is displayed according to the operation that the player presses the effect button 9, The display unit 41a is shown in a state where there is an effect of the reach to be used (handle touch is present).

Next, in the upper part of Fig. 109, reach is finished from the state of the lower part of Fig. 108, and the middle design KTC of the special figure stops at "5", and the combination of the marks becomes "4, 5, 4" The display unit 41a is shown in a state in which the image Z3 of the character falling from a mountain or the like is displayed (with a handle touch).
Next, the middle part of FIG. 109 shows the display unit 41a in the state (with the handle touch is present) in which the special figure variation has started with two pieces of hold from the state of the upper part of FIG.
Next, the lower part of FIG. 109 shows the display part 41a in a state (with the handle touch is present) in which the special drawing variation ends without reaching the movement from the state of the middle part of FIG.

Next, the upper part of FIG. 110 shows the display unit 41a in the state (with the handle touch is present) in which the special figure change has started with one pending from the state of the lower part of FIG.
Next, the middle part of FIG. 110 shows the display unit 41a in a state (with a handle touch) in the special figure changing from the state in the upper part of FIG.
Next, in the lower part of FIG. 110, from the state in the middle of FIG. 110, the special figure variation ends without reach and comes off (the combination of symbols becomes “4, 5, 1” (handle touch is present) display part 41a Is shown.

Next, the upper portion of FIG. 111 shows the display portion 41a in a state where the game (the launch of the game ball) is continued with the handle touch from the state of the lower portion of FIG.
Next, the lower part of FIG. 111 shows the display portion 41a in a state (with the handle touch is present) in which there is a starting hole winning from the state of the upper part of FIG.
As described above with reference to FIGS. 108 to 111, when handle touch continues in a normal state, reach occurs at a predetermined rate, but there is a possibility that a special preview effect may appear to make a player strongly expect a big hit. Is much lower or zero.

  Next, the upper part of FIG. 112 shows the display part 41a when the special figure change starts with one hold from the state of the lower part of FIG. 109, but there is no handle touch. In this case, since the steering wheel touch disappears after the steering wheel touch has passed for a specified time and there is a special figure fluctuation corresponding to the last hold (remaining one start winning memory storage), The above-mentioned effect change condition is established if the ball rental used amount of money (calculated at step D363) exceeds the prescribed amount, and selection is made by control based on the emission related information described at steps D422, D427, etc. The mode is shifted to a special mode in which the notice distribution group address table changes, and the possibility that a special notice effect causing, for example, a player to strongly predict a big hit will appear is increased. For example, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 112, a notice effect of a special effect “flame mode” is started in which an image Z4 of a dragon (in this case, a dragon blowing a fire) or an image Z5 of a flame is displayed. .

Next, in the middle part of FIG. 112, the special effect proceeds from the state in the upper part of FIG. 112, and the image Z6 or the like including the character “Fire mode generated !!” is displayed to inform the player The display unit 41a of FIG.
Next, in the lower part of FIG. 112, the image Z6 disappears from the state in the middle of FIG. 112, and the image Z7 showing that the "flame mode" is in progress at the upper edge of the screen (for example, characters such as A moving image (flowing sideways) is displayed, and the display portion 41a is shown in a state in which the special figure is fluctuating while the special rendering continues (without the handle touch).

Next, in the upper part of FIG. 113, from the state of the lower part of FIG. 112, in addition to the image Z6 containing the characters “fire mode generation !!”, the game continuation “game ball is changed to MAX within ○ rotation! An image Z8 or the like including characters prompting the launch) is displayed, and the display unit 41a is shown in a state (there is no handle touch) in which a further developed next special effect (for example, step-up effect) is started.
Next, in the middle part of FIG. 113, the image Z4 of the special character Dragon (standby state) is displayed again from the state of the upper part of FIG. 113, and the next special effect is in progress (no handle touch) The display unit 41a of FIG.
Next, in the lower part of FIG. 113, from the state in the middle of FIG. 113, the player restarts the game and there is a starting hole winning, and the image Z4 of the dragon blowing a flame is displayed and The display section 41a is shown in a state (with a handle touch) in which a special pre-reading advance notice is given by the hold display H1 generated at step h. In this case, a rhombus-shaped image Z9 expressing a stuttering is displayed around the black reserve display H1, and it is thus possible for the player to be highly likely that the next reserve special figure fluctuation will be a big hit. It is reported to.

As described above, when there is a handle touch for a certain period of time and there is no handle touch and the effect change condition is satisfied, there is a high probability that the special notice effect that makes the player strongly expect a big hit, and further, stop the game An effect that strongly impresses the player with a high possibility of shifting to an advantageous state by continuing without appearing appears to urge the handle touch (fire operation, game continuation).
The special effect is not limited to the specific example described above, and may be, for example, a special effect relating to the execution of the variable display game, such as "Please reach within ○ rotation". In addition, after a special effect is generated in a state where there is no handle touch and a display prompting the handle touch is performed, the effect may be changed when there is a handle touch, or the touch is continued. If something happens, the timer countdown effect (action to make it appear to be advantageous if it is touched until the timer reaches 0 (if it is fired and stored)) or special effect step up etc. May be

Next, FIG. 114 shows a display example of the display section 41 a in the case of transitioning to customer waiting demonstration effect after the end of the special figure fluctuation, and further transition to the player setting screen.
The upper part of FIG. 114 shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative special drawing is finished and the stop symbols “4, 5, 4” are displayed.
The middle part of FIG. 114 shows a state in which a game waiting demonstration command is transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 and the screen (the customer waiting screen) in the customer waiting demonstration is displayed in the step D208. The display of the customer waiting screen is performed after a predetermined wait time has elapsed from the state shown in the upper part of FIG. This customer waiting screen is an example of a still image of the customer waiting screen, and an image in which a specific character greets with a balloon “Welcome to ○ ○ store” is displayed, and the image of the effect button 9 and “volume” "You can set the brightness," the text image is also displayed. Although illustration and explanation was omitted in the explanation of FIG. 105 mentioned above, the shop name “○○ shop” in “Welcome to 店 shop” is, for example, the shop name arbitrarily set by the hall in the hall setting screen mentioned above. Is displayed.

The lower part of FIG. 114 shows a state in which the effect button 9 is pressed from the state in the middle of FIG. 114 to shift to the player setting mode and the player setting screen is displayed. The player setting screen shown in the lower part of FIG. 114 is partially different from the display in FIG. 106 described above, but such a display mode may be used. In this case, in the items of the volume setting and the brightness setting, setting values such as the player's volume are displayed on the right side of the bar graph display. In the case of the lower part of FIG. 114, “10” is displayed, which indicates a state where the setting is 10 steps, which is the maximum value. In addition, the cursor left and right can be operated by pressing (touching) either of the left and right sides of the touch panel 9a on the upper surface of the effect button 9, and the cursor by pressing (touching) either of upper and lower (front and rear) both sides The point where the up and down operation can be performed is the same as the player setting screen of FIG. 106, but in this case, the mode in which the setting change is determined by pressing (touching) the middle of the touch panel 9a It has become. Such an embodiment may be used.
In addition, the picture of the effect button 9 and the picture of the hand which operates this are respectively illustrated on the lower left part and the left and right sides of FIG. Among them, the picture on the left side shows the above-described determination operation of touching the middle of the upper surface of the effect button 9. Further, among these, the picture on the right side shows the operation in the right direction of the cursor left / right operation touching the right side of the top surface of the effect button 9.

Next, in the upper part of FIG. 115, a moving image played by a plurality of characters is displayed as an example of a moving image (movie) on the customer waiting screen, and an image of effect button 9 and "you can set volume and brightness" at the lower part. The display part 41a of the state by which the character of description was also displayed is shown. In this case, although there is no output of voice and silent, for example, music played by the character may be output from the speakers 12a and 12b.
Next, in the middle of FIG. 115, from the state of the upper stage of FIG. 115, the player is seated on the platform (the gaming machine) and grips the firing operation handle 11 so that there is a handle touch. Shows the output of the welcome message and the display unit 41a in a state where the image is displayed. As the welcome message, in this case, a voice "Welcome!" Is output from the speakers 12a and 12b. This example is an example of the mountain mode (normal mode).
Next, the lower part of FIG. 115 shows the display section 41a in the case of the above-mentioned "flame mode" as a modified example when the welcome message is output. In this case, the image Z5 of the flame described above and the image Z7 (for example, a moving image in which characters such as "flame mode" flow sideways) are displayed. Further, as a welcome message, a voice "I'm going!" Is output from the speakers 12a and 12b. The display and voice output at the time of welcome message output may be changed in this manner depending on the game state and the mode state. Needless to say, the specific aspect is not limited to such an aspect. The same applies to display examples of other figures.

Next, the upper part of FIG. 116 is a view showing a state of the gaming board 20 including the display portion 41a in the normal gaming state (a state where the big hit, the small hit and the like are not) with the handle touch (game ball released state). In the normal state, since the player is hitting left, the player is hitting left, and the game ball YK is flowing to the left of the game area 22.
Next, in the lower part of FIG. 116, a power failure occurs from the state of the upper part of FIG. 116, and the display part 41a is displayed when the player releases his hand from the firing operation handle 11 and there is no handle touch (game ball non-firing state). It is a figure which shows the state of the game board 20 containing. The display on the display unit 41a is all turned off due to a power failure.

Next, the upper stage of FIG. 117 is a diagram showing the gaming board 20 including the display portion 41 a in the state where the power failure recovery has been started from the state of the lower stage of FIG.
Next, the lower diagram in FIG. 117 is a diagram showing the gaming board 20 including the display portion 41a in the state where the power failure recovery has been completed from the state of the upper stage of FIG.
At the time of power failure recovery, as described above, the command at the time of power failure recovery is transmitted from the game control device 100 in step S25, and the effect control device 300 that has received the command executes the processing of step D206. As a result, first, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 117, characters etc. are displayed on the display unit 41a informing that the blackout is being restored, “Please wait for a while”, and then as shown in the lower part of FIG. Recovery Since the power failure has been recovered in the normal state of "start the left strike", characters etc. prompting the player to start the game (left strike) are displayed.
Also in the case where the left hitting instruction informing command is transmitted in the steps S 788, A 257, etc. described above, a display such as “Please hit left” may be similarly displayed on the display unit 41 a.

Next, the upper diagram in FIG. 118 shows the state of the gaming board 20 including the display portion 41a when the player grips the firing operation handle 11 from the state of the lower stage in FIG. It is. In this case, although there is no handle touch and there is a handle touch, output of a welcome message such as “Welcome!” Is not performed. This is because the determination in step D260 described above is NO. That is, as described in the launch touch information setting process, the welcome message function is invalidated when a command of the power failure recovery screen is transmitted as a display screen command at the time of power failure recovery (when recovery is performed on the power failure recovery screen) This is because the configuration is started in the state. As a result, for example, it is prevented that the welcome message is output out of place until the same gaming guest resumes the game after the power failure is restored during the power failure recovery.
Next, in the lower part of FIG. 118, from the state of the upper part of FIG. 118, the player resumes the game and shoots the game ball, and the display portion 41a of the state in which the start hole winning occurs and the decoration special view is variably displayed. It is a figure which shows the game board 20 containing. In this case, sounds corresponding to the variable display game are output from the speakers 12a and 12b.

Next, FIG. 119 is a view showing a modified example of the sound etc. which is output at the time of the handle touch (when there is a change from no handle touch to with a handle touch). As shown in the figure, when the first power on in the morning "Good morning !!", in the normal gaming state "Good luck ~ !!", in a short time state "Cha ~ N ssu!", In a definite change state "early ~ ~ !!!", During reach 1 (big hit) “Congratulations !!”, and during reach 2 (big hit) “Konetsu ~ !!!” etc. may be output as voice or letters may be displayed.
In addition, when reach where a big hit occurs is executed, you may make it output the premiere voice by touching the steering wheel continuously (voices like the above "onion ~ !!!") . In addition, during reach when a big hit occurs, you may decide which voice to be output by lottery, or select and output at a predetermined ratio from a plurality so as to suggest the type of the big hit It is also good. In addition, when the power is turned on in the morning, the default "Good morning !!" is basically output, but if it is in a definite change state in the morning, etc., it is determined by lottery whether or not the voice corresponding to the gaming state is made. May be Also, the sound may be changed depending on whether the state before the handle touch is in reach or in a customer waiting demo.

Next, although the upper part of FIG. 120 has been described in the above-described launch information control processing, calculation of the number of times of special figure fluctuation during a game (including prize balls) for a predetermined amount of money (predetermined number of lent balls, ie, unit number of balls). The method is described, and in particular this calculation method is carried out by steps D306 to D316 and steps D321 to D322. According to this calculation method, it is possible to determine and determine the special figure rotation state (the number of special figure fluctuations per game for a predetermined amount of money (that is, for a predetermined number of lent balls)) in the effect control device 300.
Next, in the lower part of FIG. 120, although the outline of the emission information control process described above is also described, the determination of the rotation state mode and the correction conditions of the rotation state mode performed in the steps D323 to D325 are described.
That is, the game state A is a normal effect state in the case where the number of changes is large (17 times or more / 250), and no specific control is performed. In step D323, if the number of times of special feature fluctuation determined in step D322 is 17 or more, the game state A is determined according to this condition.

  Next, the game state B is a normal effect state when the number of times of change is normal (13 to 16 times / 250), and the effect generation state is basically not changed, but a slight effect occurrence frequency You may make it high. In step D323, if the number of times of special feature fluctuation determined in step D322 is 13 to 16, the game state B is determined according to this condition. However, when the game state B is determined in the process of step D323 twice consecutively, the process proceeds to step D325, and the game state of the transition destination is corrected to the game state C in step D325. Transition to That is, this game state B does not continue beyond a period in which the monitoring and determination of the special figure fluctuation number is performed twice (ie, a period for two games with 250 ball lending numbers).

Next, the game state C is an overproduction state in which the number of changes is small (12 times or less / 250), and effects that normally do not occur (such as the effects described in FIGS. 112 and 113). And increase the player's willingness to continue playing the game. However, when the game state C is determined in the process of step D323 three consecutive times, the process proceeds to step D325, and the game state of the transition destination is corrected to the game state B in step D325. Transition to That is, this game state C does not continue beyond a period in which the monitoring and determination of the special figure fluctuation number is performed three times (that is, the period for three games of 250 ball lending numbers). As a result, the effect is always excessive, and it becomes possible to get used to a special effect, and it is possible to prevent a fear that the player's will decline.
Further, since the change in the rotation state mode (especially the change to the game state C) due to the special view rotation state is assumed to be a response at the time of the slump, the game state C is determined from start to end Therefore, if it is determined that the game state C has been made three times in a row, it is determined to be the “tightening adjustment stand”, and is corrected to the game state B and treated as the game state B. This makes it possible to prevent the game state C from occurring all the time on such a "tightening adjustment stand".

Next, FIG. 121 is a mode transition diagram showing how the game state (rotation state mode) changes as a result of the execution of steps D323 to D325 according to the conditions shown in the lower part of FIG.
As shown in this figure, the game state A continues as many times as long as the condition for establishing the state (the number of times the special figure change is 17 or more / 250) continues. Then, from the game state A, the condition establishment condition of the game state B in the processing of the next step D323 (the special figure fluctuation number is 13 to 16 times / 250) due to the special figure fluctuation frequency decrease or the special image fluctuation frequency increase If the condition establishment condition of the game condition C (the number of times of special figure fluctuation is 12 times or less / 250) is established, it shifts to the game condition B or C where the condition establishment condition is established (in this case, mode correction of step D325 is Not done).

In addition, the game state B continues only once if the state establishment condition (the number of times of special figure fluctuation is 13 to 16 times / 250) continues. Then, from the game state B, if the condition establishment condition of the game state A or the condition establishment condition of the game state C is satisfied in the processing of the next step D323 due to the special figure fluctuation frequency decrease or the special image fluctuation frequency increase A transition is made to the game state A or C in which the establishment condition is established (in this case, the mode correction in step D325 is not performed).
However, if the condition establishment condition of the game state B is continuously established during a period of two games with the number of ball lends of 250, transition to the game state C is made by mode correction of step D325. As a result, even if the special figure fluctuation count is 13 to 16 times / 250 states (the special figure rotation state is neither good nor bad), the game state C is obtained if this state continues for a long time. Since the special effects are in an excessive state, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game for a long time in which the special figure rotation state is neither good nor bad.

In addition, the game state C continues only for two times when the state establishment condition (the number of times of special figure fluctuation is 12 times or less / 250) continues. Then, from the game state C, if the condition establishment condition of the game condition A or the condition establishment condition of the game condition B is satisfied in the processing of the next step D323 due to the special figure fluctuation frequency decrease or the special image fluctuation frequency increase A transition is made to the game state A or B in which the establishment condition is established (in this case, the mode correction in step D325 is not performed).
However, if the condition establishment condition of the game state C is continuously established during a period of three games with 250 ball lends, the game state B is entered and the game state B is entered. In this way, the effect is in an excessive state for a certain period of time when the special figure rotation state is bad, so it is possible to suppress the player from immediately stopping the game because the special figure rotation state is bad and to promote motivation to continue the game At the same time, it is possible to prevent such an adverse effect that the player is bored due to the overproduction state continuing too long and the player being bored.
When the game state C is changed to the game state C in two consecutive times, 250 games may be played in the game state C only once and the game state B may be returned again. Since the state is the game state B (the special figure fluctuation number is 13 to 16 times / 250) and the fluctuation number is not small, it is not necessary to stay in the game state C for the prescribed three times. In this way, it is possible to prevent the negative effects such as the player becoming bored, as described above, by causing the overproduction state to appear too much.

  Next, FIG. 122 is a partially enlarged view showing the sound volume switch (sound volume SW) 388 and the setting confirmation LED 339 on the back surface of the effect control device 300, as described above in the description of the back side of the pachinko machine. As described in the sound control process, by operating the volume SW 338, the effective range for the entire range of the volume and the default value (see FIG. 104) corresponding to the effective range can be changed. A confirmation LED 339 is provided. Then, when the setting value changed by the sound volume SW 338 does not match the default setting value by the control of the effect control device 300 (not shown), the setting confirmation LED 339 is turned off as shown in the upper part of FIG. When the setting value changed by the SW 338 matches the default setting value, the setting confirmation LED 339 is configured to light as shown in the lower part of FIG. A control process for this may be performed in this step, for example, by adding a step after step D52 and before step D53 in the sound control process described above.

A display window 338a formed by cutting the outer periphery as shown in FIG. 122 is provided on the outer periphery of the operation portion of the volume SW 338, and the outer periphery of the operation portion of the volume SW 338 is provided via the display window 338a. A number corresponding to the setting state such as "0" or "3" of the scale provided at the back is switched and displayed according to the rotation operation of the operation unit of the volume switch 338. This is, for example, the lowest stage number of the effective range described in FIG. 104 described above.
That is, when the volume SW 338 is switched to the volume SW “small” shown in FIG. 104, the number “0” of the lowest step of the effective range in that case is displayed via the display window 338 a (exposed forward). Also, when the volume SW 338 is switched to the volume SW “middle” shown in FIG. 104, the number “6” at the lowest level of the effective range in that case is displayed via the display window 338 a (exposed forward). Also, when the volume SW 338 is switched to the volume SW “high” shown in FIG. 104, the number “11” at the lowest level of the effective range in that case is displayed via the display window 338 a (exposed forward).

The upper part of FIG. 122 shows, for example, the state where the volume SW "small" and the numeral "0" are displayed on the display window 338a. On the other hand, in the lower part of FIG. 122, for example, the number "3" is displayed in the display window 338a because the effective range is set to "3" to "12". That is, in the specific example of FIG. 122, the state where the effective range is set from “3” to “12” is the default set value of the setting by the volume SW 338, and the volume SW 338 is operated to this set value. When the setting confirmation LED 339 lights up.
As described above, the setting confirmation LED 339 lights up in the default setting, so that the operator does not have to look at the small number displayed on the display window 338a (or even if this number can not be seen), the volume It is extremely easy to switch SW 338 to the default settings.

Next, FIG. 123 shows a display example (modification) of the display section 41 a when the display is shifted to the player setting screen from the customer waiting demo.
The upper part of FIG. 123 is the same as the middle part of FIG. 114 described above, and an image in which a specific character greets with a balloon “Welcome to ○ store” is displayed, and the image of effect button 9 and “volume, brightness A text image with a description of “can be set” is also displayed.

The lower part of FIG. 123 shows a state in which the effect button 9 is pressed from the state of the upper part of FIG. 123 to shift to the player setting mode and the player setting screen is displayed. The player setting screen shown in the lower part of FIG. 123 is partially different in function from the lower part of FIG. 114 described above. In this case, when the volume setting item becomes an active menu, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 123, the range setting is displayed where the item of the brightness setting is displayed in the lower part of FIG. In the display, sub-menus (more detailed setting items) of "high range", "medium range" and "low range" are displayed. Then, a function (that is, a function as an equalizer) capable of adjusting the volume of each range is provided by the player selecting any of these sub-menus and performing cursor left / right operation with each setting item. Such an embodiment may be used.
In the lower right part of FIG. 123, a picture of the effect button 9 and a picture of a hand operating the same are illustrated. This picture shows the leftward operation of the cursor left / right operation touching the left side of the top surface of the effect button 9.

Next, FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining an example (this embodiment) of a general power fluctuation time, a general power release time, and the like.
Although the normal drawing processing and the normal drawing display processing are also described, the common drawing probability (probability of becoming a common drawing) is zero in a normal state (a state where the normal power support state (power support state)) / 251 "), and it is" 250/251 "in the power support state, and the difference depending on whether or not the power support state is very large. In the high probability state (probability state) of the special figure, it becomes the power support state.
Next, the spread map fluctuation time is "700 ms" in the normal state, "500 ms" in the power support state, and in the power support state, the time reduction of the spread map is performed.
Next, the drawing stop time is the same "600 ms" in any state.

Next, there are three types of hit patterns per hit, 1 to 3 hit symbols. In FIG. 124, hit symbols 1 to 3 are also described in the column of the normal state, but it is assumed that the general power release is performed in the normal state after reaching the common state in the power support state. There is.
Next, the normal charge release time (including the number of times of release) is in the power support state, and in the case of symbol 1 “500 ms × 1” (× 1 means one opening), in the power support state in the case of hit 2 In the case of “1 1700 ms × 2” (× 2 means opening twice), in the case of power support, in the case of symbol 3 “1700 ms × 3” (× 3 means opening 3 times) in the normal condition In the case of the hit symbols 1 to 3, it is "100 ms x 1". In addition, in the case of multiple opening, the common charge closing time between the common charge open and the next common charge open is, for example, 200 ms as shown in FIG. 126 described later.

  Next, FIG. 125 is a timing chart for explaining the appearance of a normal game of the present embodiment. As shown in the figure, first, in the normal state, the game ball passes the common drawing start gate 32, and the common drawing fluctuation of 700 ms and the common drawing stop of 600 ms are performed. It becomes out of the figure). Then, after the special figure hits a big hit, for example, the probability changes per special figure becomes high probability (so-called special figure ST), and it becomes common power support state along with it, common drawing starting gate in this common power support state When the game ball passes 32, a spread of 500 ms and a drop of 600 ms are performed, and in most cases, a hit is made. Then, as shown in the figure, for example, if the symbol 2 is hit first, the common charge release of 1700 ms is performed twice after the stop of the common view of 600 ms. Then, if it hits with the hit symbol 1, 500 ms of public charge release will be performed once. In addition, even if, for example, a normal drawing change remains immediately after the completion of the release of the common charge, an interval of 700 ms is provided as shown in the drawing.

  Next, FIG. 126 is a timing chart for explaining the appearance of the popular game at the end of ST in this embodiment. As shown in the figure, in the definite change state (special drawing ST), the game ball passes through the common drawing start gate 32, and the common drawing fluctuation of 500 ms is performed when it hits, for example, per symbol 3, the common drawing stop of 600 ms Later, the 1700 ms normal power release is performed three times. Next, just before the definite change state (special drawing ST) ends, the gaming ball passes the common drawing start gate 32 and the common drawing fluctuation of 500 ms starts, but this common drawing fluctuation of 500 ms and the common drawing stop of 600 ms end When the normal power release is performed, if the positive change state (special drawing ST) has already ended and the normal state (without the normal power support) has been entered, as shown in FIG. Is an open pattern dedicated to the normal state, and only 100 ms of normal voltage release is performed. After that, even if a normal drawing change is made immediately after a normal drawing stop is generated due to, for example, a prize winning on the common drawing start gate 32 after the finish of the definite change, then the normal drawing change (700 ms) is normal. As long as it takes place and is always off, the normal release does not occur.

Although FIG. 126 exemplifies the case where there is a state change that switches from the high probability state (general power support state) to the normal state during the 500 ms spread, but the spread is not only stopped during the spread Even if the above state change (when falling from the high probability state to the low probability state) occurs during the time (600 ms), the open pattern “100 ms × 1” dedicated to the normal state is obtained. The same is true when the state change and the end of the drawing stop time (600 ms) just overlap each other.
However, if the above state change occurs during the opening operation (including the closing time between the opening and the opening) during the high probability medium use (for power supply state) opening operation, the opening operation is continued as it is. In addition, the test signal representing the high probability is turned off in accordance with the change in probability (that is, immediately after the above state change).
In addition to the case where the number of times of variation of the special figure during this definite variation state becomes the specified number, the special variation state of the special figure (special figure ST) ends as a big hit during the definite variation state. The probability change state may end regardless of the number of times the figure changes. Even in the case where it becomes a common drawing immediately before the end of such a definite variation, and the corresponding general power release is performed after the transition to the normal time, this embodiment has an open pattern for exclusive use in the normal state as shown in FIG. A 100 ms open is performed.

Next, FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a large winning opening opening and closing pattern at the time of a small hit, which has already been described in the small hitting operation shift setting process. Note that the numbers “0”, “1”, “2”,... Enclosed by squares in the drawing are the values of the small hit middle control pointer updated in step A343 of the small hit middle processing. The value of the small hit middle control pointer changes as shown in the figure with the progress of the large winning opening opening / closing operation at the small hit. Also, when the small ball remaining ball time of 1900 ms and the small ball ending time of 100 ms are combined, the apparent ending time is 2000 ms.
Next, FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a general power operation timing chart (general power release pattern), which has already been described in detail in the processing during the display of the general view.

By executing each program as described above, a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and each effect means (display device 41, panel decoration device 42) is controlled by the effect control device 300 based on this command. , Various effects by the frame decoration device 43, the board effect device 44, the speakers 12a, 12b, etc.) are executed. For example, on the display device 41, a variable display game with a decorative special figure is executed.
Specifically, when the gaming ball wins the start winning opening 25 or 26a of the special view during the game of the pachinko machine 1 (that is, when there is a start special winning of the special view), a command instructing a special view variation effect Is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and the special feature is displayed on the display section 41a (the effect on the display device 41 is a decorative special feature, but it becomes complicated. The variable display of the variable display is performed, and if the stop result mode of the variable display game is a special result mode, a big hit occurs and it becomes a special game state (big hit state), and in the case of a break, it stops with a slip off pattern .

Next, inventive concepts (1) to (5) which can be extracted or developed from the above-described embodiment will be described below.
(Invention concept (1))
In this embodiment, as described in the steps D422, D424, etc. and FIG. 108 to FIG. 113, the condition (first condition) that the handle touch disappears after the handle touch is over the specified time is satisfied, The special figure change corresponding to the condition (the second condition) that the above-mentioned sphere rental use amount (calculated at step D363) equivalent to the amount exceeds the specified amount (the second condition), and the last hold (the remaining one start winning memory) If the condition (third condition) is satisfied, the effect change condition is satisfied, and the notice distribution group address table selected by the control based on the emission related information described in the above steps D422, D424, and D427 is A changing effect change (for example, transition to a special mode) is performed, and the possibility of the appearance of a special advance notice effect, for example, in the special view variable display game is increased. As a result, an effect that the player has an expectation and the player desires to continue playing the game eagerly, and an effect that it is possible to give a range of effects can be obtained without reducing the gaming efficiency. . That is, when the player playing a game for a prescribed time or more releases the handle, the effect is changed by the effect control device 300, and the change in the reach occurrence rate controlled by the game control device 100 in the effect change by the effect control device 300 Because time is not included, time efficiency does not decrease, and the player operates the handle again to continue playing.

  The effect changing condition may be only the first condition, the first condition and the second state, or only the first condition and the third condition, and the second condition and the third condition. Other different conditions may be included. If the second condition is included, it is possible to change the effect only to a player with a certain amount or more of the amount of pitched balls (that is, the amount equivalent to the amount inserted into the game), and to improve the sales of the game arcade. Can also contribute. In addition, if the third condition is included, it is possible to efficiently and effectively change the presentation by focusing on the last hold that may stop the game. In addition, when the player tries to stop the game, he often watches the special figure fluctuation due to the hold left after the release operation handle 11 is released. If there is more than one hold, it is often watched until the last change. Therefore, if there is a dramatic mode change or the like due to a special figure change due to the last hold, the game willingness to try a little more is strong.

Further, as described in the payout command transmission processing and the payout busy signal check processing, the game control device 100 lends the ball based on the busy signal output when the payout control device 200 is executing payout of the gaming ball. The presence or absence of the payout operation is monitored, and ball lending information (ball lending button pressing command) indicating execution of one payout operation of the lending ball is produced each time it is determined that the dispensing motion of the lending ball is performed once. It has a function (step S298 etc.) to transmit to the control device 300. Then, as described in the ball lending information setting process, the effect control apparatus 300 performs one payout operation of the ball lending information transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 and the lending balls registered in advance in the effect control apparatus. The rental amount is calculated based on the increase (the number of ball lending units) of the rental amount according to (step D363, etc.). For this reason, even if it is not set as the structure which transmits the new signal regarding the amount of lent balls from the payout control device 200 to the effect control device 300, for example, the effect control device 300 can grasp the lent amount in the existing device configuration.
In addition, the increase (the number of lent units) of the lent amount registered in the effect control device 300 can be changed in setting at the game store (hall) as described in step D101 of the hall / player setting mode processing. It is convenient.

The inventive concept (1) of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
An operation unit operated by a player, a start area provided in a game area where a game ball fired by the operation of the operation unit flows down, and a contact detection means for detecting a player's contact with the operation unit; A display means capable of performing a variable display game of symbols by displaying a symbol, a game control device for controlling the progress of the game, and a rendering means including the display means based on an instruction from the game control device And an effect control device to
It is advantageous for the player if the variable display game is performed on condition that the game ball has won the start area, and the variable display game has a special result (for example, a big hit or a small hit may be made). A gaming machine that generates a special gaming state,
The effect control device monitors the presence or absence of the contact based on the detection result of the contact detection means, and when a predetermined effect change condition is satisfied, the effect means is compared with a case where the effect change condition is not satisfied. Has a function of changing the effect to be performed by the player (in particular, the effect in the variation display game),
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the effect change condition includes at least a condition that the contact disappears after the contact continues for a predetermined time or more.
Here, in the present embodiment, the contact detection means is a touch switch 11 a (touch sensor) that detects a touch on the firing operation handle 11. In addition, “to change the effect” may be, for example, to increase the appearance frequency of the advance effect for anticipating the possibility of a big hit, or to increase the appearance probability of a special effect.

The lower concept (1-2) of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In the effect change condition, the accumulated value of the number of gaming balls borrowed for the player to fire or the amount of the lent ball (which may be an amount inserted by the player) which is an amount proportional to the accumulated value exceeds the specified amount. A game machine characterized in that the condition (corresponding to the second condition) is included.

The lower concept (1-3) of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The game machine further comprises a payout control device for controlling the payout of the game ball including the payout of the rental ball, which is a game ball borrowed to be fired by the player.
The gaming control device monitors the presence or absence of the payout operation of the rental ball based on the busy signal output to the gaming control device when the payout control device is executing payout of the gaming ball, and Each time the execution of one payout operation is determined, it has a function of transmitting, to the effect control device, ball lending information indicating execution of one payout operation of the rental ball,
The effect control device is based on the ball lending information transmitted from the game control device and an increase in the amount of the ball by the one payout operation of the lending ball registered in advance in the effect control device. A game machine characterized by calculating the amount of ball to be lent.
Here, the amount of lent balls corresponds to the amount of ball lending used in the present embodiment (calculated at step D363), and in the case of the present embodiment, the amount of ball lending used is, for example, 3 minutes touch-off state (launch operation handle In the state where there is no contact with “11”, “0” is cleared and reset in step D340 described above. Thus, according to this embodiment, there is a high possibility that only the amount of money used for ball lending during the period in which the same player continues the game can be accurately calculated as the above-mentioned amount of lent balls. The above-mentioned amount of lent balls calculated in the above is used to determine the effect change condition, and the determination of the effect change condition (in particular, the second condition) becomes more accurate. Therefore, it is desirable that the calculated value of the amount of the ball to be charged be zero-cleared (set the value to zero) when the non-contact state reaches a specified time as in this embodiment.

The lower concept (1-4) of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game machine characterized in that the effect control device is capable of rewriting a registered value of the increase in the amount of lent balls by one payout operation of the lent balls.
The lower concept (1-5) of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The effect change condition includes a condition (corresponding to the third condition) that the variable display game to change the effect is due to the last winning in the start area. Machine.

The background of the above-mentioned inventive concept (1) will be described below.
In the conventional gaming machine, for example, the one disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-8492, since the rate of occurrence of reach directly related to the progress of the game is changed depending on the firing state of the gaming ball, the expectation of the big hit is raised There is a risk that the player may be dissatisfied due to the frequent occurrence of the reach fluctuation which is time-inefficient in a non-existing state.
Also, conversely, the player intentionally suppresses the number of shots because he wants to see the reach, and there is also a fear that the sales of the game store will decrease due to the decrease in time efficiency due to the reach fluctuation. is there.
According to the above invention concept (1), it is possible to provide a gaming machine which makes it possible for the player to desire to continue playing the game without reducing the time efficiency of the game. In addition, since it is the game control apparatus 100 that is controlling the incidence rate of reach, and the effect control apparatus 300 that performs the effect change according to the invention concept (1), according to the invention concept (1) There is no risk that the player will be dissatisfied with frequent reach changes. As described above, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the information on the change pattern (reach action is included) included in the change command (change pattern command) transmitted from the game control device 100 that controls the progress of the game. This is because, according to the information for determining the fluctuation time is included, the contents of the special-figure fluctuation display game are only determined within the range of the instructed fluctuation pattern. In addition, the player can contribute to the sales increase of the game arcade by continuing the game. In particular, in the case of the lower concept (1-2), the possibility that the player whose amount of balls to be lent exceeds the prescribed amount continues the game further increases, which can contribute to the sales increase of the game arcade. Further, if there are a plurality of reservations for start winning memory storage as in the lower concept (1-5), the effect is changed in the presentation of the variable display game by the one suspension of the last remaining one, and it is due to the suspension before that In the variable display game, since the effect is not changed, the effect of promoting the player's willingness to become accustomed to the special effect which the player has appeared earlier is not diminished, and the rare value of the special effect (as a rare one). The player's willingness to continue playing the game can be effectively enhanced while maintaining the In the lower concept (1-2) where the second condition is also added as the effect change condition, the effect change is not made only when the contact to the operation unit is eliminated, so the rare value of the special effect appearing due to the effect change Play the effect of maintaining.

(Invention concept (2))
In this embodiment, as described in the emission touch information setting process, the effect control device 300 has a function (welcome message function) of executing output of a welcome message (step D261 to 262) when a predetermined output condition is satisfied. . In the case of the control process of this embodiment, the predetermined output condition is that there is a handle touch (the command during firing is the state on command) (step D257; Y), and the unfired condition satisfaction flag is saved (not fired (not fired) The condition flag is established (step D258; Y), the low probability condition is in progress (step D259; Y), and the customer demonstration effect is in effect (step D260; Y). For this reason, in the output condition of the welcome message, first, there is no touch on the firing operation handle 11 (contact by the player's finger or the like) for a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) not fired yet, but then the firing operation handle A condition (first condition) that the touch to 11 is detected is included. Further, the output condition also includes a condition (second condition) that the handle touch state is not continuous for a continuous touch prescribed time (for example, 3 minutes) after the touch on the firing operation handle 11 is detected. It is done. As a result, there is an effect that the welcome effect (welcome message output) is performed with good timing at the start of firing from the non-playing state. Also, after the welcome effect is started, if the handle touch state continues for a prescribed period of continuous touch or more, the unfired condition unsatisfied flag is saved in step D335, the determination result in step D258 becomes NO, and the welcome effect (step D261, D262) will not be executed. As a result, the welcome effect is surely finished in a predetermined time after the start of the launch from the non-playing state, and the adverse effect such as the player being uncomfortable due to the long time effect of the welcome effect can be avoided.

Further, the output condition includes a condition (third condition) of being in a waiting for customer demonstration direction (that is, in a state where the special figure is not changing or not being a big hit state). The guest waiting demonstration effect also includes the state immediately after the demonstration control device 300 receives the customer waiting demonstration command instructing the customer waiting demonstration effect from the gaming control device 100 (immediately before the customer waiting demonstration effect execution). And, when such a third condition is included, there is an effect that the possibility of the welcome message output being made during the game is further reduced and the welcome effect is performed at a better timing. The reason is that, for example, when there are a plurality of start-up winning memories and the special figure variation is continuously executed, it can not be said that the player has no possibility of releasing his hand from the firing operation handle 11 for a prescribed time or more. In that case, if only the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, when the player touches the firing operation handle 11 after that, a welcome message is output despite the game being played by the same player, which makes the player uncomfortable. There is a need to However, if the above third condition is included, the welcome message output is not executed even if the first condition is satisfied because the customer waiting demo effect is not being performed during the special map change, and such a problem is solved. . In addition, if there is a start winning after the start of the game and special figure fluctuation is started if there is the above third condition, there is an advantage that the welcome message output is surely finished at that time since the customer waiting demonstration effect is not performed. .
Further, the output condition includes a condition (fourth condition) that the gaming state in the special view is in the low probability state. This ensures that the welcome message output is performed (operation that may make the player uncomfortable) during the high probability state that the player is particularly passionate about the game (while the big hit probability is increased). Can be avoided.
The output condition may be an aspect of only the first condition, an aspect of only the first condition and the second condition, or an aspect of various combinations such as an aspect of the first condition and the third condition, There may be an aspect in which other conditions are included. In the case of only the first condition, the end of the output of the welcome message once started becomes a problem, for example, the mode in which the started welcome message output is always performed for a predetermined time and then ended (or “Welcome The voice output such as “!” Is always performed only once, and may not be performed until the output condition is satisfied again.

  In the present embodiment, the operation immediately after the start of the gaming machine of the welcome message function is as follows, as described in the emission touch information setting process and FIG. That is, when the power is turned on by clearing the RAM, the function (welcome message function) for outputting a welcome message to give priority to the RAM initialization notification is started in a temporarily invalidated state (however, the customer is turned on after the power is turned on). If the waiting demonstration effect is being performed (that is, if the RAM initialization notification is finished), the welcome message output is executed when the other output conditions are satisfied. On the other hand, at the time of power failure recovery, when the command on the display screen in the command at the time of power failure recovery (command of power failure recovery screen or command of customer waiting demo) is received, welcome message function is enabled / disabled according to the command. The configuration is determined to be either. Specifically, when a command for a customer waiting demo is transmitted as a command on the display screen at the time of a power failure recovery (when restoring on a customer waiting screen), the welcome message function is started from the beginning in a valid state (Step D260 etc.). On the other hand, when the command of the power failure recovery screen is transmitted as the command of the display screen at the time of power failure recovery (when recovering on the power failure recovery screen), the welcome message function is started in an invalid state (see FIG. 118). Here, the command at the time of the power failure recovery is transmitted by the above-mentioned step S25, but if the state immediately before the power failure recovery before the power failure recovery is in the customer waiting demonstration effect, the display screen in the command at the time of the power failure recovery If the command becomes a customer waiting demo command, while the condition immediately before the power failure is other than during customer waiting demonstration effect (that is, during special figure change or big hit condition), the display screen during the power failure recovery command The command of is the command of the power failure recovery screen. For this reason, if the state immediately before the power failure is in the waiting for customer demonstration effect, the customer waiting demo command is transmitted immediately after the power failure is restored, and the third condition described above is satisfied (step D260; Y). If the output flag is saved and other output conditions such as the presence of a handle touch are satisfied, the welcome message output is executed. However, if the state immediately before the power failure is other than during the customer waiting demonstration effect, the customer waiting demo command is not transmitted immediately after the power failure is restored, and the above third condition is not satisfied (step D260; N). The welcome message output is not executed even if other output conditions such as the fact that the launch condition satisfied flag is saved and there is a handle touch are satisfied. As a result, the game is interrupted due to a power failure during the game, and then the player who resumes the game due to the power failure recovery can be made to resume the game comfortably. That is, since it can be assumed that the game has just been interrupted when it is possible to launch in the recovery screen, it is possible not to perform extra presentation (welcome message output) in such a case. it can.

The inventive concept (2) of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
An operation unit operated by a player, a start area provided in a game area where a game ball fired by the operation of the operation unit flows down, and a contact detection means for detecting a player's contact with the operation unit; A display means capable of performing a variable display game of symbols by displaying a symbol, a game control device for controlling the progress of the game, and a rendering means including the display means based on an instruction from the game control device And an effect control device to
The game machine is configured to play the variable display game on condition that the game ball has won the start area, and to generate a special game state advantageous to the player when the variable display game results in a special result,
The effect control device monitors the presence or absence of the contact based on the detection result of the contact detection means, and has a function of outputting a message to the player by the effect means when a predetermined output condition is satisfied.
A game machine characterized in that the output condition includes at least a condition (corresponding to the first condition) in which the contact has been made after the contact has not been continuous for a prescribed time or more.

The lower concept (2-2) of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game machine characterized in that the output condition includes a condition (corresponding to the second condition) that the contact does not exist continuously for a prescribed time or more.
The lower concept (2-3) of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game machine characterized in that the output condition includes a condition (corresponding to the third condition) that a customer waiting demonstration effect which is not being executed and is not in the special game state is being performed.
The lower concept (2-4) of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The output condition includes a condition (corresponding to the fourth condition) that the probability that the variable display game has a special result is not a high probability state controlled to a high probability (that is, a low probability state). A game machine characterized by

The lower concept (2-5) of the above-mentioned composition is expressed as follows.
A game machine characterized in that the output condition includes a condition that it is not at the time of power on accompanied by the initialization of the RAM of the game control device.
According to the lower concept (2-5), when the output of the RAM initialization notification is to be performed, the output of the message can be inhibited to give priority to the RAM initialization notification. However, after the power is turned on (after the output of the RAM initialization notification is completed), if another output condition is satisfied (for example, a customer waiting demo command is then transmitted to be in a customer waiting demonstration effect and handle touch for a prescribed time or more Message output is performed in a timely manner).

The lower concept (2-6) of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game machine characterized in that the output condition includes a condition that a command for instructing display of a power failure recovery screen is not received from the game control device at the time of power failure recovery.
According to the lower concept (2-6), when the output of the power failure recovery screen should be performed, the output of the message can be inhibited, and the output of the power failure recovery screen can be prioritized. Also, as described above, it is possible to interrupt the game due to a power failure during the game, and then resume the game upon recovery from the power failure, to perform an unnecessary message output and to resume the game comfortably.
In the case of the present embodiment, the conditions of the lower concepts (2-5) and (2-6) are substantially the same as the conditions (the third condition) of the lower concepts (2-3) described above. It becomes unnecessary. In the case of the present embodiment, since the effect control device 300 is receiving the wait for customer demonstration command from the game control device 100 during the waiting for customer demonstration effect, the condition that the effect for waiting customer demonstration is in progress is If it is established, it can be said that the power is not turned on with the initialization of the RAM, and if it is at power recovery time it is not received a command for instructing display of the power failure recovery screen. However, the above-mentioned lower concepts (2-5) and (2-6) are described as lower concepts in which the way of understanding (concepts) of the inventive concept is changed.

In addition, even when the power is turned on with the initialization of the RAM, the message output function may be enabled from the beginning. For example, even if the RAM initialization command is received immediately after the power is turned on and the customer waiting demo command is not received yet, the message output may be executed if the first condition is satisfied. In this case, there is a possibility that the message output may be simultaneously performed during the notification of the RAM initialization, but it is not possible for the interrupted game to be resumed by the turning on of the power with the RAM initialization. There is no particular problem.
The message is, for example, a so-called welcome message, and may be an audio output such as "Welcome!" As described above (for example, an output from the speakers 12a and 12b), or may be a character display on the display unit 41a or the like. However, the message is not necessarily limited to a welcome message that expresses the meaning of welcome obediently. For example, the voice of a character of a villain who appears in the direction of the game machine outputs "It's made!" The content may be related to the presentation theme of the gaming machine.

(Invention concept (3))
In this embodiment, as described in the launch information control process, the effect control device 300 responds to the special figure rotation state (the number of special figure fluctuations per game for a predetermined amount of money (that is, a predetermined number of lent balls)). The effect mode setting and mode correction (described in FIG. 120 lower stage and FIG. 121) are performed. As a result, when the player wants to stop the game, for example, the player gets a big hit by intentionally creating an overproduction state (for example, a state in which the advance effect frequently occurs or a state in which the appearance probability of special effects increases). The effect of being able to encourage the continuation of the game is obtained.
Further, the special view rotation state is information of the handle touch transmitted from the game control device 100 (in-progress command), a change command for instructing the special view change, and a start opening winning (enter the start area) Based on the start opening winning command (indicating the number-of-holds command and the start opening over winning command) of notifying that, the effect control device 300 calculates it by the method shown in the upper part of FIG. For this reason, for example, the effect control device 300 can be configured as described above in the existing device configuration without transmitting to the effect control device 300 a new signal relating to the number of emitted game balls from, for example, a launch control device (not shown). The figure rotation state can be grasped.

The inventive concept (3) of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
An operation unit operated by a player, a start area provided in a game area where a game ball fired by the operation of the operation unit flows down, and a contact detection means for detecting a player's contact with the operation unit; A display means capable of performing a variable display game of symbols by displaying a symbol, a game control device for controlling the progress of the game, and a rendering means including the display means based on an instruction from the game control device And an effect control device to
The game machine is configured to play the variable display game on condition that the game ball has won the start area, and to generate a special game state advantageous to the player when the variable display game results in a special result,
The effect control device calculates the number of times the variable display game is executed per game for a predetermined number of lent balls (that is, the number representing the special figure rotation state), and effects based on the number of executions are performed by the effect means A game machine characterized by changing.

The lower concept (3-2) of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The effect control device monitors the presence or absence of the contact based on the detection result of the contact detection means, and the presence or absence of the contact and a change command instructing change display of the symbol transmitted from the game control device; The gaming machine is characterized in that the number of executions is calculated based on a start winning command (corresponding to a starting opening winning command) notifying a winning in the starting area.

The lower concept (3-3) of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The effect control device is
A first timer that counts the time required to fire and play only the predetermined number of lent balls;
A second timer for counting the time required to fire the game by firing the number of award balls to be paid out by the winning of the start area generated during the game;
When the contact is made, the update of the first timer is first started, and while the contact is being updated, the first timer is updated, and the number of reception of the start winning command during the update of the first timer And counting the number of received variable commands (the steps D213, D217, D220, D307, D408, etc.),
If the number of receptions of the start winning command at the time when the first timer times out is zero, the counting of the number of receptions of the variation command is ended.
If the number of receptions of the start winning command at the time when the first timer has timed out is not zero, the time to count the time required to fire the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of receptions of the start winning command is set Start updating the second timer,
When updating of the second timer is started,
A second timer update counting process (where the number of reception of the start winning command and the number of reception of the variation command during updating of the second timer are counted while updating the second timer in the state where the contact is present) Execute steps D213, D217, D220, D314, D408 etc.),
If the number of receptions of the start winning command during updating of the second timer is zero at the time when the second timer times out, the counting of the number of receptions of the variation command is ended, and the second timer If the number of receptions of the start winning command during the second timer update is not zero when the time is up, the second timer is newly updated.
When the second timer is newly updated,
Similarly, the second timer update counting process is executed until the number of receptions of the start winning command during the second timer update becomes zero when the second timer times out. 2 Repeatedly execute the process of newly starting the timer update counting process,
When newly starting updating of the second timer, the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of reception of the start winning command counted in the second timer update counting process executed before that is fired Setting the time that the second timer counts in the time required for
A gaming machine, wherein the number of receptions of the variation command counted in all the periods during the first timer updating and the second timer updating is calculated as the number of times of execution.

Here, "during timer update" is a period from when the timer starts counting time (that is, when updating is started) to when time counting is ended (that is, time is up). Means
According to the configuration of the lower concept (3-2) and the lower concept (3-3), a start area generated during the game with a predetermined number of lent balls is generated based on the start winning command (starting opening win command). It is possible to calculate the number of times of execution that indicates an accurate special image rotation state in consideration of the time for firing and playing a prize ball paid out by winning.

(Invention concept (4))
In this embodiment, as described in FIG. 104 and FIG. 107 or the sound control process, the speaker 12a is switched by switching the volume setting table (not shown) according to the rotational position (operation position) of the operation unit of the volume SW 338. 12b and the amplifier circuit 337 etc., the hole can change the setting of the volume range (effective range of the volume) that the player can also adjust the volume with respect to the entire range (full volume range) of the volume that can be set. Moreover, there are always a plurality of adjustment steps within the effective range of the sound volume (in the case of this embodiment, there are always 10 steps). Further, the setting of the effective range by the hall is stored even if the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off (in this embodiment, it is mechanically stored as the operation position of the volume SW 338, and as the data at step D72 described above). Stored in memory). As a result, the player can always set the sound level of a plurality of levels (for example, 10 levels) and can restrict the volume of the hall as intended. In addition, since the setting of the effective range is stored and held, the same setting is reproduced even when the power is turned on next time, and there is no need to perform resetting.

The inventive concept (4) of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine provided with a gaming control device for controlling the progression of a game, and an effect control device capable of performing effects by controlling an effect means including a speaker based on a command from the game control device,
The effect control device has a volume control function of adjusting the output volume from the speaker,
The volume control function includes a first control function that can adjust the hall and a second control function that can also control the player.
The first adjustment function is a function of changing and setting an effective range having a range which is smaller than the entire volume range that can be output from the speaker and which has adjustable ranges in a plurality of stages at all times,
The second adjustment function is a function of changing and setting the volume within the effective range,
A game machine characterized in that the effect control device executes an effect based on the volume set by the second adjustment function.
Here, the first adjustment function corresponds to the adjustment function of the effective range of the sound volume by the sound volume SW 338 in the present embodiment (function realized by the steps D51, D52, etc.). In the present embodiment, the second adjustment function changes the hall volume (step D62, etc.), changes the volume in the hall setting mode (step D96), or changes the volume in the player setting mode (step D111). This function corresponds to the volume adjustment function performed by the cursor left / right operation described above.

The lower concept (4-2) of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The effective range always has the same adjustable range (10 steps in this embodiment),
A game machine characterized in that the first adjustment function is a function of selecting and setting one of a plurality of effective ranges which are different in maximum volume and equal in adjustable range.
The lower concept (4-3) of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game machine characterized in that the setting changed by the first adjustment function is configured to be stored and held even if power supply to the game machine is cut off.

The background of the above-mentioned inventive concept (4) will be described below.
In conventional gaming machines, there are multiple levels (for example, 10 levels) of volume settings, and it was only possible to set at any of these levels. For this reason, it has been impossible to restrict the volume adjustment by the player to the volume range intended by the hole while securing the adjustment range of the volume adjustment by the player.
In addition to the volume adjustment function by the player, it is conceivable to provide a function capable of setting the upper limit of the volume adjustment by the hole, for example, the hole is "3" out of 10 steps from "0" to "9". If the upper limit of the volume adjustment is set, the player can adjust only three steps, and in the extreme, if "1" is set to the upper limit of the volume adjustment, the player only has one step It can not be adjusted and the player may be dissatisfied.
However, in the above-described inventive concept (4), for example, a plurality of volume setting tables are provided, each having an adjustment width of, for example, 10 steps, and the range of the volume adjustable for each table (maximum volume, minimum volume value) In the hall (gaming shop), instead of the upper limit setting, selection is made from a plurality of volume setting tables, and the player can adjust the volume within the range of each selected volume setting table. is there. For this reason, the player can always perform, for example, 10 levels of volume adjustment, while holes can limit the volume as intended in a range of multiple levels corresponding to the number of volume setting tables.
In the embodiment described above, although the number of the volume setting table (ie, the number of steps which can be changed by the first adjustment function) is 12, for example, "large" and "medium" shown in FIG. ",""Small" may be three stages (the number of sound volume setting tables is three). Further, the width of the effective range (adjustable range) is not limited to 10 stages, and the number of stages can be changed as appropriate. Further, the width of the effective range of the sound volume is not limited to the aspect that it is always constant (that is, the sound volume ranges of the plurality of sound volume setting tables are all the same). For example, there may be an aspect in which the width of the effective range changes with the change of the maximum sound volume (or the minimum sound volume).

(Invention concept (5))
In the present embodiment, as described in the high probability change count updating process and the like of the game control apparatus 100, it is possible to execute the variation display game of the common drawing at the same time as the variation display game of the special drawing. In the case of a hit, the start area opening / closing means (opening / closing member 26b) is opened in a predetermined opening pattern (such as a predetermined opening time and the number of times of opening) and The game state of the special view can be switched to a high probability state in which a certain big hit probability is raised and a low probability state in which the big hit probability becomes lower than the high probability state, and the game ball to the second start winning opening 26a It is possible to switch the game state of the common drawing between the support state (general power support state) for performing special control to facilitate the winning of the game and the normal state for not performing the special control, and switching the game state for the special drawing And the said Performed in conjunction with the switching of the playing state (step S758, S759, etc.).
Then, as described in the processing during the common view display (FIG. 75) and FIGS. 124 to 126 and 128, the opening pattern of the start area opening / closing means converts the start area opening / closing means from the closed state to the open state. Determined according to the game state of the common drawing at the time of the game (step B114), if the game state of the common drawing is the normal state, the common drawing probability that is the probability that the variable display game of the common drawing will be hit Is set to zero, and when the gaming state of the common drawing is the support state, the probability per common drawing is set greater than zero, and the gaming state of the common drawing is the opening pattern of the start area opening / closing means In addition to the opening pattern in the support state, it has a dedicated opening pattern (100 ms × 1) in the case where the gaming state of the common drawing is the normal state.
For this reason, when switching to the normal state before opening the post-starting region per common drawing, there is obtained an effect that the opening operation of the starting region is favorably performed with the dedicated opening pattern.

The inventive concept (5) of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The start area provided in the game area where the game ball flows down, the open state where the possibility of winning the game ball to the start area is high, or the possibility of winning the game ball to the start area is lower than the open state. Start area opening / closing means that can be converted to the closed state, special figure display means that can display the special figure, and can play the variable drawing game of the special figure, and display the common drawing, the variable display game of the common drawing And a control means for controlling the special view display means and the common view display means.
A game machine that performs a special view variation display game on the condition that the game ball has won the start area, and generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the special view variation display game results in a special result. And
The control means
The variable display game of the common drawing can be executed simultaneously with the variable display game of the special drawing, and when the variable display game of the common drawing is hit, the start area opening / closing means is opened in a predetermined opening pattern (a predetermined opening time And the opening frequency etc.)
The game state of the special figure is switched to the high probability state which raised the probability that the variable display game of the special figure will be a special result, and the low probability state where the probability of the special result is lower than the high probability state. Is possible,
It is possible to switch the gaming state of the common drawing between the support state for performing special control to facilitate winning of the game ball in the start area and the normal state for not performing the special control,
Interlocking switching of the gaming state of the special view and switching of the gaming state of the common view,
The opening pattern of the start area opening / closing means is determined according to the gaming state of the drawing at the time of converting the start area opening / closing means from the closed state to the open state,
If the game state of the common drawing is the normal state, set the common drawing probability, which is the probability that the variable display game of the common drawing will be a hit, to zero,
When the gaming state of the common drawing is the support state, the probability per common drawing is set larger than zero,
As the opening pattern of the starting area opening / closing means, in addition to the opening pattern when the gaming state of the common drawing is the support state, it has the exclusive opening pattern when the gaming state of the common drawing is the normal state A gaming machine to be.
Here, when the starting area opening and closing means is in the closed state, the winning possibility to the starting area provided with the starting area opening and closing means may be zero (no winning possible).

The lower concept (5-2) of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The opening pattern when the gaming state of the common drawing is the support state includes a plurality of opening patterns different from each other,
The opening time of the one opening time in the dedicated opening pattern is longer than the opening time of the opening pattern in the opening pattern when the gaming state of the common figure is the support state. There is a short, gaming machine characterized by.
The lower concept (5-3) of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The open pattern when the gaming state of the common figure is the support state is determined according to the hit symbol of the common figure,
A game machine characterized in that a common opening pattern is determined as the exclusive opening pattern regardless of a hit pattern of a common drawing.

The background of the above invention concept (5) will be described below.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, the one disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-135346, a lottery for a normal symbol (popular drawing) is made, and if the lottery result is a hit, the starting opening of the special symbol (special drawing) A certain ordinary electric character (Puden) is opened, and the fluctuation display of the special symbol is started on the variable display device by entering the ordinary electric character, and the special lottery is conducted. Then, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a hit, the variable display device is hit and the symbol is determined and displayed, and the special winning opening is continuously opened to provide a special gaming state advantageous to the player.
Also, in the conventional gaming machine, after the end of the special game on the basis of the special symbol, the gaming state in which the probability of hitting the special symbol is changed to a high probability, the gaming state in which the normal symbol is changed to a high probability, an ordinary electric character Transition to the gaming state to extend the opening time of the time, the short game state to reduce the fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

  By the way, as described above, control to increase the probability of hitting the common drawing (probable variation of the common drawing), control to shorten the fluctuation time of the common drawing (shorting of the common drawing), or extend the open time of the common charge The control facilitates the winning (inflow of gaming balls) to the poten (starting opening), and thus makes it easier to generate a hit (big hit) of the special figure. And, in the common power support state (so-called power supply state) where special control regarding such common drawing is performed and in the normal state where such special control is not performed, the hit probability or common power of common drawing is How to set specifications regarding a common drawing such as an opening pattern (e.g. opening time) of the game is an important issue that affects the performance of the gaming machine.

Therefore, in the present embodiment to which the above-described inventive concept (5) is applied, first, as shown in FIG. In the above, it is zero (ie, "0/251"). As a result, the superiority of the common power support state is relatively greatly enhanced, the expectation for the common power support state (which is also the special figure high probability state in this example) is increased, and the interest is improved.
Then, as shown in FIG. 124, as the opening pattern of the start area opening / closing means, in addition to the plurality of opening patterns when the gaming state of the common drawing is the support state, the exclusive pattern when the gaming state of the common drawing is the normal state Has an open pattern “100 ms × 1”. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an unexpected number of prizes in a normal state in which you do not want to win, or to prevent the game design from being upset. The reason is that the open pattern in the normal state is not prepared in the normal state because the spread does not meet in the normal state (the probability per spread is zero). For example, the open pattern in the high probability is used, the open Since time is extended or the number of opening times is increased, a considerable number of unexpected start-up winnings occur in a normal state where it is not desirable to win a prize, and the game design will be upset. However, as in the case of the above-mentioned invention concept (5), if it has a dedicated general-purpose open pattern in the normal state, the above-mentioned specification that is difficult to win is set as the special-purpose open general pattern. An unexpected start winning can be suppressed or avoided. Therefore, when switching to the normal state before opening the start-up area per common drawing, it is possible to obtain the effect that the opening area of the start-up area is favorably performed with the dedicated opening pattern.

As in the present embodiment (FIG. 124) to which the above-mentioned lower concept (5-2) is applied, the single release time in the common release pattern in the case of the common support state is the shortest release (FIG. 124). Then, in the normal state, the open time (“100 ms” in FIG. 124) having the longest open time in the dedicated open pattern is shorter than that of “500 ms”) in the open state. Unforeseen start winnings can be avoided more reliably.
Further, as in the present embodiment (FIG. 124) to which the lower concept (5-3) is applied, a common open pattern “100 ms × 1” is used as the dedicated open pattern regardless of the hit pattern of the common drawing. With the configuration to be determined, it is not necessary to select the open pattern according to the hit symbol, and there are advantages such as simplification of control processing and elimination of a data table for the selection.

As a modified example of the above-mentioned inventive concept (5), an opening pattern (“500 ms × 1” in FIG. 124) which is most disadvantageous to the player among the opening patterns in the high probability (during normal power support) is It is good also as an open pattern in the figure low probability (normal state). However, in that case, there is a high possibility that the board and program can not be used in common with models that have a common figure even during low probability (a model whose probability per common figure in the normal state is not zero). The aspect of the embodiment (the aspect having a dedicated short charge release pattern in the normal state) is excellent. In this case, among the test signals output to the test apparatus during the high probability, the "general power release extension status signal" does not correspond (ie, it is not a signal to be output). It is because it can not be said that it is open extension by the same as the open time in the common figure high probability. Therefore, when the "normal symbol 1 high probability state signal" and the "normal electric character 1 open extension state signal" are connected in hardware (that is, they are simultaneously output), the main substrate (game The control device 100) can not be used in common (since when the general drawing is in a high probability state, one side is applicable and the other state is not applicable). In order to avoid this, it is conceivable to design separately in advance, but in that case there is a disadvantage that the number of output ports used increases. However, the number of outputs of the test signal is large, which goes against the demand for saving as much as possible. Therefore, the embodiment of the above-mentioned embodiment without such a problem is excellent.
However, if the main substrate is not used in common, the spread pattern change time during low probability and high probability may be made the same, or the open pattern of the common charge may be made as in the above modification.

Next, other features and effects of the embodiment or the modification described above will be described.
First, in the modification described with reference to FIG. 119, in the gaming machine that outputs voice and the like when the handle is touched (touch to the firing operation handle 11), the type of voice or the like to be output is changed according to the game state. Therefore, by outputting a voice or the like according to the game state at the time of the handle touch, the player can be prevented from being bored, and the player can be encouraged or admired in a timely manner to enhance the interest.

  Further, in the above embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 122 and the like, it is determined whether the effect control device 300 has the volume setting knob (the operation unit of the volume SW 338) and the value of the volume setting knob is correct. (In the above embodiment, it has an LED lighting control function (function to light the setting confirmation LED 339) for easily identifying whether the setting of the effective range of the volume matches the default setting value. In addition, the value (setting state) of the volume setting by the volume setting knob is a setting screen for holes (for example, the above-mentioned figure) to be called by a special operation method (in the above embodiment, operation of volume SW 338) which the player can not use. In the hall volume setting screen shown at 107), change and backup are possible at any time. For this reason, it becomes extremely easy for the store clerk or the like in the hall to adjust the volume (in the above embodiment, the setting of the effective range of the volume described above) to the default setting, and the volume once set is backed up Because there is no need to reset by power off.

  It should be noted that, as the recent gaming machines comply with the noise regulations, the volume is lowered at the time of shipment. Therefore, when installed in a hall, a hall employee or the like often sets the volume. In addition, it is also necessary for a worker or the like at a gaming machine manufacturing factory to set the volume of the gaming machine to a default state for shipment. At this time, since the size of the volume setting knob is generally small due to the arrangement space and the like, the number of the scale of the knob is also very small, and there is a problem that the setting state is very difficult to confirm. On the other hand, in the above embodiment, the default setting state stored in advance in the backup memory (for example, FeRAM 327) capable of storing and retaining data even during power failure of the presentation control device 300 and the substrate of the presentation control device 300 (or near) That the setting state of the volume setting knob of the peripheral substrate may be the same as that of the LED (not limited to the LED) disposed on the substrate of the effect control device 300 (or may be a nearby peripheral substrate) By notifying by the light emitting means or the display means, the hall employee or the like can extremely easily perform the setting by the volume setting knob. That is, it is sufficient to operate the volume setting knob appropriately and stop the operation of the volume setting knob at a position where the LED or the like indicates a match (it may be lighted or extinguished).

Further, the modification described in the lower part of FIG. 123 has a function that allows the player to freely adjust the volume of the volume emitted from the gaming machine for each of the high, middle, and low ranges. There is an individual difference between people in the easy-to-hear range, but in this way the player can adjust the volume for each range, so that there is an effect that an optimal game environment can be realized according to the player's own preference and constitution. .
In addition, the conventional volume control function could adjust only the magnitude of the volume common to all the sound areas. Therefore, even if only a part of high pitched sound or heavy bass is felt offensive, the volume of all the pitches must be lowered, so the volume of BGM or music that you originally wanted to hear also becomes small, so you are willing to play Was a problem that On the other hand, if it becomes possible to adjust for each range as in the above-mentioned modification, the volume can be reduced only in the range which the player feels unpleasant, and a comfortable gaming environment can be realized. It is possible to increase the game's willingness to play.

Next, another modification of the present invention will be described.
The present invention may be modified as follows.
(1) In the first embodiment, detection information of a touch detection means (touch switch 11a) for detecting a touch on the launch operation handle 11 is transmitted from the payout control device 200 to the game control device 100 as a touch switch signal, and game control is further performed. Although it is transmitting from the device 100 to the effect control device 300 as a firing command (a state off command or a state on command related to a touch switch signal), the present invention is not limited to this mode. For example, the detection information of the contact detection means may be directly input to the game control device 100 and transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, or the detection information of the contact detection means may be directly sent to the effect control device 300. It may be an input mode.

(2) In the modification described in the lower part of FIG. 123, the volume can be changed for each sound range, but instead of such a function or in addition to such a function, the player can change the sound for each type of sound. The configuration may be such that the volume can be changed. For example, the type of sound may be classified as BGM, voice (a song sung by a character appearing in effect display), or SE (sound effect), and a function capable of adjusting the volume for each type of sound may be provided. In this case, it is preferable to provide some of the adjusted settings for those who do not care about the details. In addition, when the volume setting is registered in the cooperation application (the application is the application software) of a mobile phone (including a smartphone) that links the mobile phone site and the gaming machine, it is possible to play the game while inheriting the previous setting. It is good also as composition which can be done.

Although it was difficult to hear the character's voice, and it was tried to raise the volume, there may be cases where the volume is already maximum or only the sound effect is annoying, but as in the above modification, the volume adjustment is fine If the player can play the game, the player can be set according to his / her preference and can enjoy the game more. In addition, it is thought that there are a lot of parts that can be adjusted because it is possible to make detailed settings, and some people come to be bothersome. As a result, some adjustments can be made without any effort. In addition, when it is registered in the model of the same maker and the linked application, and a game is started using a password, it is set every time if it is possible to start the game from the state where the previous setting is inherited. There is no need to
In addition, the volume control of the conventional gaming machine can only change the volume of several steps, and can only raise and lower the overall volume. On the other hand, in the case of the above modification, the player can set the volume according to his / her preference for each type of sound.

Next, the scope of application of the invention described in the present application will be described.
(1) Even in the case where a game machine is to play a game using a game ball, it can be applied not only to the example as in the embodiment but also to an enclosed ball type game machine.
(2) Also, the present invention is not limited to a gaming machine using gaming balls, and may be applied to so-called pachislot machines (thumbnail type slot machine gaming machines) etc. that play games using coins (or medals) There are times when you can.
(3) The display device such as the display device of the decorative special figure is not limited to the display device using liquid crystal, for example, display such as organic EL, cathode ray tube, dot LED, 7 segment LED, device using material bending like electronic paper Any member can be used as long as the content can be changed to produce effects.

  It should be understood that the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is indicated not by the above description but by claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to claims.

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
4 front frame (body frame, game frame)
5 Glass frame (front frame)
9 effect button 9a touch panel 11 firing operation handle (operation part)
11a Touch switch (contact detection means)
12a Upper speaker (representation means)
12b Lower speaker (representation means)
14 logo display section 16 ball lending button 20 game board 25 first starting winning opening (starting opening, starting area)
26 Regular Fluctuation Winning Device (Normal Electric Character: Fuden)
26a 2nd start winning opening (starting opening, starting area)
26b Opening and closing member (opening and closing door, starting opening opening and closing means, starting area opening and closing means)
27 Fluctuation Winning Device (Special Fluctuation Winning Device)
27a large winning opening 27b opening and closing member (opening and closing door)
32 common drawing start gate 35 collective display unit (display means, special drawing display means, common drawing display means)
41 Display device (reproduction means, display means, special view display means, common view display means)
42 Board decoration device (representation means)
43 Frame decoration device (representation means)
44 Board production device (production means)
55 External Information Terminal Board 100 Game Control Device (Control Device, Control Means)
101 gaming microcomputer 101A CPU
101B ROM
101C RAM
120 1st start port switch (start port 1 switch)
121 2nd start port switch (start port 2 switch)
122 gate switch 123 winning opening switch 124 large winning opening switch 126 magnetic sensor 127 panel radio sensor 200 payout control device 211 glass frame (front frame) opening detection switch 212 front frame (body frame) opening detection switch 300 presentation control device (control device , Control means)
311 CPU
311a RAM
312 VDP
321 PROM
322 image ROM
326 RAM
327 FeRAM (backup memory)
338 Volume SW
339 LED for setting confirmation
500 power supply

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on establishment of a predetermined start condition and generating a special gaming state advantageous to a player when the game results in a special result,
An operation unit operated by the player;
Rendering means capable of performing rendering related to the game;
And effect control means for controlling the effect.
The effect control means is
A game machine characterized by having a function of changing the effect to be performed by the effect means before the game is started, in response to an operation of the operation unit being performed during execution of customer waiting effects.

Images